r2015 (full time) - Mepco Schlenk Engineering College, Sivakasi

Transcription

MEPCO SCHLENK ENGINEERING COLLEGE, SIVAKASI (AUTONOMOUS)
AFFILIATED TO ANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI 600 025
REGULATIONS: MEPCO - R2015 (FULL TIME)
(CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM)
B. E. – COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
Department Vision
Department Mission
To become the centre of excellence in
computer education & research and to
create the platform for industrial
consultancy
o
To produce globally competent and quality computer
professionals by educating computer concepts and techniques.
o
To facilitate the students to work with recent tools and
technologies.
o
To mould the students by inculcating the spirit of ethical values
contributing to the societal ethics.
Programme Educational Objectives (PEOs):
After 4 to 6 years of completing the Programme on Bachelor of Computer Science and Engineering, the
graduates will become:
1.
Competent Computer/Software Engineer rendering expertise to the industrial and societal needs in an
effective manner
2.
Sustained learner by adapting to societal change for improved career opportunities in industries,
academics and entrepreneurial endeavours
3.
Team leader ethically committed to the profession in a multi-disciplinary environment with positive
attitude towards the individual, industry and society
Programme Outcomes (POs):
During the course of the programme on Bachelor of Computer Science and Engineering the learners will acquire
the ability to:
PO No.
POs
1.
Apply knowledge
engineering
of mathematics, science and engineering fundamentals in computer
2.
Design a Computer system with c o m p o n e n t s and processes of desired needs within
realistic constraints such as economics, e n vi r o n m e n t a l , social, political, ethical, health and
safety.
3.
Identify and modify the functions of the internal software components such as operating systems
and compilers
4.
Apply Software Engineering principles, techniques and tools for software development
5.
Acquire programming skills for application development in real-world problem solving
6.
Create, collect, process, view, organize, store, mine and retrieve data in both local and remote
locations in a secure and effective manner
7.
Design and conduct experiments, as well as to analyze and interpret
foundation for solving complex problems
8.
Develop project management techniques and to work in team for successful reach of information
to the end users
9.
Create technical reports, presentations, for effective communication.
10.
Participate and succeed in various competitive examinations
data laying
PO No.
POs
11.
Realize professional and ethical responsibility and act in accordance to social welfare
12.
Engage in life-long learning acquiring knowledge of contemporary issues so as to face the
career challenges
13.
Apply the skills and techniques in computer engineering and inter-disciplinary domains for providing
solutions in a global, economic, environmental, and societal context
CURRICULUM (I to VIII SEMESTER)
SEMESTER- I (Common to all UG Programmes)
SL. NO.
COURSE CODE
COURSE TITLE
L
T
P
C
THEORY
1.
15HS101
Technical English – I
3
0
2
4
2.
15BS101
Mathematics – I
3
2
0
4
3.
15BS102
Engineering Physics
3
0
0
3
4.
15BS103
Engineering Chemistry
3
0
0
3
5.
15GE101
Computer Programming
3
0
0
3
6.
15GE102
Engineering Graphics
2
0
4
4
PRACTICAL
7.
15BS151
Physics and Chemistry Laboratory
0
0
4
2
8.
15GE151
Computer Programming Laboratory
0
0
4
2
9.
15GE152
Engineering Practices Laboratory
0
0
4
2
17
2
18
27
L
T
P
C
TOTAL
SEMESTER II – Computer Science and Engineering
SL.NO.
COURSE CODE
COURSE TITLE
THEORY
1.
15HS201
Technical English – II*
3
0
0
3
2.
15BS201
Mathematics – II*
3
2
0
4
3.
15BS202
Environmental Science and Disaster Management*
3
0
0
3
4.
15BS204
Materials Science
3
0
0
3
(Common to EEE, ECE, CSE & IT)
5.
15EC201
Electric Circuits and Electron Devices
(Common to CSE /IT)
3
2
0
4
6.
15CS201
Object Oriented Programming
3
0
0
3
15BS251
Applied Physics and Environmental Chemistry Laboratory
0
0
4
2
0
0
4
2
18
4
8
24
PRACTICAL
7.
(common to EEE/ECE/CSE/MECH/IT/BT)
(Laboratory Classes on Alternate Weeks for Physics and
Environmental Chemistry)
8.
15CS252
Object Oriented Programming Laboratory
TOTAL
* Common to all UG Programmes
1
SEMESTER - III
SL.NO.
COURSE CODE
COURSE TITLE
L
T
P
C
3
2
0
4
THEORY
Mathematics III - Discrete Mathematics
1.
15MA304
2.
15HS301
Professional Ethics
2
0
0
2
3.
15CS301
Data Structures and Algorithms
3
0
0
3
4.
15CS302
Digital Principles and System Design
(Common to CSE / IT)
3
0
0
3
5.
15CS303
Computer Organization and Architecture
3
2
0
4
6.
15IT303
Principles of Communication
3
0
0
3
PRACTICAL
7.
15HS351
Presentation Skills Laboratory
0
0
2
1
8.
15CS351
Data Structures Laboratory
0
0
4
2
9.
15EC354
Digital Circuits Laboratory
0
0
4
2
17
4
10
24
L
T
P
C
TOTAL
SEMESTER – IV
SL.NO.
COURSE CODE
COURSE TITLE
THEORY
1.
15MA404
Mathematics IV - Probability and Queuing Theory
3
2
0
4
2.
15CS401
Microprocessors and Micro Controllers
3
0
0
3
3.
15CS402
Design and Analysis of Algorithms
3
0
0
3
4.
15CS403
Theory of Computation
3
2
0
4
5.
15CS404
Software Engineering Principles
3
0
0
3
6.
15IT401
Database Management Systems
3
0
0
3
PRACTICAL
7.
15CS451
Microprocessors and Micro Controllers Laboratory
0
0
4
2
8.
15IT451
Database Management System Laboratory
0
0
4
2
18
4
8
24
TOTAL
2
SEMESTER - V
SL.NO.
COURSE CODE
COURSE TITLE
L
T
P
C
THEORY
1.
15CS501
Programming with JAVA
3
0
0
3
2.
15CS502
Operating Systems
3
0
0
3
3.
15CS503
Computer Networks
3
0
2
4
4.
Core Elective – I
3
0
0
3
5.
Open Elective – I
3
0
0
3
6.
Allied Elective – I
3
0
0
3
PRACTICAL
7.
15HS551
Professional Communication Skills Lab
0
0
4
2
8.
15CS551
JAVA Laboratory
0
0
4
2
9.
15CS552
Operating System Laboratory
0
0
4
2
18
0
14
25
L
T
P
C
TOTAL
SEMESTER - VI
SL.NO.
COURSE CODE
COURSE TITLE
THEORY
1.
15CS601
System Software and Compiler Design
3
0
0
3
2.
15CS602
Principles of Distributed Systems
3
0
0
3
3.
15IT602
Object Oriented Analysis and Design
3
0
0
3
4.
Core Elective – II
3
0
0
3
5.
Open Elective – II
3
0
0
3
6.
Allied Elective – II
3
0
0
3
PRACTICAL
7.
15CS651
System Software and Compiler Laboratory
0
0
4
2
8.
15IT652
Object Oriented Analysis and Design Laboratory
0
0
4
2
17
0
10
22
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
TOTAL
SEMESTER - VII
SL.NO.
COURSE CODE
COURSE TITLE
THEORY
1.
15CS701
Computer Graphics
3
SL.NO.
L
T
P
C
Computational Intelligence
3
0
2
4
3.
Core Elective – III
3
0
0
3
4.
Core Elective – IV
3
0
0
3
5.
Core Elective – V
3
0
0
3
6.
Open Elective – III
3
0
0
3
2.
COURSE CODE
15CS702
COURSE TITLE
PRACTICAL
7.
15CS751
Computer Graphics Laboratory
0
0
4
2
8.
15CS752
Software Application Development Laboratory
0
0
4
2
18
0
10
23
L
T
P
C
TOTAL
SEMESTER - VIII
SL.NO.
COURSE CODE
COURSE TITLE
THEORY
1.
Core Elective – VI
3
0
0
3
2.
Open Elective – IV
3
0
0
3
0
0
12
6
6
0
12
12
PRACTICAL
3.
15CS851
Project Work
TOTAL
Total Credits for the Course
181
CORE ELECTIVE – I (FOR SEMESTER V)
SL.NO.
COURSE CODE
COURSE TITLE
L
T
P
C
1.
15CSC01
Parallel Computing Architecture (Common to CSE / IT)
3
0
0
3
2.
15CSC02
Embedded System Development
3
0
0
3
3.
15CSC03
Introduction to Digital Signal Processing
3
0
0
3
4.
15CSC04
Web Programming
2
0
2
3
5.
15ITC05
Software Project Management (Common to CSE / IT)
3
0
0
3
L
T
P
C
CORE ELECTIVE – II (FOR SEMESTER VI)
SL.NO.
COURSE CODE
COURSE TITLE
1.
15CSC05
J2EE Technology
2
0
2
3
2.
15CSC06
Parallel Programming
2
0
2
3
3.
15CSC07
Multimedia Systems
3
0
0
3
4
SL.NO.
COURSE CODE
COURSE TITLE
L
T
P
C
4.
15CSC08
Digital Imaging
2
0
2
3
5.
15CSC09
Advanced Data Structures
2
0
2
3
6.
15CSC10
Fundamentals of Big Data (offered by Infosys)
2
0
2
3
7.
15CSC26
Combinatorics and Graph Theory (Common to CSE / IT)
3
0
0
3
8.
15ITC37
Statistics (Common to CSE / IT)
3
0
0
3
L
T
P
C
CORE ELECTIVE – III, IV AND V (FOR SEMESTER VII)
SL.NO.
COURSE CODE
COURSE TITLE
1.
15CSC11
Mobile Application Development
2
0
2
3
2.
15CSC12
Network Analysis and Management
3
0
0
3
3.
15CSC13
Data Warehousing and Data Mining
3
0
0
3
4.
15CSC14
Virtual Machines
3
0
0
3
5.
15CSC15
Machine to Machine Communication
3
0
0
3
6.
15CSC16
Data Science
3
0
0
3
7.
15CSC17
Real Time Systems
3
0
0
3
8.
15CSC18
Virtual Reality and Augmented Reality
3
0
0
3
9.
15CSC19
Grid and Cluster Computing
3
0
0
3
10.
15CSC20
Natural Language Processing
3
0
0
3
11.
15CSC21
Design Patterns
3
0
0
3
12.
15CSC22
Introduction to Machine Learning
3
0
0
3
13.
15ITC14
Service Oriented Architecture
3
0
0
3
14.
15ITC15
Ad hoc and Sensor Networks
3
0
0
3
15.
15ITC16
Cloud Computing
3
0
0
3
L
T
P
C
CORE ELECTIVE – VI (FOR SEMESTER VIII)
SL.NO.
COURSE CODE
COURSE TITLE
1.
15CSC23
Software Quality and Testing
3
0
0
3
2.
15CSC24
Information Storage and Retrieval
3
0
0
3
3.
15CSC25
Human Computer Interaction (Common to CSE / IT)
3
0
0
3
4.
15ITC33
Software Defined Networks (Common to CSE / IT)
3
0
0
3
5
ALLIED ELECTIVES - CURRICULUM
Offered by Civil Department
V SEMESTER
SL.NO.
COURSE CODE
COURSE TITLE
L
T
P
C
1.
15CEA01
Industrial Pollution Prevention and Control
3
0
0
3
2.
15CEA02
Introduction to Engineering Seismology
3
0
0
3
3.
15CEA03
Solar Energy Utilization
3
0
0
3
4.
15CEA04
Environmental Geotechnology
3
0
0
3
5.
15CEA05
Principles of Global Positioning System
3
0
0
3
COURSE TITLE
L
T
P
C
VI SEMESTER
SL.NO.
COURSE CODE
1.
15CEA06
Non-Conventional Energy Resources
3
0
0
3
2.
15CEA07
Energy Conservation and Management
3
0
0
3
3.
15CEA08
Environmental Impact Assessment
3
0
0
3
4.
15CEA09
Fundamentals of Supply Chain
3
0
0
3
5.
15CEA10
Coastal Engineering
3
0
0
3
6.
15CEA11
Manufacturing Cost Estimation
3
0
0
3
L
T
P
C
Offered by EEE Department
V SEMESTER
SL.NO.
COURSE CODE
COURSE TITLE
1.
15EEA01
Industrial Instrumentation
3
0
0
3
2.
15EEA02
Illumination Engineering
3
0
0
3
3.
15EEA03
Switch Mode Power Converters
3
0
0
3
4.
15EEA04
Power Plant Instrumentation and Control
3
0
0
3
5.
15EEA05
Electrical Machines and Drives
3
0
0
3
L
T
P
C
VI SEMESTER
SL.NO.
COURSE CODE
COURSE TITLE
1.
15EEA06
Real Time Embedded Systems
3
0
0
3
2.
15EEA07
Fundamentals of Electric Power Utilization
3
0
0
3
3.
15EEA08
Soft Computing Techniques and Applications
3
0
0
3
4.
15EEA09
Fundamentals of Power Quality
3
0
0
3
5.
15EEA10
Wiring, Estimation and Costing
3
0
0
3
6
Offered by ECE Department
V SEMESTER
SL.NO.
COURSE CODE
COURSE TITLE
L
T
P
C
1.
15ECA01
Communication Systems
3
0
0
3
2.
15ECA02
Microprocessors and Applications
3
0
0
3
3.
15ECA03
MATLAB Programming
2
0
2
3
4.
15ECA04
Antenna Fundamentals
3
0
0
3
5.
15ECA05
Television Engineering
3
0
0
3
L
T
P
C
VI SEMESTER
SL.NO.
COURSE CODE
COURSE TITLE
1.
15ECA06
Remote Sensing Techniques
3
0
0
3
2.
15ECA07
Embedded Systems
3
0
0
3
3.
15ECA08
Optical Communication
3
0
0
3
4.
15ECA09
Mobile Communication
3
0
0
3
5.
15ECA10
Very Large Scale Integrated Circuits
3
0
0
3
L
T
P
C
Offered by Mechanical Department
V SEMESTER
SL.NO.
COURSE CODE
COURSE TITLE
THEORY
1.
15MEA01
Automotive Maintenance and Pollution Control
3
0
0
3
2.
15MEA02
Fundamentals of Energy Resources
3
0
0
3
3.
15MEA03
Manufacturing for Industrial Electronics
3
0
0
3
4.
15MEA04
Human Factors in Engineering
3
0
0
3
5.
15MEA05
Decision Support Systems
3
0
0
3
6.
15MEA06
Engineering Economics and Cost Analysis
3
0
0
3
7.
15MEA07
Nano Technology
3
0
0
3
8.
15MEA08
Fuel Cell & Hydrogen Energy
3
0
0
3
9.
15MEA09
Bio-Mechanics and human body vibration
3
0
0
3
L
T
P
C
VI SEMESTER
SL.NO.
COURSE CODE
COURSE TITLE
THEORY
1.
15MEA10
Fundamentals of Thermal Science
3
0
0
3
2.
15MEA11
Fundamentals of Lithography
3
0
0
3
3.
15MEA12
Fundamentals of Fire Safety Engineering
3
0
0
3
4.
15MEA13
High Energetic material - Propellants
3
0
0
3
5.
15MEA14
Direct Digital Manufacturing
3
0
0
3
7
SL.NO.
COURSE CODE
COURSE TITLE
L
T
P
C
6.
15MEA15
Instrumental Analysis of Materials
3
0
0
3
7.
15MEA16
Basics of Aircraft and Space Technology
3
0
0
3
8.
15MEA17
Introduction to MATLAB with Engineering Applications
3
0
0
3
9.
15MEA18
Micro and Nano Fabrication
3
0
0
3
10.
15MEA19
Fundamentals of Nature Inspired Algorithms
3
0
0
3
11.
15MEA20
Energy Efficient Buildings
3
0
0
3
12.
15MEA21
Water Treatment Technology
3
0
0
3
L
T
P
C
Offered by IT Department
V SEMESTER
SL.NO.
COURSE CODE
COURSE TITLE
1.
15ITA01
Introduction to Computer Graphics
3
0
0
3
2.
15ITA02
Rich Internet Application
3
0
0
3
3.
15ITA03
Introduction to Java
3
0
0
3
4.
15ITA04
Perl
3
0
0
3
5.
15ITA05
Fuzzy Systems
3
0
0
3
VI SEMESTER
SL.
NO.
COURSE CODE
COURSE TITLE
L
T
P
C
1.
15ITA06
Graphics Programming
3
0
0
3
2.
15ITA07
PHP Programming
3
0
0
3
3.
15ITA08
Android Application Development
3
0
0
3
4.
15ITA09
Python Programming
3
0
0
3
5.
15ITA10
Decision Making Methods
3
0
0
3
Offered by Bio-Tech Department
V SEMESTER
SL.NO.
COURSE CODE
COURSE TITLE
L
T
P
C
1.
15BTA01
Basic Cell and Molecular Biology
3
0
0
3
2.
15BTA02
Basic Microbiology
3
0
0
3
3.
15BTA03
Basic Biochemistry
3
0
0
3
4.
15BTA04
Basic immunology
3
0
0
3
L
T
P
C
VI SEMESTER
SL.NO.
COURSE CODE
COURSE TITLE
1.
15BTA05
Chemicals in Environment and Public Health
3
0
0
3
2.
15BTA06
Biological Waste Management
3
0
0
3
3.
15BTA07
Nanobiotechnology
3
0
0
3
4.
15BTA08
Human Physiology
3
0
0
3
8
Offered by MBA Department
VI SEMESTER
SL.NO.
COURSE CODE
COURSE TITLE
L
T
P
C
1.
15BAA01
Essentials of Finance
3
0
0
3
2.
15BAA02
Essentials of Marketing
3
0
0
3
3.
15BAA03
Essentials of Human Resource Management
3
0
0
3
9
SYLLABUS (I to VIII SEMESTER)
SEMESTER- I (Common to all UG Programmes)
Technical English – I
LT P C
(Common to all UG Programmes)
3 02 4
15HS101
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

Enable the students of Engineering and Technology build up vocabulary

Improve grammatical accuracy

Develop language functions

Understand the basic nuances of language
COURSE OUTCOMES:

The students of Engineering and Technology will be able to build up their vocabulary

Grammatical accuracy will be improved

Language functions will be developed

The basic nuances of language will be understood
UNIT-I
12
Listening–Importance of listening- Types of listening - Listening to audio files and understanding the concept;
Speaking -Speaking about one’s place, important festivals etc. – Introducing oneself, one’s family / friend; Asking
for Information; Reading - Skimming and Scanning - Note-making - Reading comprehension exercises; Writing Free writing on any given topic (My favourite place / Hobbies / School life, etc.) - Sentence completionAutobiographical writing (writing about one’s leisure time activities, hometown, etc.) - Creative Writing;
Grammar–Parts of Speech- Kinds of Sentences- Framing questions; Vocabulary -Word formation - Word
expansion
UNIT-II
12
Listening - Listening and responding to video lectures / talks; Listening exercises with sample telephone
conversations; Speaking - Describing a simple process (filling a form, etc.) - Asking & answering questions on
various everyday activities: Telephone skills – Telephone etiquette. Reading – Critical reading - Finding key
information in a given text and paraphrasing - Sifting facts from opinions; Value Based Text Reading and
thematic analysis. Writing: Informal letter – Letter to the editor (Regarding Social Issues) - Single line Definitions
– Recommendations- Paragraph Writing; (cause & effect / compare & contrast / narrative / analytical)
Grammar– tense - Use of sequence words - Adverbs -; Vocabulary –prefixes and Suffixes -Compound words.
UNIT-III
12
Listening - Listening to specific task - focused audio tracks - Listening to different accents - Watching videos /
documentaries and responding to questions based on them and giving personal opinion.
Speaking - Speaking in formal situations (teachers, officials, foreigners); Role-play and Simulation
Reading - Reading and interpreting data given as visual material. Writing– Coherence and cohesion in writing- Channel conversion -Process descriptions – interpretations of Pictures of flow charts, graphs, pie charts and
tables - Essay writing – Different types of essays. Grammar– Articles - Connective adverbs – Subject-verb
agreement-; Vocabulary – Same word in a different parts of speech & Word Association
UNIT-IV
12
Listening - Excerpts from films focusing on theme and follow up exercises - film scenes; Speaking - Responding
to questions - Giving impromptu talks, Making presentations on given topics- Group interaction; Reading Making inference from the reading passage - Predicting the content of a reading passage; Jumbled sentences;
Writing - Business Letters- Sales and Credit letters; Letter of Enquiry; Letter of Quotation, Order, Claim and
Adjustment Letters. Grammar – Preposition – future time reference; Vocabulary - Single word substitutes - Use
of abbreviations & acronyms.
10
UNIT-V
12
Listening - Listening to Speeches/Presentations, Listening to broadcast & telecast from Radio & TV; Sample
interview; Speaking; Different forms of interviews - Speaking at different types of interview; Reading - Email
communication - Reading the attachment files having a poem/joke/proverb - Sending their responses through
email Writing; Writing: invititation letter, accepting, declining letter and permission letter, Creative writing,
Poster making, Interpreting posters; Grammar –Editing-Direct and indirect speech; Vocabulary - Lexical items
(fixed / semi fixed expressions).
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Dept. of English, Anna University, Chennai. Mindscapes: English for Technologists and Engineers.
Orient Black Swan, Chennai. 2012.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Raman, Meenakshi & Sangeetha Sharma. Technical Communication: English Skills for Engineers.
Oxford University Press, New Delhi. 2011.
2.
Dhanavel, S.P. English and communication skills for students of science and Engineering.
Orient Black Swan publications, Chennai, 2011.
3.
Rizvi M, Ashraf. Effective Technical Communication. Tata McGraw-Hill publishing company limited,
New Delhi, 2007.
4.
Rutherford, Andrea J. Basic Communication Skills for Technology. Pearson Edition
(II Edition), New Delhi, 2001.
Extensive reading:
1. Kalam, Abdul. The Wings of Fire, Universities Press, Hyderabad. 1999.
15BS101
MATHEMATICS I
LT P C
3 20 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To know the matrix algebra techniques needed by engineers for practical applications

To make the student knowledgeable in the area of infinite series and their convergence so that he/ she
will be familiar with limitations of using infinite series approximations for solutions arising in
mathematical modeling

To familiarize the student with functions of several variables. This is needed in engineering problems

To introduce the concepts of improper integrals, Gamma, Beta functions which are needed in
engineering problems

To acquaint the student with mathematical tools needed in evaluating multiple integrals and their usage
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the students are able to

Expertise matrix algebra

Apply tests of convergence

Understand and apply functions of several variables

Evaluate integrals using Beta and Gamma functions

Expertise multiple integrals and their usage
UNIT 0
(Not for Examination)
5+ 0
Basic concepts on limits, continuity, derivative & integrals of a single variable
UNIT-I
MATRICES
Characteristic equation -
9+3
Eigen values and Eigenvectors of a real matrix– Properties of eigen values and
11
eigenvectors – Cayley-Hamilton Theorem – Diagonalization of matrices – Reduction of a quadratic form to
canonical form by orthogonal transformation – Nature of quadratic forms
UNIT-II
FUNCTIONS OF SEVERAL VARIABLES
9+3
Partial derivatives –Homogeneous functions and Euler’s theorem-Total derivative – Differentiation of implicit
functions-Change of variables - Jacobians – Partial differentiation of implicit functions – Taylor’s series for
functions of two variables – Errors and approximations - Maxima and minima of functions of two variables –
Lagrange’s method of undetermined multipliers
UNIT-III
INFINITE SERIES
9+3
Sequences – Convergence of series – General properties – Series of positive terms – Tests for convergence:
Comparison test, Integral test, Comparison of ratios and D’Alembert’s ratio test (Proofs excluded) – Alternating
series – Series of positive and negative terms – Absolute and conditional convergence – Power Series –
Convergence of exponential, logarithmic and Binomial Series
UNIT-IV
IMPROPER INTEGRALS
9+3
Improper integrals of the first and second kind and their convergence – Evaluation of integrals involving one
parameter by Leibnitz rule – Beta and Gamma functions – Properties – Evaluation of integrals using Beta and
Gamma functions – Error functions
UNIT-V
MULTIPLE INTEGRALS
9+3
Double integrals – Change of order of integration – Double integrals in polar coordinates – Area enclosed by
plane curves – Triple integrals– Triple integrals in cylindrical and spherical coordinates – Volume of Solids
L= 45 hours
T = 15 hours
Total = 60 hours
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
Grewal B.S., “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 43
rd
Edition, 2013
2.
Erwin Kreyszig, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, John Wiley & Sons (ASIA) Pvt. Ltd, Singapore,
th
9 Edition, 2013
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Jain R.K. and Iyengar S.R.K., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Narosa Publications, New Delhi,
th
4 Edition, 2014
2.
Greenberg M.D., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2
th
11 Reprint, 2013
3.
Peter V.O’Neil, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Cengage Learning India Pvt., Ltd, New Delhi, 7
Edition, 2012
4.
Monty J. Strauss, Gerald L. Bradley, Karl J. Smith, “Calculus”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 3
Edition 2007 (For Unit 0-Section 2.1,2.3,3.1,5.2, Unit – 2,3,5)
5.
Ramana B.V, “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
nd
Edition,
th
rd
th
Company, New Delhi, 11 Reprint, 2010
15BS102
ENGINEERING PHYSICS
LTPC
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To impart sound knowledge about basic concepts of physics.

To introduce the basic physics concepts relevant to different branches of Engineering and Technology

To introduce the fundamentals of physics and its applications in engineering.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

The students are able to understand the elastic properties of the materials.
12


The students will acquire knowledge about solid state physics.
The students will acquire knowledge about the basic concepts of physics in the topics such as
acoustics, ultrasonics, thermal physics, and applied optics.
UNIT I
PROPERTIES OF MATTER
9
Elasticity - Poisson’s ratio and relationship between moduli (qualitative) - Stress-strain diagram and its usesfactors affecting tensile strength - bending of beams - cantilever - bending moment - theory and experiment of
Young’s modulus determination - Uniform and non-uniform bending - I shaped girders - twisting couple - hollow
cylinder - shaft - torsion pendulum - determination of rigidity modulus- moment of inertia of a body (regular and
irregular).
UNIT II
ACOUSTICS AND ULTRASONICS
9
Classification of sound - loudness and intensity - Weber-Fechner Law - standard intensity and intensity level decibel - reverberation - reverberation time - rate of growth and decay of sound intensity - derivation of Sabine’s
formula - absorption coefficient and its determination – factors affecting acoustics of buildings : focusing,
interference, echo, Echelon effect, resonance - noise and their remedies. Ultrasonics - production magnetostriction and piezoelectric methods - detection of ultrasound - acoustic grating - industrial applications NDT – Ultrasonic method: scan modes and practice.
UNIT III
THERMAL PHYSICS
9
Thermal expansion - thermal stress - expansion joints - bimetallic strips - thermal conductivity- conductions in
solids - Forbe’s and Lees’ disc methods - Rectilinear flow of heat through a rod -flow of heat through a
compound media - radial flow of heat – thermal insulation of buildings – Laws of blackbody radiation: Kirchhoff’s
law, Stephens law, Wien’s law, Raleigh-Jean’s law and Planck’s law (derivation). Laws of thermodynamics Otto and diesel engines and their efficiency - entropy - entropy of Carnot’s cycle - reverse Carnot’s cycle refrigerator.
UNIT IV
APPLIED OPTICS
9
Interference - Michelson interferometer: construction, working, determination of wave length and thickness - antireflection coating - air wedge and its application - Lasers - Einstein’s coefficients - CO2, Nd:YAG and
semiconductor lasers - homojunction and heterojunction -construction and working - applications - Optical fibers classification (index & mode based) - principle and propagation of light in optical fibers - acceptance angle and
numerical aperture - fiber optic communication system - active and passive sensors.
UNIT V
SOLID STATE PHYSICS
9
Growth of single crystals-Czochrolski method and Bridgeman-Stockbarger method - unit cell, crystal systems,
Bravais space lattices - crystal planes and directions, Miller indices - expressions for interplanar distance coordination number and packing factor for simple structures: SC, BCC, FCC and HCP - structure and
significance of NaCl, ZnS, diamond and graphite - crystal imperfections: point defects, dislocations and stacking
faults.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
T1. Marikani A, Engineering Physics, PHI, New Delhi, 2013.
T2. Gaur R.K., and Gupta, S.L., Engineering Physics, Dhanpat Raj Publications, 2013
REFERENCE BOOKS:
R1.
Sankar, B.N., Pillai.S.O., Engineering Physics, New Age International (P) Ltd., 2009.
R2.
Palanisamy, P.K., Engineering Physics, Scitech Publications (P) Ltd, 2009.
R3.
Arumugam, M., Engineering Physics, Anuradha Publications, 2000.
R4.
John W. Jewett. Jr, and Raymon A. Serway, Physics for Scientists and Engineers with Modern Physics
– Seventh Edition, Cengage Learnings, Delhi, India, 2013.
R5.
David Halliday, Robert Resnick and Jearl Walker, Fundamentals of Physics, sixth edition, John Wiley
and Sons, New Delhi, 2010.
13
15BS103
ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY
LTPC
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The student should be familiar with

The treatment of water for potable and industrial purposes.

The principles of electrochemistry, electrochemical cells, emf and applications of emf measurements.

The principles of corrosion and corrosion control techniques.

Different materials and their engineering applications.

Different types of fuels and combustion.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the student will be able to

Understand the basic principles of water quality parameters, their analysis and various water
treatment processes for domestic and industrial applications.

Understand the basic principles of electrochemistry and its applications.

Know the principles, various types of corrosion and corrosion control techniques.

Have a sound knowledge on various engineering materials and their industrial applications.

Have a sound knowledge on different types of fuels.
UNIT I
WATER TECHNOLOGY
9
Characteristics of water – alkalinity – types of alkalinity and determination – hardness – types of hardness and
estimation by EDTA method (problems on calculation of hardness only); Boiler feed water – requirements –
disadvantages of using hard water in boilers – priming and foaming – scales and sludges – caustic embrittlement
– boiler corrosion – external conditioning (demineralization process) – internal conditioning (colloidal, phosphate,
carbonate and calgon conditionings) – Domestic water treatment – disinfection methods (Chlorination,
Ozonation, UV treatment) – break point chlorination – salinity – desalination by reverse osmosis.
UNIT II
ELECTROCHEMISTRY
9
Electrochemical cells – reversible and irreversible cells – EMF – measurement of emf – Single electrode potential
– Nernst equation (problems) – reference electrodes – Standard Hydrogen electrode – Calomel electrode – Ion
selective electrode – glass electrode and measurement of pH – Standard Cell – electrochemical series –
significance – potentiometric redox titration – conductometric titrations (Strong acid Vs Strong base and Weak
acid Vs Strong base)
UNIT III
CORROSION AND ITS CONTROL
9
Chemical corrosion – Pilling-Bedworth rule – electrochemical corrosion – differential aeration corrosion – factors
influencing corrosion – different types – galvanic corrosion – erosion corrosion – pitting corrosion – crevice
corrosion – waterline corrosion – stress corrosion – corrosion control – sacrificial anode and impressed current
cathodic methods – corrosion inhibitors – Protective coatings – metallic coating – pretreatment of surface –
hotdipping – spraying – cladding – cementation – electroplating (Cr, Cu, Ni and Au) – electrolessplating
(electroless nickel plating only).
UNIT IV
ENGINEERING MATERIALS
9
Refractories – classification – acidic, basic and neutral refractories – properties (refractoriness, refractoriness
under load, dimensional stability, porosity, thermal spalling) – manufacture of alumina, magnesite and zirconia
bricks.
Lubricants – mechanism of lubrication, liquid lubricants – properties (viscosity index, flash and fire points, cloud
and pour points, oiliness) – solid lubricants – graphite and molybdenum disulphide – semi solid lubricants and
emulsions.
Nanomaterials – introduction to nano chemistry – carbon nanotubes and their applications.
14
UNIT V
FUELS AND COMBUSTION
9
Fuels – Classification – Calorific value (Problems using Dulong’s formula) – Coal – proximate and ultimate
analysis – Hydrogenation of coal – Petroleum – processing and fractions – cracking – catalytic cracking and
methods – knocking – octane number and cetane number – synthetic petrol – Fischer-Tropsch and Bergius
processes – Gaseous fuels – Natural gas, CNG and LPG – Flue gas analysis – Orsat apparatus – Combustion –
theoretical calculation of air (Problems on calculation of weight of air only).
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
th
T1. P.C. Jain and Monika Jain, Engineering Chemistry, Dhanpat Rai Publishing Co.(P) Ltd., 16 Edition,
New Delhi (2013).
T2. S.S.Dara, A text book of engineering chemistry, S. Chand & Co. Ltd., New Delhi (2010).
REFERENCE BOOKS:
R1.
Mars G. Fontana, Corrosion Engineering, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company (P) Ltd., New Delhi
(2009).
R2.
B. K. Sharma, Engineering chemistry, Krishna Prakasan Media (P) Ltd., Meerut (2006).
R3.
B. Sivasankar, Engineering Chemistry, Tata McGraw-Hill Pub. Co. Ltd, New Delhi (2008).
15GE101
COMPUTER PROGRAMMING
LTPC
30 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To gain knowledge on problem solving techniques

To learn how to write modular and readable C programs

To understand the usage of arrays and strings

To learn to use pointers to access and manipulate memory

To exploit the notion of derived data types and files
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Solve problems using sound techniques

Develop modular C programs for a given problem

Store and manipulate homogeneous data using arrays and strings

Write programs that uses memory based on the run time needs

Store and manipulate heterogeneous data using structures

Write programs that manipulate data stored on permanent storage
UNIT I
FUNDAMENTALS OF C
9
Basic Organization of a Computer - Problem Solving Techniques: Introduction to Algorithm, Pseudo code, Flow
Chart.
Structure of ‘C’ program, compilation and linking processes - C Tokens: Keywords, Data Types, Constants,
Variables - Declaration - Qualifiers - typedef - Enumeration - Pre-processor directives (#include, #define)
UNIT II
BASIC CONSTRUCTS IN C
9
Managing simple Input and Output operations - Operators and Expressions - Decision Making: Branching
statements, Looping statements - Function: Declaration, Definition - Recursion - Storage classes
UNIT III
ARRAYS AND STRINGS IN C
8
Arrays: Initialization - One dimensional, Two dimensional, and Multi-dimensional arrays - String: String
operations, Manipulating Strings - Pre-processor directives (#if, #else, #elif, #ifdef, #ifndef)
15
UNIT IV
POINTERS IN C
10
Pointers - Parameter passing mechanism in functions - Dynamic Memory Allocation - Pointer arithmetic Pointers and one dimensional array - Pointers and Multi-Dimensional Array: Array of Pointers, Pointer to Pointer,
Pointer to an array - void Pointer - Pointer to function - Command Line Arguments
UNIT V
STRUCTURES, UNIONS AND FILE HANDLING IN C
9
Structure: Declaration, Definition-Array of Structures - Pointer to Structure - Structure within a Structure - Bit
fields in Structure - Union - Files: File Management functions, Working with Text Files and Binary Files
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
Pradip Dey, Manas Ghosh, “Fundamentals of Computing and Programming in C”, First Edition, Oxford
University Press, 2009
2.
Byron S Gottfried, “Programming with C, Schaum’s Outlines”, Third Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2010
reprint.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Brian.W.Kernighan and Dennis.M.Ritchie, “The C Programming language”, Second Edition, Pearson
Education, 2006 reprint.
2.
R.G. Dromey, “How to Solve it by Computer”, Pearson Education, 2008
3.
Al Kelley, Ira Pohl, “A Book on C : Programming in C”, Fourth Edition, Pearson Education, 2008 reprint
4.
Deitel.P.J and Deitel.H.M, “C How to Program”, Sixth Edition, Prentice-Hall of India, 2009 reprint.
5.
Ashok N. Kamthane, “Computer programming”, Second Edition, Pearson Education, 2012.
6.
Yashavant P. Kanetkar, “Let Us C”, Thirteenth Edition, BPB Publications, 2012.
WEB REFERENCES:
1.
http://www.tutorialspoint.com/cprogramming/index.htm
2.
http://www.cprogramming.com/tutorial/c-tutorial.html
3.
http://www.w3schools.in/c
4.
http://fresh2refresh.com/c-tutorial-for-beginners
15GE102
ENGINEERING GRAPHICS
L T P C
2 0 4 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To gain knowledge on the basics of Engineering Drawing construction procedures.
 To understand the principles involved in graphic skill for communication of concepts, ideas and design
of Engineering products.
 To draw the drawing of various solids.
 To expose the above to existing national standards related to technical drawings.
 An ability to draw the drawing for any given object to the required standard.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Sketch multiple views of Engineering components

Create the projection of point, straight line and plane

Project the solid objects

Section the solid

Develop lateral surfaces of solids

Apply isometric and perspective projections
16
Concepts and Conventions (Not For Examination)
5
Importance of graphics in engineering applications – Use of drafting instruments – BIS
conventions and specifications – Lettering and Dimensioning-Size, layout and folding of drawing sheets.
UNIT I
PLANE CURVES AND PICTORIAL VIEWS TO ORTHOGRAPHIC
VIEWS
14
Geometrical Constructions like bisection of a straight line, division of a straight line into n equal parts, bisection
of angles, Curves used in engineering practices: Conics – Construction of ellipse, parabola and hyperbola by
eccentricity method – Construction of cycloid – Construction of involutes of square and circle – Drawing of
tangents and normal to the above curves.
Orthographic projection – Principles – Principal planes- Representation of Three Dimensional objects – Layout
of views– Sketching of multiple views (Front, Top and Side views) from pictorial views of simple objects and
Engineering Components.
UNIT II
PROJECTION OF POINTS, LINES AND PLANE SURFACES
14
First Angle projection–Projection of points in four quadrants. Projection of straight lines (only First angle
projection) inclined to both the principal planes – Determination of true lengths and true inclinations by rotating
line method and traces.
Projection of planes (polygonal and circular surfaces) inclined to both the principal planes by change of position
method.
UNIT III
PROJECTION OF SOLIDS
14
Projection of simple solids like prisms, pyramids, cylinder and cone when the axis is inclined to one of the
principal planes by change of position method. Projection of simple solids when the axis inclined to both planes.
UNIT IV
SECTION OF SOLIDS AND DEVELOPMENT OF LATERAL
SURFACES OF SOLIDS
14
Sectioning of above solids in simple vertical position when the cutting plane is inclined to the one of the principal
planes and perpendicular to the other – Obtaining true shape of the section.
Development of lateral surfaces of simple solids – Prisms, pyramids, cylinders and cones. Development of
lateral surfaces of sectioned solids and simple applications like funnel.
UNIT V
ISOMETRIC AND PERSPECTIVE PROJECTIONS
14
Principles of isometric projection – Isometric scale –Isometric View– Isometric projections of simple solids and
cut solids – Prisms, pyramids, cylinders, cones– Combination of two solid objects in simple vertical positions.
Perspective projection of simple solids–Prisms, pyramids and cylinders by visual ray method.
TOTAL: 75 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
th
N.D. Bhatt, “Engineering Drawing” Charotar Publishing House, 50 Edition, (2010).
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Gopalakrishna K.R., “Engineering Drawing” (Vol. I&II combined), Subhas Stores, Bangalore, 2007.
2.
Luzzader, Warren.J. and Duff,John M., “Fundamentals of Engineering Drawing with an
introduction to Interactive Computer Graphics for Design and Production, Eastern Economy Edition,
Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2005.
3.
Shah M.B., and Rana B.C., “Engineering Drawing”, Pearson, 2nd Edition, 2009.
4.
Venugopal K. and Prabhu Raja V., “Engineering Graphics”, New Age International (P) Limited, 2008.
5.
Natrajan K.V., “A text book of Engineering Graphics”, Dhanalakshmi Publishers, Chennai, 2009.
6.
Basant Agarwal and Agarwal C.M., “Engineering Drawing”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company
Limited, New Delhi, 2008.
17
Publication of Bureau of Indian Standards:
1.
IS 10711 – 2001: Technical products Documentation – Size and lay out of drawing
sheets.
2.
IS 9609 (Parts 0 & 1) – 2001: Technical products Documentation – Lettering.
3.
IS 10714 (Part 20) – 2001 & SP 46 – 2003: Lines for technical drawings.
4.
IS 11669 – 1986 & SP 46 – 2003: Dimensioning of Technical Drawings.
5.
IS 15021 (Parts 1 to 4) – 2001: Technical drawings – Projection Methods.
Special points applicable to End Semester Examinations on Engineering Graphics:
1.
There will be five questions, each of either or type covering all units of the syllabus.
2.
All questions will carry equal marks of 20 each making a total of 100.
3.
The answer paper shall consist of drawing sheets of A3 size only. The students will be permitted
to use appropriate scale to fit solution within A3 size.
4.
The examination will be conducted in appropriate sessions on the same day
15BS151
PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY LABORATORY
L T PC
0 0 4 2
(Classes on alternate weeks for Physics and Chemistry)
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To have a study on determination of Rigidity modulus and Young’s modulus

To be familiar with findings thickness of a thin paper

To deal with the determination of Ultrasonic velocity

To have a study on estimation of hardness and alkalinity of water

To deal with Conductometric titration and Potentiometric titration
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Find the moment of inertia of disc and Rigidity modulus of wire

Determine thickness of a thin sheet of paper

Find the specific resistance of wire

Estimate hardness and Alkalinity of water sample

Do Conductometric titration and Potentiometric titration

Find corrosion rate
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS FOR PHYSICS LABORATORY (Any FIVE Experiments)
1.
Torsional pendulum – Determination of rigidity modulus of wire and moment of inertia of disc.
2.
Non-uniform pending- Young’s modulus determination
3.
Air-wedge- Determination of thickness of a thin sheet of paper
4.
Spectrometer- Determination of wavelength of Hg spectrum using grating
5.
Lee’s disc-Determination of thermal conductivity of bad conductor
6.
Determination of ultrasonic velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid –
7.
Carey Foster Bridge- Determination of specific resistance of the given coil of wire.
Ultrasonic interferometer.
REFERENCE BOOK:
Physics Laboratory Manual, Department of Physics, Mepco Schlenk Engineering College, Sivakasi.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS FOR CHEMISTRY LABORATORY (Any FIVE Experiments)
1.
Estimation of hardness of water by EDTA method
2.
Estimation of alkalinity of water sample
18
3.
pH-metric titration (acid & base)
4.
Conductometric titration (strong acid Vs strong base)
5.
Conductometric titration (mixture of acids Vs Strong base)
6.
Potentiometric titration between ferrous ion and potassium dichromate
7.
Determination of corrosion rate by weight loss method
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
J. Mendham, R.C. Denney, J. D. Barnes, M.J.K. Thomas, Vogel's Quantitative Chemical Analysis,
Prentice Hall, India, 2000.
2.
D.P. Shoemaker and C.W. Garland, Experiments in Physical Chemistry, McGraw Hill, London, 2001.
15GE151
COMPUTER PROGRAMMING LABORATORY
L T PC
0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To develop C programs using conditional and looping statements

To understand the principles of arrays and strings

To learn to access memory using pointers

To group different kinds of information related to a single entity

To understand the manipulation of data in permanent storage
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Implement programs using control statements

Write programs using arrays and strings

Access data in memory using pointers

Use structures to manipulate heterogeneous data

Manipulate data stored on permanent storage
SYLLABUS FOR THE LABORATORY:
0.
Study of simple Document Processing & Presentation Preparation
Study of basic OS commands, Software Engineering Practices -2 sessions (Not for End Examination)
1.
Programs using simple statements
2.
Programs using decision making statements
3.
Programs using looping statements
4.
Programs using user defined functions and recursive functions
5.
Programs using one dimensional and two dimensional arrays
6.
Solving problems using string functions
7.
Programs using pointers and dynamic memory allocation
8.
Programs using structures and unions
9.
Programs using pointers to structures and other data types
10.
Programs using text files
11.
Programs using binary files
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Pradip Dey, Manas Ghosh, “Fundamentals of Computing and Programming in C”, First Edition, Oxford
19
2.
Brian.W.Kernighan and Dennis.M.Ritchie, “The C Programming language”, Second Edition, Pearson
Education, 2006 reprint.
3.
Byron S Gottfried, “Programming with C”, Schaum’s Outlines, Third Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2010
reprint.
4.
Deitel.P.J and Deitel.H.M, “C How to Program”, Sixth Edition, Prentice-Hall of India,2009
5.
Yashavant P. Kanetkar, “Let Us C”, Thirteenth Edition, BPB Publications, 2012.
WEB REFERENCES:
1.
http://www.tutorialspoint.com/cprogramming/index.htm
2.
http://www.cprogramming.com/tutorial/c-tutorial.html
3.
http://www.w3schools.in/c
4.
http://fresh2refresh.com/c-tutorial-for-beginners
15GE152
ENGINEERING PRACTICES LABORATORY
LTPC
0042
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To provide exposure to the students with hands on experience on various basic engineering practices in
Civil, Mechanical, Electrical and Electronics Engineering.

To have a study and hands-on-exercise on plumbing and carpentry components.

To have a practice on gas welding, foundry operations and fitting

To have a study on measurement of electical quantities, energy and resistance to earth.

To have a practice on soldering
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Do pipe connections with different joining components.

Create joints for roofs, doors, windows and furniture

Prepare square fitting and vee fitting models

Do residential house wiring

Measure energy and resistance to earth of an electrical equipment

Apply soldering
GROUP A (CIVIL & MECHANICAL)
I
CIVIL ENGINEERING PRACTICE
9
Buildings:
Study of plumbing and carpentry components of residential and industrial buildings, Safety aspects.
Plumbing Works:
1.
Study of pipeline joints, its location and functions: valves, taps, couplings, unions, reducers, and elbows
in household fittings.
2.
Study of pipe connections requirements for pumps and turbines.
3.
Preparation of plumbing line sketches for water supply and sewage works.
4.
Hands-on-exercise: Basic pipe connections – Mixed pipe material connection – Pipe connections with
different joining components.
5.
Demonstration of plumbing requirements of high-rise buildings.
Carpentry using Power Tools only:
1.
Study of the joints in roofs, doors, windows and furniture.
2.
Hands-on-exercise: Wood work, joints by sawing, planning and cutting.
20
II
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICE
13
Welding:
Preparation of arc welding of butt joints, lap joints and tee joints.
Basic Machining:
1.
Simple Turning, Step turning
2.
Drilling Practice using drilling machine.
Sheet Metal Work:
1.
Forming & Bending:
2.
Model making – Trays, funnels, etc.
3.
Different type of joints.
Machine assembly practice:
1.
Study of centrifugal pump
2.
Study of air conditioner
Demonstration on:
1.
Gas welding practice
2.
Smithy operations, upsetting, swaging, setting down and bending. Example –Exercise – Production of
hexagonal headed bolt.
3.
Foundry operations like mould preparation for gear and step cone pulley.
4.
Fitting – Exercises – Preparation of square fitting and vee – fitting models.
GROUP B (ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS)
III
ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICE
10
1.
Residential house wiring using switches, fuse, indicator, lamp and energy meter.
2.
Fluorescent lamp wiring.
3.
Stair case wiring
4.
Measurement of electrical quantities – voltage, current, power & power factor in RLC circuit.
5.
Measurement of energy using single phase energy meter.
6.
Measurement of resistance to earth of an electrical equipment.
IV
ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING PRACTICE
13
1.
Study of Electronic components and equipments – Resistor, colour coding measurement of AC signal
parameter (peak-peak, rms period, frequency) using CRO.
2.
Study of logic gates AND, OR, EXOR and NOT.
3.
Generation of Clock Signal.
4.
Soldering practice – Components Devices and Circuits – Using general purpose PCB.
5.
Measurement of ripple factor of HWR and FWR.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
K.Jeyachandran, S.Natarajan & S, Balasubramanian, “A Primer on Engineering Practices Laboratory”,
Anuradha Publications, (2007).
2.
T.Jeyapoovan, M.Saravanapandian & S.Pranitha, “Engineering Practices Lab Manual”, Vikas Publishing
House Pvt. Ltd, (2006)
3.
H.S. Bawa, “Workshop Practice”, Tata McGraw – Hill Publishing Company Limited, (2007).
4.
A.Rajendra Prasad & P.M.M.S. Sarma, “Workshop Practice”, Sree Sai Publication, (2002).
5.
P.Kannaiah & K.L.Narayana, “Manual on Workshop Practice”, Scitech Publications, (1999).
21
SEMESTER EXAMINATION PATTERN
The Laboratory examination is to be conducted for Group A & Group B, allotting 90 minutes for each group, with
a break of 15 minutes. Both the examinations are to be taken together in sequence, either in the FN session or in
the AN session. The maximum marks for Group A and Group B lab examinations will be 50 each, totaling 100 for
the Lab course. The candidates shall answer either I or II under Group A and either III or IV under Group B,
based on lots.
List of equipment and components
(For a Batch of 30 Students)
CIVIL ENGINEERING
1.
Assorted components for plumbing consisting of metallic pipes, plastic pipes,
flexible pipes, couplings, unions, elbows, plugs and other fittings.
15 Sets.
2.
Carpentry vice (fitted to work bench)
15 Nos.
3.
Standard woodworking tools
15 Sets.
4.
Models of industrial trusses, door joints, furniture joints
5 each
5.
Power Tools:
(a) Rotary Hammer
2 Nos.
(b) Demolition Hammer
2 Nos.
(c) Circular Saw
2 Nos.
(d) Planer
2 Nos.
(e) Hand Drilling Machine
2 Nos.
(f) Jigsaw
2 Nos.
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
1.
Arc welding transformer with cables and holders
5 Nos.
2.
Welding booth with exhaust facility
5 Nos.
3.
Welding accessories like welding shield, chipping hammer, wire brush, etc.
5 Sets.
4.
Oxygen and acetylene gas cylinders, blow pipe and other welding outfit.
2 Nos.
5.
Centre lathe
10 Nos.
6.
Drilling machine
2 Nos.
7.
Hearth furnace, anvil and smithy tools
2 Sets
8.
Moulding table, foundry tools
2 Sets
9.
Power Tool: Angle Grinder
2 Nos.
10. .
Study-purpose items: centrifugal pump, air-conditioner
1 each.
1.
Assorted electrical components for house wiring
10 Sets
2.
Electrical measuring instruments
15 Sets.
3.
Study purpose items: Iron box, fan and regulator, emergency lamp
1 each
4.
Megger (250V/500V).
1 No.
5.
Power Tools:
(a) Range Finder
2 Nos.
(b) Digital Live-wire detector
2 Nos.
ELECTRICAL
ELECTRONICS
1.
Soldering guns
10 Nos.
22
2.
Assorted electronic components for making circuits
50 Nos.
3.
Small PCBs
10 Nos.
4.
Multimeters
10 Nos.
5.
Study purpose items: Telephone, FM radio, low-voltage power supply
2 Nos.
SEMESTER - II
15HS201
Technical English –II
LTPC
300 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

Make the students of Engineering and Technology enhance their communicative skills

Strengthen LSRW skills

Boost up creative and critical thinking

Master the skills of writing

Face the challenges of the competitive world
COURSE OUTCOMES:

The students of Engineering and Technology will be able to enhance LSRW skills

Their creative and critical thinking will be enriched

The students will be able to face the challenges of the competitive world
UNIT I
15
Listening - Listening to informal conversations and participating; Listening to different types of conversation and
answering questions. Speaking - Opening a conversation (greetings, comments on topics like weather) - Turn
taking - Closing a conversation (excuses, general wish, positive comment, and thanks); narrating personal
experience. Reading - Developing analytical skills, Deductive and inductive reasoning - intensive reading.
Writing - Biography Writing- Effective use of SMS for sending short notes and messages - Using ‘emoticons’ as
symbols in messages - e-mail/blogs - Posting reviews in blogs. Grammar – Regular and irregular verbs - Modal
verbs - Purpose expressions. Vocabulary – Match the Synonyms- Homonyms and Homophones.
UNIT II
7
Listening - Listening to situation based dialogues - Conversations between great leaders and celebrities.
Speaking - Conversation practice in real life situations, asking for directions (using polite expressions), giving
directions (using imperative sentences), Purchasing goods from a shop, Discussing various aspects of a film
(they have already seen) or a book (they have already read); Dialogues (Fill up exercises), Recording students’
dialogues. Reading - Reading a short story or an article from newspaper, Critical reading, Comprehension skills;
Extensive reading activity (reading stories / novels); Writing - Writing a review / summary of a story /article Product Description -Dialogue Writing- memos and circulars. Grammar - Use of clauses - Conditional clauses Phrasal verbs and their meanings, Using phrasal verbs in sentences– Conjunctions. Vocabulary :
Descriptive words & phrases,
UNIT III
6
Listening - Listening to the conversation with various accents/dialects - Understanding the structure of
conversations. Speaking -Conversation skills with a sense of stress, intonation, pronunciation and meaning –
Seeking information – expressing feelings (affection, anger, regret, etc.). Reading - Speed reading – reading
passages with time limit - Skimming; Writing - Minutes of meeting – format and practice in the preparation of
minutes - Writing summary after reading articles from journals - Giving instructions Grammar - Reported speech
- Active and passive voice - American and British English.
Vocabulary - Words used as nouns and verbs without any change in the Spelling.
UNIT IV
7
Listening - Listening to a telephone conversation, Viewing model interviews (face-to-face, telephonic and video
23
conferencing); Speaking - Role play practice in telephone skills - listening and responding - asking questions, note taking – passing on messages, Role play and mock interview for grasping interview skills; Telephonic
interview – recording the responses. Reading - Reading the job advertisements and the profile of the company
concerned. Writing - Applying for a job – cover letter - résumé preparation – vision, mission and goals of the
candidate; e-résumé writing. Writing Advertisements for a Product. Grammar - Numerical expressions discourse markers -Adjectives and comparative Adjectives. Vocabulary -Idioms and their meanings – Using
idioms in sentences - Phrases used for Advertisements
UNIT V
10
Listening - Viewing a model debate and reviewing the performance of each participant - Identifying the
characteristics of a good listener; Sample Debate Speaking - Group communication skills –assertiveness in
expressing opinions – mind mapping technique; Reading - making notes from books, Newspaper or any form of
written materials. Writing – Itinerary - Checklist - report writing – recommendations / suggestions – interpretation
of data (using charts for effective presentation) - Note making skills. Grammar–Infinitives and Gerunds - Cause
and effect expressions. Vocabulary – Collocation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
Dept. of English, Anna University, Chennai. Mindscapes: English for Technologists and Engineers.
Orient Black Swan, Chennai. 2012.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Raman, Meenakshi & Sangeetha Sharma. Technical Communication: English Skills for Engineers.
Oxford University Press, New Delhi. 2011.
2.
Dhanavel, S.P. English and communication skills for students of science and Engineering.
Orient Black Swan publications, Chennai, 2011.
3.
Rizvi M, Ashraf. Effective Technical Communication. Tata McGraw-Hill publishing company limited,
New Delhi, 2007.
4.
Rutherford, Andrea J. Basic Communication Skills for Technology. Pearson Edition
(II Edition), New Delhi, 2001.
EXTENSIVE READING:
Wells, H.G. The Time machine, Peacock, India, 2008.
15BS201
MATHEMATICS II
LTPC
320 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To make the student acquire sound knowledge of techniques in solving ordinary differential equations
obtained from engineering problems

To acquaint the student with the concepts of vector calculus that is needed for problems in engineering
disciplines

To know the standard techniques of complex variable theory so as to enable the student to apply them
with confidence, in application areas such as heat conduction, elasticity, fluid dynamics and flow of the
electric current

To make the student for appreciating the purpose of using transforms to create a new domain in which it
is earlier to handle the problem that is being investigated.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the students are able to

Apply different techniques to solve ordinary differential equations

Solve engineering problems using vector calculus
24

Use complex variable theory for applications like heat conduction, fluid dynamics etc.

Transform given problem to a new domain for solving it efficiently
UNIT 0
(Not for Examinations)
5+0
Reviews of integration concepts
UNIT I
DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS
9+3
Method of variation of parameters –Method of undetermined coefficients – Homogeneous equation of Euler’s
and Legendre’s type – System of Simultaneous first order linear equations with constant coefficients
UNIT II
VECTOR CALCULUS
9+3
Gradient and Directional derivative – Divergence and Curl – Irrotational and solenoidal vector fields – Line
integral over a plane curve – Surface integral and Volume integral– Green’s, Gauss divergence and Stokes’
theorems (excluding proofs) – Verification and application in evaluating line, surface and volume integrals
UNIT III
ANALYTIC FUNCTIONS
9+3
Analytic functions – Necessary and Sufficient conditions for analyticity – properties – Harmonic conjugates –
Construction of analytic functions – Conformal mapping – Mapping by functions w= z+c, cz, 1/z, z+1/z,
and
- Bilinear transformation.
UNIT IV
COMPLEX INTEGRATION
9+3
Line integral – Cauchy’s theorem and integral formula – Taylor’s and Laurent’s series – Singularities – Residues
– Residue theorem – Application of residue theorem for evaluation of real integrals – Use of circular contour and
semi-circular contour with no pole on real axis
UNIT V
LAPLACE TRANSFORM
9+3
Laplace transform – Transforms of elementary functions – Basic properties – Transform of derivatives and
integrals – Transform of periodic functions - Initial and Final value theorems – Inverse Transforms – Convolution
theorem –Application to solution of linear ODE with constant coefficients
TOTAL: 65 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
rd
1.
Grewal. B.S, “Higher Engineering Mathematics”,, Khanna Publications, New Delhi, 43 edition (2013)
2.
Erwin Kreyszig, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, John Wiley & Sons Pvt. Ltd, Singapore, 9
Edition, 2006, (Reprint 2013)
th
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Jain R.K. and Iyengar S.R.K., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Narosa Publications, New Delhi,
th
4 Edition, 2014
2.
Greenberg M.D., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2
th
11 Reprint, 2013
3.
Peter V.O’Neil, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Cengage Learning India Pvt., Ltd, New Delhi, 7
Edition, 2012
4.
Monty J. Strauss, Gerald L. Bradley, Karl J. Smith, “Calculus”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 3
Edition 2007 (For Unit 0-Section 5.2, Unit – 1,2)
5.
Ramana B.V, “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
nd
Edition,
th
rd
th
Company, New Delhi, 11 Reprint, 2010
15BS202
ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE AND DISASTER MANAGEMENT
LTPC
(Common to all UG Programme)
300 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The student is expected to understand

What constitutes the environment, what are precious resources in the environment, how to conserve
25
these resources, what is the role of a human being in maintaining a clean environment and useful
environment for the future generations and how to maintain ecological balance and preserve biodiversity.

The role of government and non-government organizations in environment management.

About Disaster and its management.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Understand the basic concepts of environment studies and natural resources.

Get the thorough knowledge about ecosystem and biodiversity.

Have an elaborate knowledge about causes, effects and control measures of various types of pollution.

Understand the social issues and various environmental acts.

Get the knowledge about types of disaster and mitigation measures.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES AND NATURAL
RESOURCES
9
Definition, scope and importance – Need for public awareness – Forest resources: Use and over-exploitation,
deforestation, case studies. Timber extraction, mining, dams and their effects on forests and tribal people –
Water resources: Use and over-utilization of surface and ground water, floods, drought, conflicts over water,
dams – benefits and problems – Mineral resources: Use and exploitation, environmental effects of extracting and
using mineral resources, case studies – Food resources: World food problems, changes caused by agriculture
and overgrazing, effects of modern agriculture, fertilizer, pesticide problems, water logging, salinity, case studies
– Energy resources: Growing energy needs, renewable and non renewable energy sources, use of alternate
energy sources. Case studies – Role of an individual in conservation of natural resources – Equitable use of
resources for sustainable lifestyles
UNIT II
ECOSYSTEMS AND BIODIVERSITY
10
Concept of an ecosystem – Structure and function of an ecosystem – Producers, consumers and decomposers –
Energy flow in the ecosystem (single channel energy flow model) – Concept of nutrient cycling (Nitrogen cycle) –
Ecological succession – Food chains, food webs and ecological pyramids – Introduction to Biodiversity –
Definition: genetic, species and ecosystem diversity – Value of biodiversity: consumptive use, productive use,
social, ethical, aesthetic and option values – Biodiversity at global, National and local levels – India as a megadiversity nation – Hot-spots of biodiversity – Threats to biodiversity: habitat loss, poaching of wildlife, man-wildlife
conflicts – Endangered and endemic species of India – Conservation of biodiversity: In-situ and Ex-situ
conservation of biodiversity.
UNIT III
ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION AND SOCIAL ISSUES
12
Definition – Causes, effects and control measures of: (a) Air pollution (b) Water pollution (c) Marine pollution (d)
Noise pollution (e) Nuclear hazards – Solid waste Management: Causes, effects and control measures of urban
and industrial wastes – Role of an individual in prevention of pollution.
Unsustainable and Sustainable development – Unsustainable practices – Issues – possible solutions –
Water conservation, rain water harvesting – Environmental ethics –Acts for Prevention of Environmental
Pollution – Wildlife Protection Act – Forest Conservation Act - Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act –
Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act – Environment Protection Act – Issues involved in enforcement of
environmental legislation – Public awareness.
UNIT IV
DISASTER AND ITS IMPACTS
7
Definition of Disaster, Hazard, Vulnerability, Risk – Types – Natural disasters (earthquake, landslides, flood,
cyclones, tsunami and drought) – Manmade disasters (Chemical, nuclear and biological) Disaster impacts
(environmental, physical, social, ecological and economical) – Case studies.
UNIT V
DISASTER MANAGEMENT
7
Need and concept of Disaster management – Disaster Management cycle – Prevention, mitigation,
26
preparedness, relief, recovery – Post–disaster environmental response (water, sanitation, food safety, waste
management, disease control) – Role and responsibilities of government, community, local institutions and
NGOs.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Gilbert M. Masters and Wendell P. Ela, Introduction to Environmental Engineering and Science,
Pearson Education Pvt., Ltd., Third Edition, 2014.
2. Miller T.G. Jr, Environmental Science, Wadsworth Publishing Co.
3. Townsend C., Harper J., and Michael Begon, Essentials of Ecology, Blackwell Science, Third Edition.
4. Trivedi R.K. and P.K. Goel, Introduction to Air Pollution, Techno-Science Publications.
5. Anubha Kaushik and Kaushik C.P., Environmental Science and Engineering, New Age International
(P) Ltd, Fourth Edition, ISBN: 978-81-224-3647-1, 2014.
6. Mukesh Dhunna., 2009, Disaster Management, Vayu Education of India, New Delhi.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Bharucha Erach, The Biodiversity of India, Mapin Publishing Pvt. Ltd., Ahmedabad India, 2004.
2. Trivedi R.K., Handbook of Environmental Laws, Rules, Guidelines, Compliances and Standards, Vol. I
and II, Enviro Media.
3. Cunningham, W.P. Cooper, T.H. Gorhani, Environmental Encyclopaedia, Jaico Publ. House, Mumbai,
2001.
4. Wager K.D., Environmental Management, W.B. Saunders Co., Philadelphia, USA, 1998.
5. Benny Joseph, Environmental Science and Engineering, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd,
New Delhi, ISBN: 0070601690, 2006.
6. Singh B.K., 2008, Handbook of Disaster Management: techniques & Guidelines, Rajat Publication.
7. Ghosh G.K., 2006, Disaster Management, APH Publishing Corporation.
15BS204
MATERIALS SCIENCE
LTPC
(Common to EEE, ECE, CSE & IT)
300 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To introduce the essential principles of physics for information science and related Engineering
applications

To transform the basic principles and concepts to understand the utility of Engineering materials
operating electrical core devices in terms of their structure and properties

To identify the fleet of scientific channels exploring the generation of high-tech electrical engineering
materials
COURSE OUTCOMES:
UNIT I

The students are able to understand the electrical properties of the materials

The students will acquire knowledge about semiconducting materials

The students will acquire knowledge about the application of the magnetic materials, optical devices
and nano devices
ELECTRICAL PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS
9
Classical free electron theory for electrical and thermal conductivity–Wiedemann Franz law–Drawbacks of
classical free electron theory–Quantum free electron theory (qualitative)–Schrodinger wave equations–time
independent and time dependent wave equations–Particle in a one dimensional Box–Fermi function–Density of
energy states–Carrier concentration in metals–Expression for Fermi energy.
27
UNIT II
SEMICONDUCTORS AND TRANSPORT PHYSICS
9
Direct and indirect bandgap semiconductors–Intrinsic Semiconductors–Carrier concentration–Determination of
bandgap energy–Extrinsic semiconductor– Carrier concentration in n type and p type semiconductors–Variation
of Fermi energy level with temperature and impurity concentration–Hall effect–Determination of Hall coefficient–
carrier transport in semiconductors: Drift, Mobility and diffusion.
UNIT III
MAGNETIC PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS
9
Classification of magnetic materials–Quantum numbers–Origin of magnetic moments–Classical theory of
diamagnetism (Langevin theory) –Quantum theory of paramagnetism–Ferromagnetism (Weiss theory) – Energy
associated with domain theory –Hysteresis – antiferromagnetic materials–Ferrites–applications– Soft and hard
magnetic materials. Magnetic recording and readout in tapes, floppy and hard disk drives.
UNIT IV
OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS
9
Classification of optical materials –Absorption in metals, insulators & semiconductors–LED’s–Organic LED’s–
Polymer light emitting materials–Plasma light emitting devices–LCD’s–Laser diodes–Optical data storage
techniques (including DVD, Blu- ray disc, holographic data storage).
UNIT V
NANO DEVICES
9
Quantum confinement –quantum structures– metal to insulator transition –Confining of excitons–Bandgap of
nanomaterials––Tunnelling –Resonant tunneling diode (RTD)–Single electron phenomenon–Single electron
transistor–Quantum cellular automata (QCA). Carbon nanotubes–Molecular electronics –Spintronics.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
William D. Callister, Jr. Material Science and Engineering, Seventh Edition, John Wiley & Sons Inc. New
Delhi, 2010
2.
Kasap, S.O., Principle of Electronic Materials and devices, Tata Mc-Graw Hill, 2007
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Pierret, R.F. Semiconductor device fundamentals, Pearsons, 1996.
2.
Garcia N and Damask A, Physics for Computer science students, Springer–Verlag, 1998.
3.
Todd D. Steiner, Semiconductor Nanostructure for Optoelectronic Applications, ArTech House
Publishers, Boston, London, 2004.
4.
Physics of Semiconducting Devices, S.M. Sze, Kwok K. Ng, Third Edition, Wiley, India, 2007.
15EC201
ELECTRIC CIRCUITS AND ELECTRON DEVICES
(Common to CSE /IT)
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To understand basic current and voltage laws

To discuss transient resonance in RLC circuits

To know in detail about semiconductor diodes

To familiarize about transistors

To introduce special semiconductor devices
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Analyze DC and AC circuits using basic laws.

Solve and verify network theorems

Analyze the effect of temperature in semiconductor diodes

Compare BJT with MOSFET

Understand the working of special semiconductor devices like Diac, Triac etc.
28
LTPC
3 204
UNIT I
CIRCUIT ANALYSIS TECHNIQUES
12
Kirchoff’s current and voltage laws –
series and parallel connection of independent sources – R, L and
C – Network Theorems – Thevenin, Superposition, Norton, Maximum power transfer and Reciprocity – Stardelta conversion.
UNIT II
TRANSIENT RESONANCE IN RLC CIRCUITS
12
Basic RL, RC and RLC circuits and their responses to pulse and sinusoidal inputs – frequency response –
Parallel and series resonances – Q factor.
UNIT III
SEMICONDUCTOR DIODES
12
Review of intrinsic & extrinsic semiconductors – Theory of PN junction diode – Energy band structure – current
equation – space charge and diffusion capacitances – effect of temperature and breakdown mechanism – Zener
diode and its characteristics.
UNIT IV
TRANSISTORS
12
Principle of operation of PNP and NPN transistors – study of CE, CB and CC configurations and
comparison of their characteristics – Breakdown in transistors – operation and comparison of N-Channel and PChannel JFET – drain current equation – MOSFET – Enhancement and depletion types – structure and operation
– comparison of BJT with MOSFET – thermal effect on MOSFET.
UNIT V
SPECIAL SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES
12
(Qualitative Treatment only)
Tunnel diodes – PIN diode, varactor diode – SCR characteristics and two transistor equivalent model – UJT –
Diac and Triac – Laser, CCD, Photodiode, Phototransistor, Photoconductive and Photovoltaic cells – LED, LCD.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1.
Joseph A. Edminister, Mahmood, Nahri, “Electric Circuits” – Shaum series,Tata McGraw Hill, (2001)
2.
S. Salivahanan, N. Suresh kumar and A. Vallavanraj, “Electronic Devices and Circuits”,Tata
nd
McGraw Hill, 2 edition, (2008)
3.
David A. Bell, “Electronic Devices and Circuits”, Oxford University Press, 5
th
edition, (2008)
REFERENCE BOOKS:
“Introducing
Pearson Education, 7th
1.
Robert T. Paynter,
edition, (2006).
2.
William H. Hayt, J.V. Jack, E. Kemmebly and steven M. Durbin, “Engineering Circuit Analysis”,Tata
th
McGraw Hill,6 edition, (2002)
3.
J. Millman & Halkins, Satyebranta Jit, “Electronic Devices & Circuits”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2nd edition,
(2008)
15CS201
Electronics
Devices
and
Circuits”,
OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING
LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
During the course the students shall

Learn about Object Oriented Programming paradigm and how it differs from Procedural Programming
Paradigm

Define classes with appropriate members and create Objects mapping to real world entities for the
classes

Learn and realize OOP concepts like Polymorphism, inheritance, etc.

Understand the concept of generic programming and achieve it using templates

Gain knowledge on handling exceptions and file operations using C++
29
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Represent real world entities using classes in C++

Design and implement C++ programs with classes as ADTs

Design and implement reusable code in C++

Write programs which can specify data types at the time of type instantiation.

Implement programs with persistent data

Write robust programs which are less error-prone
UNIT I
Programming Paradigms and C++ specific extensions to C
9
Overview of different Programming Paradigms-C++: Native types and Statements, Input/output, C++ specific
Casting - Pointers and References: Use of new and delete operators in dynamic memory management,
References - Functions: Call by reference, Default Arguments, Overloading functions, inlining - Storage
Classes –Structures - Namespace.
UNIT II
OOP and Classes
9
Imperative Vs. Object Oriented Programming paradigm - Overview of Features of Object Oriented Programming Classes and Objects: Members, data hiding, this pointer, Constructors: Parameterized constructors, Default
constructors, Conversion constructors and Copy constructors – Destructor – Other Members: Static members,
Constant Members - Constant Object.
UNIT III
Polymorphism and Exception handling
9
Polymorphism: function overload resolution, Operator overloading: Unary and binary operators as member
function, Friend functions, Use of accessor / mutator for non-member function overloading, overloading
assignment operators, i/o operators and subscripting operators. Exceptions: Using assert, Throwing an
exception, Try Blocks, Catching an exception, Re-throwing an exception, uncaught exceptions
UNIT IV
Inheritance
9
Inheritance: Public Inheritance, Virtual Functions and Run-time polymorphism, Pure virtual functions and
abstract classes, Overview of private protected and Multiple inheritance, inheritance and Design, Run -Time
Type Identification
UNIT V
Templates and I/O
9
Templates: Function Template, Class Template, Templates and inheritance, Brief overview of STL Input/output: i/o Classes, Files, Sequential and Random Access files.
Brief overview of C++11/C++14 features: Auto, lambda expressions, nullptr, constexpr
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
Ira Pohl,”Object Oriented Programming using C++”, Second Edition, Pearson Education 2012, Reprint .
2.
Paul Deitel and Harvey Deitel, “C++ How to Program”, 9 Edition, Prentice Hall, 2013.
th
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Bjarne Stroustrup, “The C++ Programming Language”, Fourth edition, Addison-Wesley, 2013.
2.
Herbert Schildt, “C++: A Beginner's Guide”, Second Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2003.
3.
Stanley B. Lippman, Josée Lajoie, Barbara E. Moo, “C++ Primer”, Sixth Edition, Addison-Wesley, 2012.
4.
Alex Korban, “C++11/14 Rocks”, VS2013/GCC Edition, http://cpprocks.com/books/, 2014
WEB REFERENCES:
1.
http://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical-engineering-and-computer-science/6-096-introduction-to-c-januaryiap-2011/index.htm
2.
https://developers.google.com/edu/c++/
3.
https://www.coursera.org/course/cplusplus4c
30
15BS251
APPLIED PHYSICS AND ENVIRONMENTAL CHEMISTRY LABORATORY
L
T
P
C
(Common to EEE/ECE/CSE/MECH/IT/BT)
0
0
4
2
(Laboratory classes on alternate weeks for Physics and Environmental
Chemistry)
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To determine particle size and wavelength

To find the viscosity of liquid

To find band gap of a semiconductor

To determine dissolved oxygen and chloride content in water

To estimate chromium, iron, sodium and chlorine using various methods
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Use Post Office Box to determine band gap of a semiconductor

Use spectrometer to determine the dispersive power of the prism

Use Winkler’s method to determine dissolved oxygen in water

Use Argentometric method to estimate chloride content in water

Use flame photometry to estimate sodium in water
PHYSICS LABORATORY
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS (Any FIVE Experiments)
1.
Laser-
(i) Particle size and wavelength determination
(ii) Numerical aperture and acceptance angle measurement of an optical fiber
2.
Post Office Box-Determination of band gap of a semiconductor
3.
Indexing of Powder Diffraction Pattern
4.
Characteristics of a photodiode
5.
Uniform pending- Young’s modulus determination
6.
Spectrometer-Dispersive power of the prism
7.
Viscosity of liquids- Determination of co-efficient of viscosity of a liquid by Poiseuille’s method.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Physics Laboratory Manual, Department of Physics, MepcoSchlenk Engineering College, Sivakasi.
ENVIRONMENTAL CHEMISTRY LABORATORY
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS (Any FIVE Experiments)
1.
Determination of DO in water by Winkler’s method
2.
Estimation of Chloride in water sample by Argentometric method
3.
Determination of COD value of industrial effluents
4.
Estimation of chromium in tannery wastes
5.
Estimation of available chlorine in bleaching powder
6.
Estimation of iron by spectrophotometry
7.
Estimation of sodium by flame photometry
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
A. L. Vogel, A Text Book of Quantitative Inorganic Analysis, ELBS London, 1995.
2.
D. P. Shoemaker and C. W. Garland, Experiments in Physical Chemistry, McGraw Hill, London, 2001.
3.
N. Manivasakam, Industrial Effluents – Origin, Characteristics, Effects Analysis & Treatment, Sakthi
Publications, Coimbatore, 1987.
31
15CS252
OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING LABORATORY
LT P C
0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
During the lab course the students shall

Practice implementation of Object Oriented Programs in C++ using appropriate coding standards

Practice design and implementation of C++ program with classes and objects as real world entities

Practice reusability using inheritance in C++

Practice design and implementation of generic programs in C++

Practice design and implementation of OOP concepts like polymorphism

Practice file manipulation in C++
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Develop object oriented programs which follows proper coding standards.

Demonstrate object oriented concepts learnt in theory by writing efficient C++ programs involving generic
and non-generic types.

Write robust program using proper exception handling techniques

Develop ADTs with arithmetic operations performed as done for inbuilt data types

Develop programs which can create and manipulate persistent data

Develop a software application (minimal) to exercise all concepts learnt
SYLLABUS FOR THE LABORATORY:
The exercises are to be based on the following topics
1.
Study of Coding Standards & guidelines for C++ and the code building procedure
2.
Functions with C++ specific features like default arguments, inline, parameter pass by reference
3.
Classes, objects, member functions, Constructors , destructor
4.
Static data members and static member functions
5.
Function overloading
6.
Operator Overloading
7.
ADT with proper exception handling
8.
Inheritance, virtual function, and RTTI
9.
Templates
10.
Creating and manipulating Data Files
11.
Auto, lambda expressions, nullptr, constexpr
12.
Mini Project – To be taken along with other exercises
*The course instructor may specify a problem statement (for a team size of 4 to 5 members) focusing towards a
working project by covering each of the above topics as modules incorporated into the project. This leads to
CDIO (Conceive, Design, Implement and Operate) Framework.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
Ira Pohl, ”Oriented Programming using C++”, Second Edition, Pearson Education, 2012 Reprint.
2.
Paul Deitel and Harvey Deitel, “C++ How to Program”, 9 Edition, Prentice Hall, 2013
th
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Herbert Schildt, “C++: A Beginner's Guide”, Second Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2003
2.
Bjarne Stroustrup, “The C++ Programming Language”, Fourth edition, Addison-Wesley, 2013.
32
3.
Stanley B. Lippman, Josée Lajoie, Barbara E. Moo, “C++ Primer”, Sixth Edition, Addison-Wesley, 2012.
4.
Alex Korban, “C++11/14 Rocks”, VS2013/GCC Edition, http://cpprocks.com/books/, 2014
WEB REFERENCES:
1.
http://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical-engineering-and-computer-science/6-096-introduction-to-c-januaryiap-2011/index.htm
2.
https://developers.google.com/edu/c++/
3.
https://www.coursera.org/course/cplusplus4c
SEMESTER – III
15MA304
MATHEMATICS III - DISCRETE MATHEMATICS
L
T
P
C
3
2
0
4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To introduce students the ideas and techniques of naïve set theory that are widely applied in
computer science

To introduce object language and to write derive conclusions using mathematical arguments

To introduce the concept of graph theory and its applications.

To impart the group theory and its relevance in computer science

To impart the concept of partial order relation and lattices
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to

Apply the concept of set theory for enumeration problems

Construct mathematical arguments using logical connectives, quantifiers and to derive conclusions
using the rules of inference

Write computer programs using object language

Apply the concepts of graph theory in many real life problems such as finding the shortest path,
critical path etc.

Use lattices as an algorithmic tool to solve problems in cryptography and cryptanalysis
UNIT I
SET THEORY
12
Set operations - Properties - Power set - Principle of Inclusion and exclusion and its applications - Relations Graph and Matrix of a relation - Partial order - Well ordering - Equivalence relation and its properties Functions - One to one and onto functions - Composition of relations and functions - Inverse functions.
UNIT II
LOGIC AND PROOFS
12
Basic connectives and truth tables - Logical equivalences and implications - Propositional logic - First order
logic - Laws of logic - Rules of inference - Inference theory - Statement calculus - Quantifiers - Predicate
calculus - Proof methods and strategy.
UNIT III
BASIC GRAPH THEORY
12
Introduction to graphs – Terminology – Directed and undirected graphs – Adjacency and incidence matrices –
paths – Euler and Hamiltonian paths – Dijkstra’s shortest path algorithm – Tree – Simple applications –
Spanning tree – Kruskal algorithm.
UNIT IV
ALGEBRAIC STRUCTURE
12
Semi groups and Monoids – Groups – Subgroups and Homomorphisms – Cosets and Lagrange’s theorem –
Rings and Fields (Definitions and Examples).
33
UNIT V
LATTICES AND BOOLEAN ALGEBRA
12
Partial ordering – Posets – Lattices as Posets – Properties of lattices – Sub-lattices – Direct product and
Homomorphism – Distributive lattices – Modular lattices – Complete lattices – Complemented lattices –
Boolean Algebra.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
th
1.
Kenneth H. Rosen, “Discrete Mathematics and Its Applications”, McGraw-Hill, 7 edition, 2012.
2.
Jean Paul Trembley, R Manohar, “Discrete Mathematical Structures with Application to Computer
th
Science”, McGraw-Hill, Inc. New York, 5 edition, 2010.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Koshy,”Discrete Mathematics with Applications”, Elsevier Publications, (2006).
2.
T.Veerarajan, ”Discrete Mathematics with Graph Theory” , Tata McGraw-Hill Education 5
2008.
th
reprint,
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.cims.nyu.edu/~regev/teaching/discrete_math_fall_2005/dmbook.pdf
2. http://maths.mq.edu.au/~chris/notes/first_discrete.html
3. http://www1.cs.columbia.edu/~zeph/3203s04/lectures.html
15HS301
PROFESSIONAL ETHICS
L
T
P
C
2
0
0
2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To discuss about various human values and explain their significance

To illustrate the importance of ethics in engineering

To highlight the importance of conducting the engineering experiments in ethical manner

To discuss on safety standard for engineering products and services

To explain the rights and responsibilities of professionals

To explain the global ethical issues in business, environment, media and warfare
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Live ethical and peaceful professional life by following human values

Handle the ethical issues in engineering field

Conduct the engineering experiments without affecting the society

Become a responsible engineer for maintaining safety in all aspects

Become responsible in work place and ensure the proper usage of rights

Handle global ethical issues
UNIT I
HUMAN VALUES
6
Morals, values and Ethics - Integrity - Work ethic - Service learning - Civic virtue - Respect for others - Living
peacefully - Caring - Sharing - Honesty - Courage - Valuing time - Cooperation - Commitment - Empathy Self-confidence - Character - Spirituality
UNIT II
ENGINEERING ETHICS
6
Senses of Engineering Ethics - Variety of moral issues - Types of inquiry - Moral dilemmas - Moral autonomy Kohlberg’s theory - Gilligan’s theory - Consensus and controversy - Models of professional roles - Theories
about right action - Self-interest - Customs and Religion - Uses of ethical theories
UNIT III
ENGINEERING AS SOCIAL EXPERIMENTATION
6
Engineering as experimentation - Engineers as responsible experimenters - Codes of ethics - A Balanced
34
outlook on law - The challenger case study
UNIT IV
SAFETY, RESPONSIBILITIES AND RIGHTS
6
Safety and risk - Assessment of safety and risk - Risk benefit analysis and reducing risk - The Three Mile
Island and Chernobyl case studies - Collegiality and loyalty - Respect for authority - Collective bargaining
- Confidentiality - Conflicts of Interest - Occupational crime - Professional rights - Employee rights Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) - Discrimination
UNIT V
GLOBAL ISSUES
6
Multinational corporations - Environmental ethics - Computer ethics - Weapons development - Engineers as
managers - Consulting engineers - Engineers as Expert Witnesses and Advisors - Moral leadership - Sample
Code of Conduct
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
Govindarajan M, Natarajan S, Senthil Kumar V. S, “Professional Ethics and Human Values”, Prentice
Hall of India, New Delhi, 2004.
2.
Subramanian R, “Professional Ethics”, Oxford University Press, 2013.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Mike W. Martin and Roland Schinzinger, “Ethics in Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2nd
Edition, 2009.
2.
Charles B. Fleddermann, “Engineering Ethics”, Pearson Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 2004.
3.
Charles E. Harris, Michael S. Pritchard and Michael J. Rabins, “Engineering Ethics - Concepts and
Cases”, Thompson Wadsworth, A Division of Thomson Learning Inc., United States, 2000.
4.
John R Boatright, “Ethics and the Conduct of Business”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2003.
5.
Edmund G Seebauer and Robert L Barry, “Fundamentals of Ethics for Scientists and Engineers”,
Oxford University Press, 2001.
WEB REFERENCES:
1.
http://ethics.iit.edu/teaching/professional-ethics
2.
http://www.engc.org.uk/professional-ethics.aspx
3.
http://www.youtube.com/playlist?list=PL746AE3CCB29B64B8
4.
http://www.csun.edu/~meh20426/303/6EthicsIntro.pdf
5.
www.ethicsandbusiness.org/whoweare.htm
15CS301
DATA STRUCTURES AND ALGORITHMS
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To introduce algorithm analysis frame work for recursive and non recursive algorithms

To acquire knowledge on ADTs such as List, Stack and Queue

To explore the binary trees and the priority queues with their applications

To learn the various hashing techniques and Set ADT

To get exposure on graphs, its representation, traversal and applications
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Design and analyse recursive and non recursive algorithms

Implement List, Stack and Queue with appropriate data structures

Construct balanced search trees and heap based priority queue

Work with Set and hash table for effective searching

Apply the BFS and DFS traversal techniques
35

Find MST, Shortest path and connected components in graphs
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO ANALYSIS OF ALGORITHMS
9
Introduction to algorithms - Algorithm Analysis framework - Performance of algorithms: Space and Time
Complexity - Asymptotic Notations: Big-Oh, Big-Omega and Big-Theta - Best, Worst and Average case
analysis of algorithms. Mathematical analysis of Non recursive Algorithms - Sequential Search. Mathematical
analysis of Recursive Algorithms - Recurrence relation - Binary search.
UNIT II
LINEAR DATA STRUCTURES
9
Abstract Data Types (ADT) - List ADT - Array-based implementation - Linked list implementation - doublylinked lists - Applications of Lists - Polynomial Operations. Stack ADT - Array based and linked List based
implementation - Postfix expression evaluation. Queue ADT - Circular queue and linked List based
implementation - Applications of Queues.
UNIT III
BINARY TREES AND PRIORITY QUEUES
9
Trees - Binary trees - Binary tree representation and traversals - Threaded binary trees - Expression Trees Binary Search Tree - Applications of trees. Balanced trees: AVL trees. Priority queue - Binary heap - Heap
operations - Applications of heap.
UNIT IV
SETS AND HASHING
9
Disjoint Set ADT - Dynamic equivalence problem - Set operations - Representation - Implementation of union Find operations - Smart union algorithms - Path compression - Applications of set. Hashing - Closed hashing:
Separate chaining - Open addressing: Linear and quadratic probing - rehashing - Extendible hashing.
UNIT V
GRAPHS
9
Graph - Definitions - Representations - Topological sort - Breadth first traversal - Depth first traversal Connected components - Shortest path algorithms: Single source shortest path - Minimum spanning tree Prim’s and Kruskal’s algorithms.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
Mark Allen Weiss, “Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C++”, Pearson Education, Fourth
Edition, 2013.
2.
Anany Levitin, “Introduction to the Design and Analysis of Algorithm”, Pearson Education Asia, 2013.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Ellis Horowitz and Sartaj Sahni, “Fundamentals of Data Structures”, Galgotia Book Sorce, Gurgaon,
2007.
2.
Jean-Paul Tremblay and Paul G. Sorenson, “An Introduction to Data Structures with Applications”,
Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, Second Edition, 1991.
3.
Alfred V. Aho, John E. Hopcroft and Jeffry D. Ullman, “Data Structures and Algorithms”, Pearson
Education, New Delhi, 2006
4.
Thomas H Cormen, Charles E Leiserson, Ronald L Rivest and Clifford Stein, “Introduction to Algorithms”,
Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, Second Edition, 2007
WEB REFERENCES:
1. www.nptel.ac.in
2. http://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical-engineering-and-computer-science/6-851-advanced-datastructures-spring-2012/
3. http://courses.cs.vt.edu/~csonline/DataStructures
4. http://cslibrary.stanford.edu/103/LinkedListBasics.pdf
5. www.cs.cornell.edu/courses/cs312/2005sp/lectures/rec19.html
36
15CS302
DIGITAL PRINCIPLES AND SYSTEM DESIGN
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To introduce different methods to simplify Boolean function and realize the logic circuits

To acquire knowledge for the design of the combinational circuit and simulation using HDL

To understand the principles of memory and programmable logic circuits

To learn the working of the synchronous sequential circuits and their simulation using HDL / Verilog
HDL.

To get exposure of asynchronous sequential circuits.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Simplify Boolean function and realize the logic circuits

Design the combinational circuit and simulate using HDL

Design the memory and programmable logic circuits

Design synchronous sequential circuit and simulate using HDL / Verilog HDL.

Design asynchronous sequential circuits.
UNIT I
BOOLEAN ALGEBRA AND LOGIC GATES
9
Binary codes - Boolean algebra and theorems - Boolean functions - Simplifications of Boolean functions using
Karnaugh map and Tabulation methods - Implementation of Boolean functions using logic gates. Introduction
to Hardware Description Language (HDL)
UNIT II
COMBINATIONAL LOGIC
9
Combinational circuits - Analysis and design procedures - Circuits for arithmetic operations - Code conversion
- Decoders and encoders - Multiplexers and demultiplexers - HDL for combinational circuits
UNIT III
MEMORY AND PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
9
RAM - Memory Decoding - Error detection and correction - ROM - PLA - PAL - Applications. Specific
Integrated Circuits: Multiplexed display systems, Dot matrix Display Systems
UNIT IV
SYNCHRONOUS SEQUENTIAL LOGIC
9
Sequential circuits - Flip-Flops - Analysis and design procedures - State reduction and state assignment - Shift
registers - Counters - HDL for Sequential Circuits.
UNIT V
ASYNCHRONOUS SEQUENTIAL LOGIC
9
Analysis and design of asynchronous sequential circuits - Reduction of state and flow tables - Race-free state
assignment - Hazards.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
M.Morris Mano, “Digital Design”, Pearson Education, 5th edition, 2012.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Charles H.Roth, Jr. “Fundamentals of Logic Design”, Jaico Publishing House, Cengage Earning, 4th
Edition, 2005.
2.
Donald D.Givone, “Digital Principles and Design”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2007.
3.
John F. Wakerly, “Digital Design Principles and Practices”, Pearson Education, Fourth Edition, 2007.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.doe.carleton.ca/~shams/ELEC3500/hazards.pdf
2. www.ee.surrey.ac.uk/Projects/Labview/Sequential/Course/02-Hazard
3. http://sifaka.uwaterloo.ca/~akenning/courses/ece124/notes/19_async_analysis_and_design_v1.pdf
4. http://www.uotechnology.edu.iq/sweit/Lectures/Dr-Ikbal-Electronics-2nd/ASM2.pdf
37
15CS303
COMPUTER ORGANIZATION AND ARCHITECTURE
L
T
P
C
3
2
0
4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To understand the basic structure and operation of a digital computer.

To learn the design of arithmetic unit.

To understand the basics of processing unit and control signals.

To study the pipelining architecture and its issues.

To study the hierarchical memory system.

To study the interfaces for I/O devices.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Identify the parameters that affect the performance of digital computers.

Design the components of arithmetic unit.

Trace the execution sequence of an instruction.

Address the various issues of pipeline organization.

Analyze the cost performance of memory types.

Design I/O interface circuits.
UNIT I
BASIC STRUCTURE OF COMPUTERS
10+3
Functional units - Basic operational concepts - Performance - Instructions and instruction sequencing Addressing modes - Arithmetic: Design of fast adders - Multiplication of unsigned and signed numbers - Fast
Multiplication - Integer division - Floating point numbers and operations.
UNIT II
BASIC PROCESSING UNIT
9+3
Fundamental concepts - Instruction Execution - Hardware Components - Instruction Fetch and Execution
Steps - Control Signals - Hardwired control - RISC and CISC Styles Processors.
UNIT III
PIPELINING
8+3
Basic concepts - Pipeline organization and issues - Data dependencies - Memory and branch delays Performance evaluation - Pipelining in CISC processors.
UNIT IV
MEMORY SYSTEM
9+3
Basic concepts - Memory hierarchy - Semiconductor RAM - Read-only Memories - Direct Memory Access Cache memory - Performance considerations - Virtual memory - Secondary storage.
UNIT V
I/O ORGANIZATION
9+3
Bus structure - Bus operation - Arbitration - Interface circuits - Interconnection standards: PCI, SCSI, SATA,
USB, SAS, and HDMI - Accessing I/O Devices: I/O Device Interface - Program-Controlled I/O - Interrupts.
L: 45; T: 15; TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
Carl Hamacher, Zvonko Vranesic, Safwat Zaky, and Naraig Manjikian, “Computer Organization and
Embedded Systems”, McGraw Hill Higher Education, Sixth Edition, 2011.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
David A. Patterson and John L. Hennessy, “Computer Organization and Design: The Hardware /
Software interface”, Elsevier, Third Edition, 2005.
2.
“Computer Organization”, ISRD Group, Tata McGraw Hill, 2006.
3.
William Stallings, “Computer Organization and Architecture Education, Sixth Edition, 2003.
WEB REFERENCES:
1.
http://www.ics.p.lodz.pl/~dpuchala/CompArch/Lecture_6.pdf
38
Designing for Performance”, Pearson
2.
http://www.dauniv.ac.in/downloads/CArch_PPTs/
3.
http://cse.iitk.ac.in/users/karkare/courses/2011/cs220/html/notes.html
4.
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106102062/
5.
http://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical-engineering-and-computer-science/6-823-computer-systemarchitecture-fall-2005/
15IT303
PRINCIPLES OF COMMUNICATION
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To understand the basic analog transmission and communication techniques

To learn digital modulation techniques

To study about the digital communication methods

To learn the concept of spread spectrum and Multiple access techniques

To understand the basic concepts of satellite and optical communication
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Determine the behavior of analog modulation schemes in time and frequency domains

Apply suitable pulse modulation techniques for data transmission

Determine the performance of different digital communication systems

Evaluate the operation of spread spectrum and multiple access schemes

Estimate the performance of Optical Communication Systems
UNIT I
ANALOG COMMUNICATION
10
Need of modulation - Principles of amplitude modulation - AM envelope - Frequency spectrum and bandwidth
– Modulation index – AM Voltage Distribution - AM power distribution – AM Transmitter - Angle modulation FM and PM waveforms - Phase deviation and modulation index - Frequency deviation - Frequency analysis of
angle modulated waves - Bandwidth requirements for angle modulated waves – Superheterodyne Receiver.
UNIT II
DIGITAL TRANSMISSION
9
Introduction to Pulse modulation - Pulse Code Modulation – PCM sampling – Sampling Rate – Quantization
and Folded Binary Code – Dynamic Range – Signal-to-Quantization Noise Ratio - Analog companding –
Digital companding - Delta modulation – Adaptive Delta Modulation - Intersymbol interference - Eye patterns.
UNIT III
DIGITAL COMMUNICATION
9
Introduction –Digital Amplitude Modulation - Frequency shift keying - Binary Phase shift keying – Quadrature
phase shift keying – 8-PSK – 16-PSK - Quadrature Amplitude Modulation.
UNIT IV
SPREAD SPECTRUM AND MULTIPLE ACCESS TECHNIQUES
8
Introduction - Pseudo-noise sequence - DS spread spectrum with coherent binary PSK - Processing gain - FH
spread spectrum - Multiple access techniques – FDMA - TDMA - CDMA.
UNIT V
SATELLITE AND OPTICAL COMMUNICATION
9
Satellite communication systems - Kepler’s law - LEO and GEO orbits - Footprint - Link model - Optical
communication systems - Elements of optical fiber transmission link - Types - Sources and detectors.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
Wayne Tomasi, “Advanced Electronic Communication Systems”, Sixth Edition, Pearson Education,
2007.
2.
Simon Haykin, “Communication Systems”, 5th Edition, John Wiley & Sons., 2009
39
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
H.Taub, D L Schilling, G Saha,”Principles of Communication”, 3/e, 2007.
2.
B.P.Lathi,”Modern Analog and Digital Communication
2007.
3.
Dennis Roddy and John Coolen ,” Electronic Communications”,
2008.
systems”,
3/e,
4/e,
Oxford University Press,
Pearson Education India,
WEB REFERENCES:
1.
www.nptel.ac.in
2.
http://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical-engineering-and-computer-science/6-450-principles-of-digitalcommunications-i-fall-2006/
15HS351
PRESENTATION SKILLS LABORATORY
L
T
P
C
III Semester - for branches EEE, CSE, Civil
0
0
2
1
IV Semester - for branches IT, ECE, Mech, Bio-Tech
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To hone the students’ proficiency in speaking skills

To enhance their pronouncing skills

To help the students acquire presentation skills

To enable the students communicate effectively
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Students of Engineering and Technology will be able to

recognize phonemes

improve pronunciation

acquire all strategies of presentation skills

develop interpersonal skills
PHONETIC PRACTICE
4
English phonemes: Vowels, Diphthongs, Consonants - Word Stress, phoneme recognizing practice
LISTENING COMPREHENSION
3
Documentaries, Educational video clips, Oration of Great leaders, Radio & TV news, Listening to
conversations, Telephone etiquette, Reviewing news from Media.
LANGUAGE FUNCTIONS
3
Giving reasons, talking about future plans, Comparing & Contrasting, Making suggestions
PRESENTATION STRATEGIES
5
Presentation Strategies Defining Purpose; Audience & Locale; Organizing Contents; Preparing Outline; Audiovisual Aids; Nuances of Delivery; Body Language; Proximics; Setting Nuances of Voice Dynamics; TimeDimension.
PRESENTATION AND APPRAISAL SESSIONS
10
Importance of Journal articles - elements of technical articles (abstract, introduction, methodology, results,
discussion, conclusion, appendices, Bibliography and references), Preparation of scholarly papers based on
the internet Resources, Oral Presentations & Reviews.
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Mandel, Steve, “Effective Presentation Skills”, New Delhi: Viva Books Pvt. Ltd., 2004.
2.
Gopalaswamy, Ramesh & Ramesh Mahadevan, “ACE of Soft Skills”, New Delhi: Pearson, 2010.
40
3.
Gimson AC, “An Introduction to the Pronunciation of English”, London: ELBS, 1989.
4.
Oconnor, JD. , “Better English Pronunciation”, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1967.
15CS351
DATA STRUCTURES LABORATORY
L
T
P
C
0
0
4
2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To develop programming skills in design and implementation of linear data structures.

To build non linear data structures for set data type.

To practice the different hash searching and binary search techniques.

To work with different types of heaps.

To work with graph and solve some of the applications using graph.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Implement the various linear data structures such as List, Stack and Queue ADTs.

Enhance programming skills in design and implementation of non linear data structures.

Solve the collision problem using hashing technique.

Build the various heaps structures.

Solve graph based applications.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS COVERING THE FOLLOWING TOPICS
(The exercises are to be designed either based on CDIO principle or a mini project could be given based on
the courses in the semester)
1.
Implementation of Lists and applications of List
2.
Implementation of Stacks and its applications
3.
Implementation of Queues with applications
4.
Construction of Binary Search tree and perform the various operations
5.
Implementation of AVL tree
6.
Implementation of Binary Heap based Priority Queue
7.
Implementation of Hashing techniques
8.
Implementation of Set
9.
Implementation of graph algorithms
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
Mark Allen Weiss, “Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C++”, Pearson Education, Third
Edition, 2008.
2.
Anany Levitin, “Introduction to the Design and Analysis of Algorithm”, Pearson Education Asia, 2013.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Ellis Horowitz and Sartaj Sahni, “Fundamentals of Data Structures”, Galgotia Book Source, Gurgaon,
1976.
2.
3.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. www.nptel.ac.in
2. http://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical-engineering-and-computer-science/6-851-advanced-datastructures-spring-2012/
41
3. http://courses.cs.vt.edu/~csonline/DataStructures
4. http://cslibrary.stanford.edu/103/LinkedListBasics.pdf
5. www.cs.cornell.edu/courses/cs312/2005sp/lectures/rec19.html
15EC354
DIGITAL CIRCUITS LABORATORY
L
T
P
C
0
0
4
2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To implement adders, subtractors

To exercise code convertors, multiplexers, de-multiplexers

To construct counters and shift registers

To be familiar with any one digital circuits simulation software
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Design and implement adders, subtractors, code convertors, multiplexers, de-multiplexers

Design and implement magnitude comparator, parity checker circuit

Design and implement LED display and traffic light signal controller

Construct counters, shift registers using flip flops

Construct and simulate digital circuit using VHDL software
1.
Verification of Boolean theorems using digital logic gates
2.
Design and implementation of combinational circuits using basic gates for arbitrary functions,
code converters, etc.
3.
Design and implementation of binary adder / subtractor using basic gates and MSI devices
4.
Design and implementation of parity generator / checker using basic gates and MSI devices
5.
Design and implementation of magnitude comparator
6.
Design of decoder for LED display control
7.
Design and implementation of application using multiplexers/ De-multiplexers
8.
Design and implementation of Shift registers
9.
Design of traffic signal light controller
10. Design and implementation of Synchronous and Asynchronous counters
11. Simulation of combinational circuits using Hardware Description Language (VHDL/ Verilog
HDL software required)
12. Simulation of sequential circuits using HDL (VHDL/ Verilog HDL software required)
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
M.Morris Mano, “Digital Design”, Pearson Education, 3rd edition, 2007.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Charles H.Roth, Jr. “Fundamentals of Logic Design”, Jaico Publishing House, Cengage Earning, 5th
ed, 2005.
2.
Donald D.Givone, “Digital Principles and Design”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2007.
42
SEMESTER - IV
15MA404
MATHEMATICS IV - PROBABILITY AND QUEUEING THEORY
L
T
P
C
3
2
0
4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To know the association between the variables using correlation and regression.

To understand the theory of discrete-time Markov chains.

To introduce the concepts of queuing Theory.

To solve the problems of Non – Markovian queues and Networking.

To make the student knowledgeable in the area of probabilistic models.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student will be able to

Acquire skills in handling situations involving more than one random variable.

Have a well-founded knowledge of Markov Processes which can describe real life phenomena.

Be exposed to basic characteristic features of a queuing system and acquire skills in analyzing
models.

Define and explain basic concepts in the theory of Markov Process.

Gain some insights on using queuing theory as a decision-making tool.
UNIT I
PROBABILITY RANDOM VARIABLES AND DISTRIBUTIONS
12
Axiomatic definition of probability – Conditional Probability – Baye’s Theorem - Discrete and Continuous
random variables – Cumulative distribution function – properties – Moments – Moments about mean –
Moment generating function – Uniform and Exponential distributions.
UNIT II
TWO DIMENSIONAL RANDOM VARIABLES
12
Joint density function - Marginal and conditional density function – Functions of random variable Transformation of random variables - Correlation and regression.
UNIT III
MARKOV PROCESSES AND MARKOV CHAINS
Classification - Stationary process
- Markov
probabilities - Limiting distributions - Poisson process.
UNIT IV
process
12
-
Markov
chains
-
Transition
QUEUEING THEORY
12
Markovian models – Birth and Death Queuing models - Steady state results: Single and multiple server
queuing models - queues with finite and infinite size - Little’s Formula.
UNIT V
NON-MARKOVIAN QUEUES AND QUEUEING NETWORKS
12
Non Markovian Models: M/G/1 queue- Pollaczek- Khinchine formula, series queues. Tandem Queues:
Queues with blocking, without blocking – Jackson open network and closed network.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
Note: Approved statistical table is permitted to use in the examinations.
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
O.C. Ibe, “Fundamentals of Applied Probability and Random Processes”, Elsevier, 1st Indian Reprint,
2014.
2.
D. Gross and C.M. Harris, “Fundamentals of Queueing Theory”, Wiley Student edition, 2013.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
H.A. Taha, “Operations Research”, Pearson Education, Asia, 8th edition, 2011.
2.
A.O. Allen, “Probability, Statistics and Queueing Theory with Computer Applications”, Elsevier, 2nd
edition, 2005.
3.
K.S. Trivedi, “Probability and Statistics with Reliability, Queueing and Computer Science
Applications”, John Wiley and Sons, 2nd edition, 2008.
43
WEB REFERENCES:
1.
http://stattrek.com/probability-distributions/discrete-continuous.aspx
2.
http://people.brunel.ac.uk/~mastjjb/jeb/or/queue.html
3.
http://www.win.tue.nl/~iadan/queueing.pdf
15CS401
MICROPROCESSORS AND MICROCONTROLLERS
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To study the hardware architecture and programming model of 8086 processor

To learn to use coprocessor with 8086

To study the serial and parallel interfacing techniques

To study the hardware architecture and programming model of 8051 microcontroller

To learn the evolution of processors and its features
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Write Intel 8086 Assembly Language Programs

Perform Floating Point Computations using co-processor 8087

Interface the microprocessors with various input output devices

Develop programs using 8051 microcontroller

Compare the features of recent processors
UNIT I
8086 ARCHITECTURE AND PROGRAMMING
9
Intel 8086 Processor signals - Architecture - Addressing modes - Instruction set and assembler directives Assembly language programming - Procedures - Macros - Interrupts and interrupt service routines.
UNIT II
8086 AND SUPPORTING PROCESSORS
9
Minimum and Maximum mode configurations - Clock Generator - Bus controller - System bus timing Coprocessor: Numeric Data Processor - Data types - Instruction set.
UNIT III
INTERFACING
9
Memory interfacing and I/O interfacing - Parallel communication interface - Serial communication
interface - Timer -Interrupt controller - DMA Controller - Keyboard / Display interfacing - ADC and DAC
Interfacing - Stepper motor interfacing.
UNIT IV
8051 MICROCONTROLLER
9
Architecture of 8051 - Signals - Operational features - Instruction set - Memory and I/O addressing - Timer Interrupts - Serial Port - Introduction to 16 bit microcontroller
UNIT V
EVOLUTION OF PROCESSORS (Introductory level Only)
9
Introduction to 80386 - Pentium – Features of Multi Core Processors – Dual Core – Core 2 Duo – Core 2
Quad – Core i3 – Core i5 – Core i7
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
N.Senthilkumar, M.Saravanan, S.Jeevananthan, S.K.Shah “Microprocessors & Interfacing”, Oxford
University Press, 2012.
2.
Barry B. Brey, “The Intel Microprocessors - Architecture, Programming & Interfacing, 8086/8088,
80186/80188, 80286, 80386, 80486, Pentium, Pentium Pro Processor, Pentium II, Pentium III,
Pentium 4 and Core2 with 64-bit Extensions”, Pearson Prentice Hall, Eighth Edition, 2009.
44
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Kenneth J.Ayala, “The 8051 Microcontroller Architecture, Programming and Applications”, Penram
international, 2008.
2.
A. K. Ray & K. M. Bhurchandi, “Advanced Microprocessors and Peripherals- Architectures,
Programming and Interfacing”, Tata McGraw Hill, Second Edition, 2006.
3.
Peter Abel, “IBM PC Assembly language and programming”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., Fifth
Edition, 2007.
4.
Mohamed Ali Mazidi, Janice GillispieMazidi, RolinMcKinlay, “The 8051 Microcontroller and
Embedded Systems: Using Assembly and C”, Pearson education, Second Edition, 2011.
WEB REFERENCES:
1.
www.intel.com
2.
www.nptel.ac.in
15CS402
DESIGN AND ANALYSIS OF ALGORITHMS
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To introduce algorithm analysis and problem solving techniques using Divide & conquer and Greedy
techniques

To learn the problem solving techniques such as dynamic programming and iterative improvement

To understand and analyze algorithms using Backtracking and Branch and Bound technique

To explore various data sorting and string matching methods

To introduce advanced algorithms such as approximation, randomization and parallel algorithms
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Design and analyze the algorithms using divide and conquer and greedy techniques.

Solve problems using dynamic programming and iterative improvement and analyze it

Analyze the backtracking and branch & bound algorithms.

Perform sorting and string matching on the given collection of records

Work with advanced algorithms such as approximation, randomization and parallel algorithms
UNIT I
DIVIDE & CONQUER AND GREEDY TECHNIQUES
9
Introduction to the analysis of algorithms - Divide and conquer: Binary Tree Traversals - Finding maximum and
minimum - Multiplication of Large Integers - Strassen’s matrix multiplication - Closest Pair - Convex Hull.
Greedy approach: Container Loading Problem - Knapsack problem - Job Sequencing with deadlines - Optimal
storage on tapes - Huffman trees and Codes.
UNIT II
DYNAMIC PROGRAMMING AND ITERATIVE IMPROVEMENT
9
Dynamic Programming: Principle of optimality - Knapsack Problem - Optimal Binary Search Trees - Warshall’s
and Floyd’s Algorithms - Travelling Salesperson Problem. Iterative Improvement: The Simplex Method - The
Maximum-Flow Problem - Maximum Matching in Bipartite Graphs - The Stable Marriage Problem.
UNIT III
BACKTRACKING AND BRANCH & BOUND
9
Backtracking: n-Queens Problem - Hamiltonian Circuit Problem - Subset-Sum Problem - Graph Coloring.
Branch and Bound: Assignment Problem - Knapsack Problem - Traveling Salesman Problem.
UNIT IV
SORTING AND STRING MATCHING
9
Sorting: Bubble Sort - Selection Sort - Insertion Sort - Merge Sort - External Sorting - Quick Sort - Heap Sort.
String Matching: Brute Force String Matching Algorithm - KMP Algorithm - Horspool’s Algorithm - Boyer Moore
Algorithm.
45
UNIT V
NP PROBLEMS AND ADVANCED ALGORITHMS
9
NP completeness - Polynomial time verification - Theory of reducibility - Circuit satisfiability - Approximation
Algorithms for NP Hard Problems: Knapsack and Traveling Salesman problems - Randomization Algorithms:
Randomized Quick Sort - Parallel Algorithms: Parallel Searching and Sorting.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
Anany Levitin, “Introduction to the Design and Analysis of Algorithm”, Pearson Education, Second
Edition, 2013.
2.
Ellis Horowitz, Sartaj Sahni and Sanguthevar Rajasekaran, “Fundamentals of Computer Algorithms”,
Universities Press, Hyderabad, Second Edition, 2008.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Thomas H Cormen, Charles E Leiserson, Ronald L Rivest and Clifford Stein, “Introduction to
Algorithms”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, Second Edition, 2007
2.
Kenneth A. Berman and Jerome L. Paul, “Algorithms: Sequential, Parallel and Distributed”, Cengage
learning India Edition, New Delhi, 2002.
3.
Sara Baase and Allen Van Gelder, “Computer Algorithms - Introduction to Design & Analysis”,
Pearson Education, New Delhi, Third Edition, 2000.
4.
S.Sridhar, “Design and Analysis of Algorithms”, Oxford Higher education, 2015
WEB REFERENCES:
1.
2.
3.
http://www.personal.kent.edu/~rmuhamma/Algorithms/algorithm.html
4.
http://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical-engineering-and-computer-science/6-006-introduction-toalgorithms-fall-2011/lecture-videos/
5.
http://cs.uef.fi/pages/franti/asa/notes.html
15CS403
THEORY OF COMPUTATION
L
T
P
C
3
2
0
4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To know the different types of finite automata and regular languages

To familiarize context free grammars

To learn about push down automata

To understand the working of Turing machines

To study about undecidable problems
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Design finite state automata and regular expression for a language specification and convert one
form to another form

Write Context Free Grammars and normalize

Design push down automata(PDA) for languages and convert CFG to PDA and vice versa

Construct Turing machine by applying different techniques

Find undecidability in languages
UNIT I
FINITE AUTOMATA AND REGULAR EXPRESSIONS
10+3
Basic Definitions - Finite Automaton - DFA and NFA - Finite Automaton with -moves - Equivalence of NFA
and DFA - Equivalence of NFAs with and without -moves - Regular Languages - Regular Expression Equivalence of finite Automaton and regular expressions - Minimization of DFA.
46
UNIT II
GRAMMARS
9+3
Introduction - Types of Grammar - Context Free Grammars and Languages - Derivations - Parse Trees Equivalence of Derivations and Parse Trees - Ambiguity - Normalization of CFG - Elimination of Useless
symbols - Unit productions -  productions - Chomsky normal form - Greibach Normal form.
UNIT III
PUSH DOWN AUTOMATA
8+3
Definition - Moves - Instantaneous descriptions -- Equivalence of Pushdown automata and CFG Deterministic pushdown automata - Pumping lemma for Regular Languages and CFL - Application of
Pumping Lemma
UNIT IV
TURING MACHINES
9+3
Definitions - Models - Computable languages -Techniques for Turing machine construction - Extensions of
Basic Turing Machine - Problems about Turing machine - Chomskian hierarchy of languages.
UNIT V
UNDECIDABILITY
9+3
Unsolvable Problems and Computable Functions - Recursive and recursively enumerable languages Universal Turing machine - Rice Theorem - Post Correspondence Problem - P and NP completeness Polynomial time reductions.
L: 45 ; T: 15 ; TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
J.E.Hopcroft, R.Motwani and J.D Ullman, “Introduction to Automata Theory, Languages and
Computations”, Pearson Education, Third Edition, 2008.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Mishra K L P and Chandrasekaran N, “Theory of Computer Science-Automata, Languages and
Computation”, Prentice Hall of India, Third Edition, 2007.
2.
Harry R. Lewis and Christos H. Papadimitriou, “Elements of the theory of Computation”, Prentice-Hall
of India Pvt. Ltd, Second Edition, 2009.
3.
Kamala Krithivasan and R. Rama, “Introduction to Formal Languages, Automata Theory and
Computation”, Pearson Education, Delhi, 2009.
4.
J. Martin, “Introduction to Languages and the Theory of Computation”, Tata Mc Graw Hill, New Delhi,
Third Edition, 2007.
5.
Micheal Sipser, “Introduction to the Theory and Computation”, Cengage Learning India, 2012.
WEB REFERENCES:
1.
www.nptel.ac.in
2.
http://ocw.mit.edu/courses/mathematics/18-404j-theory-of-computation-fall-2006/
3.
http://infolab.stanford.edu/~ullman/ialc.html
4.
http://www.cs.duke.edu/csed/jflap/tutorial/
5.
http://www.turing.org.uk/turing/scrapbook/machine.html
15CS404
SOFTWARE ENGINEERING PRINCIPLES
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To explore the fundamental concepts of software engineering

To develop skills to elicitate, analyze and document requirements

To understand the software design principles

To introduce ethical and professional issues in developing project

To learn the software project management principles
47
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Apply software engineering principles for software development

Formulate software requirement specification

Design software according to the specification

Test the software using software testing techniques

Manage software projects
UNIT I
SOFTWARE PROCESS AND DEVELOPMENT METHODOLOGY
9
Introduction to software engineering – Life cycle models – Water fall model – Spiral model – Win Win Spiral
model – Prototyping model – Increment model – RAD model – Software processes – Specialized process
models – The rational unified process
UNIT II
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
9
Functional and non functional – Software document – Requirement engineering process – Feasibility studies –
Software prototyping – Prototyping in the software process – Data – Functional and behavioral models –
Structured analysis and data dictionary
UNIT III
ANALYSIS, DESIGN CONCEPTS AND PRINCIPLES
9
Systems engineering – Analysis concepts – Design process and concepts – Modular design – Design
heuristic – Architectural design – Data design – User interface design – Real time software design – System
design – Real time executives – Data acquisition system – Monitoring and control system
UNIT IV
TESTING
9
Taxonomy of software testing – Types of Software testing – Black box testing – Testing boundary conditions –
Structural testing – Test coverage criteria based on data flow mechanisms – Regression testing – Unit testing
– Integration testing – Validation testing – System testing and Debugging – Software implementation
techniques
UNIT V
SOFTWARE PROJECT MANAGEMENT
9
Measures and measurement – ZIPF’s law – Software cost estimation – Function point models – COCOMO
Model – Delphi method – Scheduling – Earned value analysis – Error tracking – Software configuration
management – Program evaluation dynamics – Software maintenance – Project planning – Project scheduling
– Risk management – Agile software development – Agile methods – Plan driven and agile development –
Scaling agile methods - agile project management – Case tools.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
Roger S. Pressman, “Software Engineering: A practitioner’s Approach”, McGraw-Hill International
Edition, Seventh Edition, 2014.
2.
Ian Sommerville, “Software engineering”, Pearson Education Asia, Ninth Edition, 2012.
3.
Richard Fairley,”Software Engineering concepts”, McGraw-Hill International Edition, 30
2008.
th
Reprint,
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Watts S.Humphrey, “A Discipline for Software Engineering”, Pearson Education, 2007.
2.
James F.Peters and Witold Pedrycz, “Software Engineering, An Engineering Approach”, Wiley-India,
2007.
3.
Stephen R.Schach, “Software Engineering”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2007.
4.
S.A.Kelkar, “Software Engineering”, Prentice Hall of India, 2007.
WEB REFERENCES:
1.
http://172.16.16.210/index.php/nptel-video-courses/video-cse/ video-cse-software-engineering
2.
http://172.16.16.210/index.php/nptel-video-courses/video-cse/ video-cse-software-engineering/2503software-metrics-quality
48
3.
http://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical-engineering-and-computer-science/6-005-elements-of-softwareconstruction-fall-2008/
4.
http://nptel.ac.in/video.php?subjectId=106101061
5.
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/Webcourse-contents/IIT%20Kharagpur/Soft%20Engg/New_index1.html
15IT401
DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To correlate the role of database management systems in information technology applications within
organization

To sketch basic database concepts, including the structure and operation of the relational data model

To articulate the use of contemporary logical design methods and tools for databases

To understand the relationship between Transaction Processing and Databases

To study query processing and optimization
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Draw the ER diagram for enterprise applications

Analyze the consequence of algebra in designing relational model and create database using query
languages with constraints and security

Normalize databases to reduce cost due to redundancy constraints

Assess different types of scheduling and recovery techniques for concurrent transactions

Validate the query evaluation plan and optimize to reduce memory complexity
UNIT I
DATABASE FUNDAMENTALS
9
Purpose of Database Systems – View of Data - Database System Architecture – Database Users and
Administrators – Data Models – Entity Relationship Model – Constraints - Entity Sets – Attributes – Keys - E-R
Diagrams - Design Issues - Extended E-R Features - Introduction of Relational Model – E-R Reduction to
Relational Schemas.
UNIT II
RELATIONAL DATABASE MODEL
9
Structure of Relational Databases – Schema Diagrams – Relational Query Languages - Relational Algebra –
Queries in SQL – Set Operations – Aggregate Operations – Joins – Views – Integrity Constraints –
Authorization – Advanced SQL – Functions and Procedures – Triggers – Assertion – Embedded SQL –
Dynamic SQL- SQL Application Programming using C and Java.
UNIT III
LOGICAL DATABASE DESIGN
9
Need for good database design – Functional Dependencies and Keys – Closure of Functional Dependencies
Set – Closure of attributes - Dependency Preservation - Decomposition using Functional dependencies –
Atomic domains and First Normal Form – Second Normal Form – Third Normal Form – Boyce Codd Normal
Form – Multivalued Dependencies - Decomposition using Multivalued dependencies – Fourth Normal Form
– Join Dependencies – Fifth Normal Form – Introduction to Domain Key Normal Form – Case Studies
UNIT IV
DATABASE TRANSACTIONS AND CONCURRENCY CONTROL
9
Transaction Model – ACID properties – Transaction States – Serializability - Conflict serializability – View
Serializability – Testing Serializability - Concurrency Control – Lock Based Protocols – Deadlocks – Multiple
Granularity – Time Stamp Based Protocols – Validation Based Protocols – Multi Version Schemes – Recovery
System – Failure Classification – Storage – Recovery and Atomicity – Recovery Algorithm.
UNIT V
QUERY PROCESSING AND OPTIMIZATION
9
Query Processing - Measures of Query Cost - Selection– Sorting - Join Operation – Other Operations Evaluation of Expressions –Database Tuning - Query Optimization - Transformation of Relational Expressions
- Estimating Statistics of Expression Results - Choice of Evaluation Plans – Materialized Views.
49
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
Henry F Korth, Abraham Silberschatz, S. Sudharshan, “Database System Concepts”, McGraw Hill,
Sixth Edition, 2011.
2.
C.J.Date, A.Kannan and S.Swamynathan, ”An Introduction to Database Systems”, Pearson
Education, Eighth Edition, 2006.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
R. Elmasri, S.B. Navathe, “Fundamentals of Database Systems”, Pearson Education/Addison
Wesley, Sixth Edition, 2014.
2.
Thomas Cannolly and Carolyn Begg, “Database Systems, A Practical Approach to Design,
Implementation and Management”, Pearson Education, Fifth Edition, 2009.
3.
Raghu Ramakrishnan, Johannes Gehrke, “Database Management Systems”, McGraw Hill, Third
Edition, 2004.
WEB REFERENCES:
1.
http://www.1keydata.com/datawarehousing/data-modeling-levels.html
2.
http://www.cs.uwaterloo.ca/~gweddell/cs448/Arch.pdf
3.
http://www.sql-tutorial.net/SQL-tutorial.asp
4.
http://sqlzoo.net/
5.
http://www.service-architecture.com/database/articles/ acid_properties. html
6.
http://www.orafaq.com/wiki/Oracle_database_Performance_Tuning_FAQ
15CS451
MICROPROCESSORS AND MICRO CONTROLLERS LABORATORY
L
T
P
C
0
0
4
2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To acquire expertise in assembly language programming using 8086

To develop programming skills on microcontroller programming using 8051

To apply the assembly language programming for interfacing with various peripherals
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Write assembly language programs using 8086

Design applications using MASM assembler and cross assemblers

Write programs to perform I/O using handshaking and interrupts

Develop different interfacing applications
1.
Simple programming exercises on 8086.
2.
Code conversion, decimal arithmetic and Matrix operations.
3.
Simple programming with BIOS Interrupts
4.
String manipulation - search, find and replace, copy operations, sorting and searching.
5.
Interfacing with 8086 - 8255 and 8253.
6.
Interfacing with 8086 - 8279 and 8251.
7.
16 bit arithmetic operations using 8051.
8.
Interfacing stepper motor with 8086/8051.
9.
Interfacing ADC and DAC with 8086/8051.
10. Interfacing traffic light controller with 8086/8051.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
50
TEXT BOOK:
N.Senthilkumar, M.Saravanan, S.Jeevananthan, S.K.Shah “Microprocessors & Interfacing”, Oxford
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Barry B. Brey, “The Intel Microprocessors - Architecture, Programming & Interfacing, 8086/8088,
80186/80188, 80286, 80386, 80486, Pentium, Pentium Pro Processor, Pentium II, Pentium III,
Pentium 4 and Core2 with 64-bit Extensions”, Pearson Prentice Hall ,Eighth Edition , 2009.
2.
Kenneth J.Ayala, “The 8051 Microcontroller Architecture, Programming and Applications”, Penram
international, 2008.
3.
A. K. Ray & K. M. Bhurchandi, “Advanced Microprocessors and Peripherals- Architectures,
Programming and Interfacing”, Tata McGraw Hill, Second Edition, 2006.
4.
Peter Abel, “IBM PC Assembly language and programming”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., Fifth
Edition, 2007.
5.
Mohamed Ali Mazidi, Janice GillispieMazidi, RolinMcKinlay, “The 8051 Microcontroller and
Embedded Systems: Using Assembly and C”, Pearson Education, Second Edition, 2011.
15IT451
DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM LABORATORY
L
T
P
C
0
0
4
2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To persuade different issues involved in the design and implementation of a database system for real
time applications

To speculate sophisticated queries to extract information from the large datasets available

To schematize several database projects related to an information technology problem based on
given requirements
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Populate and query a database using SQL DML/DDL commands

Declare and enforce integrity constraints on a database using a state-of-the-art RDBMS

Programming PL/SQL including stored procedures, stored functions, cursors and packages

Design and build a GUI application using any programming language as front end
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
For all exercises draw ER Diagram and Apply Normalization techniques
1.
Data Definition Language Commands
2.
Data Manipulation Language Commands
3.
Data Control Language, Nested Queries
4.
Set Operators and Join Queries
5.
Views and Indexes
6.
PL/SQL – Triggers
7.
PL/SQL – Functions
8.
PL/SQL – Procedures
9.
ORDBMS
10. Front end Connectivity
11. Form / Menu Design (Qlik)
12. Report Generation
51
SEMESTER - V
15CS501
PROGRAMMING WITH JAVA
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To realize object oriented concepts using Java

To understand the essentials of Inheritance and Polymorphism

To learn event driven programming and GUI

To learn to handle exceptions

To study generics and Collection classes

To understand the basics of concurrent programming in Java
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Write simple Object Oriented Programs using Java

Design classes with inheritance and polymorphism

Develop GUI based Application using event driven programming

Handle exceptions in an effective way

Write Java programs using Generics and collections

Write concurrent programs in Java
UNIT I
FUNDAMENTALS OF OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING WITH JAVA
9
Review of OOP - Java Features - Objects and classes in Java - defining classes - methods - access specifiers
- static members - constructors - Arrays - Strings - String Buffer - String Tokenizer - Packages - The
ClassPath - JavaDoc comments – String Object as Expression in Switch Statement -java.Time API- Use of
Method References
UNIT II
INHERITANCE AND POLYMORPHISM
10
Inheritance - class hierarchy - final keyword - polymorphism - dynamic binding - abstract classes - instanceof
– Interface- Lamda Expressions- Functional Interfaces - the Object class - Object Wrappers and Autoboxing Methods with variable number of Parameters - Enumeration Classes - Reflection - inner classes
UNIT III
EVENT DRIVEN PROGRAMMING
10
Introduction to Applet - Applet Life Cycle - AWT event handling in Applet - Introducing Swing - Creating a
Frame - Positioning a Frame - Displaying Information in a Component - Working with 2D Shapes - Color Fonts - Displaying Images - Basics of Event Handling - The AWT Event Hierarchy - Mouse Events - Actions Introduction to Layout Management - Swing Components: Text Input - Choice Components - Menus - Dialog
Boxes - Accessing database using JDBC - JAR file creation.
UNIT IV
EXCEPTION, GENERIC PROGRAMMING AND COLLECTION
8
Exceptions - exception hierarchy - throwing and catching exceptions - Try-with-resources Statement - Catch
Block Handling Multiple Exceptions- Stack Trace Elements - Motivation for generic programming - generic
classes - generic methods - generic code and virtual machine. Collection Framework: Collection Types Vector, Priority Queue, Hash Set- Stream Collection Types
UNIT V
CONCURRENT PROGRAMMING
8
Multi threaded programming - thread states - thread life cycle - thread properties - thread synchronization Inter thread Communication - Suspending, Resuming, and Stopping Threads - Executors - synchronizers
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
Cay S. Horstmann and Gary Cornell, “Core Java: Volume I - Fundamentals”, Sun Microsystems
Press, Ninth Edition, 2013.
52
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Rajkumar Buyya ,S. Thamarai Selvi ,Xingchen Chu “Object Oriented Programming with Java:
Essentials and Applications” Tata McGraw Hill Education 2009
2. P.J. Deitel & H.M. Deitel, “Java: How to Program Java 2”, Prentice Hall, Seventh Edition, 2011.
3. Herbert Schildt, “Java: The Complete Reference”, McGraw Hill Education, Ninth Edition, 2014.
4. K. Arnold and J. Gosling, “The JAVA programming language”, Pearson Education, Third edition,
2000.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://docs.oracle.com/javase/tutorial/java/
2. http://www.java2s.com/Tutorial/Java/CatalogJava.htm
3. http://www.javatpoint.com/java-swing
4. https://docs.oracle.com/javase/tutorial/collections/intro/
5. http://way2java.com/java-versions-2/jdk-1-8-features/
15CS502
OPERATING SYSTEMS
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To acquire basic knowledge on computer operating system structures and functioning

To study the concept of process management

To learn the basics of memory management

To understand the structure of file and I/O systems

To be familiar with some operating systems
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Identify the components of operating system and their functionalities

Analyze the various process management algorithms

Evaluate the performance of various memory management techniques

Design a simple file system and analyze the performance

Work with some popular operating systems like Linux, Windows
UNIT I
OPERATING SYSTEMS OVERVIEW
9
Introduction to operating systems - Computer system organization - architecture - Operating system structure operations - Process, memory, storage management - Protection and security - Distributed systems Computing environments - Open source operating systems - OS services - User interface - System calls System programs - Process concept - scheduling - Operations on processes - Cooperating processes - Inter
process communication - Threads
UNIT II
PROCESS MANAGEMENT
10
Scheduling criteria - Scheduling algorithms - Multiple processor scheduling - Algorithm evaluation - The critical
section problem - Synchronization hardware - Semaphores - Classic problems of synchronization - Critical
regions - Monitors - Deadlocks - Deadlock characterization - Methods for handling deadlocks - Deadlock
prevention - Deadlock avoidance - Deadlock detection and Recovery
UNIT III
MEMORY MANAGEMENT
9
Introduction - Swapping - Contiguous memory allocation - Paging - Segmentation - Segmentation with paging
- Virtual memory: Background - Demand paging - Copy on write - Page replacement - Allocation of frames Thrashing
UNIT IV
FILE AND I/O SYSTEMS
8
File concept - Access methods - Directory structure - File system mounting - Protection - Directory
53
implementation - Allocation methods - Free space management - Disk scheduling - Disk management - Swap
space management - Protection.
I/O Systems: I/O Hardware - Application I/O Interface - Kernel I/O subsystem
UNIT V
CASE STUDY
9
The Linux system: History - Design principles - Kernel modules - Process management - Scheduling - Memory
management - File systems - Input and output - Inter Process Communication - Network structure – Security.
Windows: History - Design principles – Recent Trends.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
Abraham Silberschatz, Peter B. Galvin, Greg Gagne, “Operating System Concepts Essentials”, John
th
Wiley & Sons Inc., 8 Edition, 2011
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Andrew S. Tanenbaum, “Modern Operating Systems”, Addison Wesley, Second Edition, 2001.
2.
Charles Crowley, “Operating Systems: A Design-Oriented Approach”, Tata McGraw Hill Education,
1996.
3.
D M Dhamdhere, “Operating Systems: A Concept-based Approach”, Tata McGraw-Hill Education,
Second Edition, 2007.
4.
William Stallings, “Operating Systems: Internals and Design Principles”, Prentice Hall, Seventh
Edition, 2011.
5.
Maurice J.Bach, “The Design of the UNIX Operating System”, Prentice Hall, 2004
WEB REFERENCES:
1.
www.nptel.ac.in
2.
http://cseweb.ucsd.edu/classes/fa06/cse120/lectures/120-fa06-l13.pdf
3.
http://www.cs.kent.edu/~farrell/osf03/oldnotes/
4.
http://www.microsoft.com/about/mspreview/windows8/Windows8_RP_Product_guide.pdf
15CS503
COMPUTER NETWORKS
L
T
P
C
3
0
2
4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To study layered architecture of computer networks and protocols.

To learn the various mediums used in the physical layer.

To study the functionalities of data link layer.

To learn the routing algorithms and the use of IP addressing in the network layer.

To understand the working of transport layer.

To learn to design secure network applications.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Identify the role of each layer in computer networks and its protocols.

Encode the data for transmission in wired and wireless medium

Develop scheme for error detection and correction

Select flow control algorithm at link to link level.

Evaluate the performance of various routing algorithms.

Analyze the flow control and congestion control algorithms for QoS at end to end level.

Develop secure network applications for the specified requirement.
54
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION, PHYSICAL LAYER
9+3
Overview: Data Communication - Network Types - Internet History - TCP/IP Protocol Suite - The OSI Model Digital Signals - Data rate limits - Performance - Line Coding - Block Coding - Transmission Media: Guided
Media - Unguided Media - Switching
Lab Component: Line Coding and Block Coding
UNIT II
DATA LINK LAYER
9+3
Link Layer Addressing - ARP - Error Detection and Correction - Data Link Control Services - Data Link Layer
Protocols - HDLC - PPP - Media Access Control - Ethernet - Wireless LANs: IEEE 802.11, Bluetooth Connecting Devices.
Lab Component: Framing, Error Detection and Correction.
UNIT III
NETWORK LAYER
9+3
Network layer Services - Packet switching - Performance - IPV4 addresses - Forwarding of packets Internet Protocol - ICMPV4 - Mobile IP - Routing algorithms - Routing Protocols - IPV6 addressing - IPV6
protocol -Transition from IPV4 to IPV6
Lab Component: Routing Algorithms
UNIT IV
TRANSPORT LAYER
9+3
Transport Layer Services - Protocols - UDP - TCP: Transition Diagram, Flow Control, Error Control,
Congestion Control - SCTP - QoS: Flow Control to improve QoS - Integrated Services - Differentiated
Services - Client Server Programming.
Lab Component: Client Server Programming using sockets
UNIT V
APPLICATION LAYER AND SECURITY
9+3
World Wide Web and HTTP - FTP - Electronic Mail - Telnet - Secure Shell - Domain Name System Cryptographic Algorithms - Authentication Protocols - Message Integrity Protocols - Public Key
Distribution(X.509) - Network Layer Security - Transport Layer Security - Application Layer Security Firewalls.
Lab Component: Network Application Development
L: 45 ; P: 15 ; TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
Behrouz A. Foruzan, “Data communication and Networking”, Tata McGraw-Hill, Fifth Edition, 2013
2.
Larry L. Peterson, Bruce S. Davie, “Computer Networks: A Systems Approach”, Morgan Kauffmann
Publishers Inc., Third Edition, 2003.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
James F. Kuross, Keith W. Ross, “Computer Networking, A Top-Down Approach Featuring the
Internet”, Addison Wesley, ThirdEdition,2004.
2.
Pete Loshin, “IPv6: Theory, Protocol and Practice”, ELSEVIER, Morgan Kauffmann Publishers Inc.,
Second edition, 2004
3.
William Stallings , “ Data and C o m pu t er Communication ”, Pearson Education, Sixth Edition,
2000.
4.
Andrew S. Tannenbaum, “Computer Networks”, Pearson Education, Fourth Edition, 2003
5.
D.E. Comer, “Internetworking with TCP/IP Vol- III”, (BSD Sockets Version), Pearson Education,
6.
W. Richard Stevens, “UNIX Network Programming Vol-I”, Pearson Education, Second Edition, 1998.
WEB REFERENCES:
1.
www.nptel.ac.in
2.
http://compnetworking.about.com/od/basicnetworkingconcepts/a/network_types.htm
3.
http://www.protocols.com/pbook/tcpip1.htm
55
4.
http://docs.oracle.com/cd/E23824_01/html/821-1453/ipv6-troubleshoot-2.html
5.
http://searchsecurity.techtarget.com/tip/Get-ready-for-IPv6-Five-security-issues-to-consider
15HS551
PROFESSIONAL COMMUNICATION SKILLS LAB
V Semester - for branches Civil, EEE, CSE
L
T
P
C
0
0
4
2
VI semester - for branches ECE, Mech, IT, Bio-Tech
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To enable the students of engineering and technology attain effective professional communication
skills

To train the aspirants to get through interviews successfully

To make them successful corporates

To upgrade the language proficiency level of engineering students
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Students of Engineering and technology will be able to

Attain effective communication skills

Enhance business communication

Acquire language proficiency

Face interviews
VOCABULARY BUILDING
9
Synonyms & antonyms, grammar: error spotting exercise, listening exercise, reading comprehension
exercises, sequencing the jumbled sentences, cloze test
BUSINESS CORRESPONDENCE
9
Report Writing: types of Reports - Project report - report format, Preparation of a report based on the
newspaper article. Writing memos, notice, agenda and circular.
GROUP DISCUSSION
9
Group Discussion - an introduction, Sample videos on GD and appraisal, Participation in Group Discussion Persuasive skills, Negotiating ability, team skills and leadership Quality.
INTERVIEW SKILLS AND SOFT SKILLS
9
Resume designing, Online Resume, Successful interview skills, mock interviews, and Motivation - self-image goal setting - managing changes - corporate etiquette, body language, and power dressing - time
management - stress management, Career and life planning.
THEATRE ART AND AN INTRODUCTION TO INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
9
Master of Ceremony, Welcome Address, Role play activities, dramatics, An Introduction to International
English Language Testing System (IELTS) - Test of English as a Foreign Language (TOEFL), Cambridge
Advanced English(CAE) - Graduate Record Examination (GRE) - Civil Service (Language related)
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Berry, Thomas Elliott, “Most Common Mistakes in English Usage”, TMH Publication Company
Limited, 2012.
2.
Thorpe,E and Heaton,S., “Objective English”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, II Edition,
2007.
3.
Bhatnagar, R.P., “English for Competitive Examination”, Macmillan, 3 edition, 2012.
4.
Bhatnagar, R.P., NITINBhatnagar and Mamta, “Communicative English for Engineers &
Professionals”, Pearson Education, 2010.
5.
Rizvi, Asharaf M., “Effective Technical Communication”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company
Limited, 2007
rd
56
15CS551
JAVA LABORATORY
L
T
P
C
0
0
4
2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To practice implementing Object Oriented Concepts, Package creation in Java using appropriate
coding standards

To practice to design GUI based application using Swing components.

To practice writing generic programs and collection classes in Java

To explore exception handling techniques.

To practice concurrency programming
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Write JAVA programs with proper coding standards.

Develop a GUI based application using Java swing components.

Develop application to handle generic data.

Use collection classes in Java programs

Write robust programs using exception handling techniques

Develop multithreaded applications
1.
Simple Java program with JavaDoc comments
2.
Programs using packages and classes, JAR file creation
3.
Programs using inheritance and dynamic polymorphism
4.
Programs using Interface and exception handling
5.
Programs using GDI
6.
Event driven windows based application in Java
7.
Programs using generics
8.
Program to demonstrate the use of Collection Classes
9.
Database Connectivity using JDBC
10. Multithreaded application
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
Cay S. Horstmann and Gary Cornell, “Core Java: Volume I - Fundamentals”, Sun Microsystems
Press, Ninth Edition, 2013.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. P.J. Deitel & H.M. Deitel, “Java: How to Program Java 2”, Prentice Hall, Seventh Edition, 2011.
2. Herbert Schildt, “Java: The Complete Reference”, McGraw Hill Education, Ninth Edition, 2014.
15CS552
OPERATING SYSTEM LABORATORY
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To learn file and process related system calls

To practice on the process scheduling algorithms

To learn to write programs for process synchronization using semaphores.

To experiment with IPC system calls
57
L
T
P
C
0
0
4
2

To practice memory allocation and disk scheduling algorithms
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Work with file related System calls

Create and manage processes

Implement various CPU scheduling algorithms

Write code for IPC with synchronization

Implement memory allocation, file allocation algorithms

Work with page replacement and disk scheduling algorithms
1. Implementation of basic Linux system commands
2. Process creation and management
3. Performing inter process communication
4. Simulation of CPU scheduling
5. Solving Producer-Consumer problems using semaphores.
6. Implementation of deadlock avoidance algorithms
7. Implementation of contiguous and non contiguous memory allocation algorithms
8. Implementation of Page replacement algorithms
9. Implementation of file allocation algorithms
10. Simulation of disk scheduling algorithms
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
Abraham Silberschatz, Peter B. Galvin, Greg Gagne, “Operating System Concepts Essentials”, John
th
Wiley & Sons Inc., 8 Edition, 2011
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Andrew S. Tanenbaum, “Modern Operating Systems”, Addison Wesley, Second Edition, 2001.
2.
Charles Crowley, “Operating Systems: A Design-Oriented Approach”, Tata McGraw Hill Education,
1996.
3.
D M Dhamdhere, “Operating Systems: A Concept-based Approach”, Tata McGraw-Hill Education,
4.
William Stallings, “Operating Systems: Internals and Design Principles”, Prentice Hall, Seventh
Edition, 2011.
SEMESTER - VI
15CS601
SYSTEM SOFTWARE AND COMPILER DESIGN
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To understand the internals of system software like assemblers, linkers , loaders

To learn to design a lexical analyzer

To learn to design and implement a parser

To understand storage management

To study the various intermediate code representations

To understand the code optimization techniques
58
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3

To learn to generate the machine code
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Explore the internals of assemblers, linkers, loaders

Design a lexical analyzer

Design a parser

Choose the right storage structure for the language constructs

Select the appropriate intermediate code

Apply the suitable optimization techniques

Generate the machine code for simple language constructs
UNITI
SYSTEM SOFTWARE
10
Definition - SIC and SIC/XE machine architecture - basic assembler functions - algorithm and data structures one-pass assembler - multi-pass assembler - basic loader functions - machine dependent loader features
UNITII
LEXICAL ANALYSIS
9
Introduction: process of compilation - phases of compiler - grouping of phases - cousins of compiler - compiler
construction tools
Lexical Analyzer: role of the lexical analyzer - Input buffering - specification of tokens - recognition of tokens language for specifying lexical analyzer
UNITIII
SYNTAX ANALYSIS AND RUN-TIME ENVIRONMENTS
9
Need and role of the parser - Context Free Grammars - top down parsing - Recursive descent parser Predictive parser - bottom up parsing - shift reduce parser - LR parsers - Construction of SLR, CLR and LALR
parsing table - syntax analyzer generators
Run-time environments: Source language issues-Storage organization - Stack allocation space - Access to
non-local data on the stack - Heap management
UNITIV
INTERMEDIATE CODE GENERATION
8
Syntax directed definitions - construction of syntax tree - intermediate languages - declarations - assignment
statements - type systems- specification of a simple type checker - arithmetic expression evaluation in
assignment statements - Boolean expressions - case statements - back patching- procedure calls
UNITV
CODE OPTIMIZATION AND CODE GENERATION
9
Code Optimization: Principal sources of optimization - DAG - optimization of basic blocks - global data flow
analysis
Code Generation: issues in design of a code generator – a simple code generator algorithm - register
allocation and assignment - generating code from DAGs.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
Alfred V. Aho, Monica S.Lam, Ravi Sethi, Jeffrey D.Ullman, “Compilers: Principles, Techniques and
Tools”, Pearson Education, 2008.
2.
K.Muneeswaran, “Compiler Design”, Oxford University Press, 2013
3.
Leland L. Beck and D. Manjula, “System Software - An Introduction to Systems Programming”,
Pearson Education Asia, 3rd Edition, 2009.(For Unit I)
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
David Galles, “Modern Compiler Design”, Pearson Education Asia, 2007
2.
Steven S. Muchnick, “Advanced Compiler Design and Implementation”, Morgan Kaufmann
Publishers, 2000.
3.
C. N. Fisher and R. J. LeBlanc, “Crafting a Compiler with C”, Pearson Education, 2000.
4.
V. Raghavan, “Principles of Compiler Design”, Tata McGraw Hill Education Publishers, 2010.
59
5.
Allen I. Holub, “Compiler Design in C”, Prentice-Hall software series, 1993
WEB REFERENCES:
1.
www.nptel.ac.in
2.
http://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical-engineering-and-computer-science/6-035-computer-languageengineering-spring-2010/
3.
http://infolab.stanford.edu/~ullman/dragon.html
4.
http://dinosaur.compilertools.net/
5.
http://www.onesmartclick.com/engineering/compiler-design.html
15CS602
PRINCIPLES OF DISTRIBUTED SYSTEMS
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To introduce distributed system principles.

To study the various communication models in distributed systems.

To gain knowledge about peer to peer services.

To understand distributed file systems.

To study synchronization and replication techniques.

To study the resource management techniques.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Identify the elements of distributed system.

Compare the pros and cons of various communication models.

Address the issues in peer to peer services.

Explore distributed file systems.

Analyze synchronization and replication algorithms.

Explore distributed scheduling algorithms
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
8
Introduction – Examples of Distributed Systems–Trends in Distributed Systems – Focus on resource sharing –
Challenges - World Wide Web - System Models – Physical Models - Architectural models - Fundamental
Models.
UNIT II
COMMUNICATION IN DISTRIBUTED SYSTEM
9
Inter process Communication – the API for the internet protocols – External data representation - Multicast
communication - Network virtualization: Overlay networks. MPI - Request-reply protocols – Remote procedure
call. Distributed Objects: Java RMI – Group communication – Publish-subscribe systems – Message queues
– Shared memory approaches- From Objects to components: Enterprise Java beans
UNIT III
PEER TO PEER SYSTEMS AND DISTRIBUTED FILE SYSTEMS
9
Introduction – Napster and its legacy – Peer-to-peer Middleware – Routing overlays - Overlay case studies:
Pastry, Tapestry. Distributed File Systems – File service architecture – Sun Network File System - Andrew File
system – Name Services and Domain Name System – Directory Services – Case Studies: The Global Name
System, X.500 Directory Service.
UNIT IV
SYNCHRONIZATION AND FAULT TOLERANCE
10
Introduction – Clocks, events and process states – Synchronizing physical clocks- Logical time and logical
clocks – Global states – Coordination and Agreement – Distributed mutual exclusion – Elections –
Transactions -Nested transactions – Locks – Optimistic concurrency control – Timestamp ordering – Atomic
60
Commit protocols –concurrency control in distributed systems- Distributed deadlocks. – Replication – Case
study: Coda
UNIT V
RESOURCE AND PROCESS MANAGEMENT
9
Resource Management: Desirable Features of a Good Global Scheduling Algorithm –Task Assignment
Approach – Load Balancing Approach – Load Sharing Approach – Process Management: Process Migration Threads
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
George Coulouris, Jean Dollimore and Tim Kindberg, “Distributed Systems Concepts and Design”,
Fifth Edition, Pearson Education, 2012.
2.
Pradeep K Sinha, “Distributed Operating Systems: Concepts and Design”, Prentice Hall of India,
2007. (Unit V)
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Tanenbaum A.S., Van Steen M., “Distributed Systems: Principles and Paradigms”, Pearson
Education, 2007.
2.
Liu M.L., “Distributed Computing, Principles and Applications”, Pearson Education, 2004.
3.
Nancy A Lynch, “Distributed Algorithms”, Morgan Kaufman Publishers, USA, 2003.
4.
Mukesh Singhal and Niranjan G. Shivaratri, “Advanced Concepts in Operating Systems – Distributed,
Database, and Multiprocessor Operating Systems”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2001.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://deneb.cs.kent.edu/~mikhail/classes/aos.f02/
2. http://www.coda.cs.cmu.edu/ljpaper/lj.html
3. http://www.windowsnetworking.com/articles_tutorials/Windows2003-Distributed-File-System.html
4. http://www.developers.net/intelisnshowcase/view/758
5. http://csi-india.org/resource-scheduling-real-time-database-systems-operating-system-perspective
15IT602
OBJECT ORIENTED ANALYSIS AND DESIGN
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To gain basic knowledge in object oriented system.

To study the software design process.

To assess the unified process and Unified Modeling Language

To gain basic OO analysis and design skills through an elaborate case study

To learn the appropriate usage of design patterns
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Create use case documents that capture requirements for a software system.

Create class diagrams that model both the domain model and design model of a software system.

Create interaction diagrams that model the dynamic aspects of a software system.

Apply UML tools to address the real world problems with software solutions

Apply design patterns that facilitate development and evolution of new models
UNIT I
9
INTRODUCTION
Basics of Object Oriented Concepts - Introduction to OOAD - UML - Unified Process(UP) phases - Agile
modeling and UP – Agile Business modeling - Case study – the NextGen POS system
61
UNIT II
9
INCEPTION AND STATIC MODELING
Inception - Use case Modeling - Relating Use cases – include, extend and generalization - Elaboration Domain Models - Finding conceptual classes and description classes – Associations – Attributes – Domain
model refinement – Finding conceptual class hierarchies - Aggregation and Composition - UML activity
diagrams and modeling
UNIT III
9
DYNAMIC MODELING
System sequence diagrams – Communication diagrams - Relationship between sequence diagrams and use
cases - Logical architecture and UML package diagram – Logical architecture refinement - UML class
diagrams – relationship – inheritance – Abstract classes – polymorphism - Operation contracts
UNIT IV
9
DESIGN PATTERNS
Object Oriented Design Methodology – Common base class - GRASP: Designing objects with responsibilities
– Patterns – Creator – Information expert – Low Coupling – Controller – High Cohesion – Designing for
visibility - Applying GoF design patterns – adapter – singleton – factory -strategy – composite - facade observer patterns
UNIT V
9
IMPLEMENTATION AND APPLICATION
Mapping design to code – Test driven development – Refactoring – UML tools and UML as blueprint - UML
state machine diagrams and modeling - UML deployment and component diagrams – Adopting Agile
modeling on an UP project
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
Craig Larman,"Applying UML and Patterns: An Introduction to object- oriented Analysis and
Design and iterative development”, Third Edition, Pearson Education, 2012
2.
Scott Ambler, “Agile Modeling: Effective Practices for eXtreme Programming and the
Unified Process”, Wiley Computer Publishing, 2002
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Mike O’Docherty, “Object-Oriented Analysis & Design:
Development with UML 2.0”, John Wiley & Sons, 2005.
2.
James W- Cooper, Addison-Wesley, “Java Design Patterns – A Tutorial”, 2000.
3.
Micheal Blaha, James Rambaugh, “Object-Oriented Modeling and Design with UML”, Second
Edition, Prentice Hall of India Private Limited, 2007
4.
Erich Gamma, Richard Helm, Ralph Johnson, John Vlissides, “Design patterns: Elements of
Reusable object-oriented software”, Addison-Wesley, 1995.
Understanding
WEB REFERENCES:
1.
http://codecourse.sourceforge.net/materials/The-Waterfall-Lifecycle-Model.html
2.
http://www.eclipse.org/proposals/beacon/Basic%20Unified%20Process.pdf
3.
http://www.agilemodeling.com/
4.
http://www.uml.org/
5.
http://www.uml-diagrams.org/package-diagrams-examples.html
6.
http://www.tutorialspoint.com/uml/uml_interaction_diagram.htm
7.
http://faculty.inverhills.edu/dlevitt/CS%202000%20(FP)/GRASP%20Patterns.pdf
8.
http://www.gofpatterns.com/
9.
http://www.objectmentor.com/resources/articles/umlfsm.pdf
10.
http://www.agilemodeling.com/essays/umlDiagrams.htm
62
System
15CS651
SYSTEM SOFTWARE AND COMPILER LABORATORY
L
T
P
C
0
0
4
2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To practice to design and implement an assembler

To gain skills in using compiler writing tools.

To practice to implement the different Phases of compiler in a simpler form

To practice to apply simple optimization techniques
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Design and implement an assembler

Use compiler writing tools

Implement the different Phases of compiler

Optimize the code

Generate an assembly language program for the source code
1.
Implementation of Symbol Table
2.
Implement first pass of a two pass assembler
3.
Implement second pass of a two pass assembler
4.
Develop a lexical analyzer to recognize a few patterns in C. (Ex. identifiers, constants, comments,
operators etc.) using LEX.
5.
Generate a parser for recognizing assignment statements with operators like +, - , * and / and
operands like identifiers and constants using YACC
6.
Generate three address code and store them as quadruples for assignment statements with
operators like +, - , * and / and operands like identifiers and constants using YACC
7.
Implement a type checker
8.
Construct a DAG for the given quadruples generated in experiment 6
9.
Implementation of Simple Code Optimization Techniques like Constant Folding etc.
10. Implement the back end of the compiler which takes the DAG and produces the 8086 assembly
language instructions that can be assembled and run using a 8086 assembler. The target assembly
instructions can be simple move, add, sub, jump.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Alfred V. Aho, Monica S.Lam, Ravi Sethi, Jeffrey D.Ullman, “Compilers: Principles, Techniques and
Tools”, Pearson Education, 2008.
2.
K.Muneeswaran, “Compiler Design”, Oxford University Press, 2013.
3.
Leland L. Beck and D.Manjula, “System Software - An Introduction to Systems Programming”,
Pearson Education Asia, 3rd Edition, 2009.
4.
John R. Levine, Tony mason & Doug brown, “UNIX Programming Tools - lex & yacc”, O’Reilly.
63
15IT652
OBJECT ORIENTED ANALYSIS AND DESIGN LAB
L
T
P
C
0
0
4
2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To highlight the importance of object-oriented analysis and design and its limitations.

To show how we apply the process of object-oriented analysis and design to software development.

To point out the importance and function of each UML model throughout the process of objectoriented analysis and design and explaining the notation of various elements in these models.

To provide the necessary knowledge and skills in using object-oriented CASE tools.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Construct various UML models for projects

Implement forward and reverse engineering

Perform testing for simple applications
LIST OF EXERCISES
1.
Identify a problem and prepare Statement of Work.
2.
Develop an IEEE standard SRS document. Also develop project plan (Gantt chart).
3.
Identify Use Cases and develop functional model (Functional Requirement Specification).
4.
Identify the business activities and develop an UML Activity diagram.
5.
Identity the conceptual classes and develop a domain model and UML Class diagram.
6.
Using the identified scenarios find the interaction between objects and represent them using UML
Interaction diagrams.
7.
Draw the State Chart diagram.
8.
Identify the User Interface, Domain objects, and Technical services(Code generation)
9.
Draw Component and Deployment diagrams.
10.
Perform testing for software projects
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
SEMESTER - VII
15CS701
COMPUTER GRAPHICS
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To learn the primitives and clipping methods and to explore object construction using primitives.

To apply transformations and texture on the object

To motivate the students to create the 3-D scenes by adding lighting and shades to the objects in the
scene.

To enable the students to perform modeling

To have in-depth idea about advanced rendering.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Rasterize and clip the primitives

Construct geometric Objects

Apply transformations and texture on the object

Perform viewing, lighting and Shading

Apply hierarchical modeling and procedural methods

Apply advanced rendering techniques
64
UNIT I
RASTERIZATION AND GEOMETRIC OBJECTS
11
Bresenham’s Line drawing Algorithm - Clipping - Line-Segment Clipping - Cohen-Sutherland Clipping - LiangBarsky Clipping - Polygon Clipping - Rasterization - Polygon Rasterization - Hidden-Surface Removal Antialiasing -The Sierpinski Gasket - Programming Two-Dimensional Applications – Graphics programming
standards: OpenGL, WebGL – WebGL Application Programming Interface - Primitives and Attributes - Color Viewing - Scalars, Points, and Vectors - Three-Dimensional Primitives - Coordinate Systems and Frames Frames in WebGL - Matrix and Vector Types - Modeling a Colored Cube
UNIT II
TRANSFORMATIONS AND TEXTURE
9
Affine Transformations - Translation, Rotation, and Scaling of 2D and 3D Objects - Transformations in
Homogeneous Coordinates - Concatenation of Transformations - Transformation Matrices in WebGL - Buffers
- Digital Images - Mapping Methods - Two-Dimensional Texture Mapping- Texture Mapping in WebGL Texture Generation - Environment Maps - Reflection Map Example - Bump Mapping
UNIT III
VIEWING, LIGHTING AND SHADING
9
Parallel Projections - Perspective Projections - Perspective Projections with WebGL - Perspective Projection
Matrices - Hidden-Surface Removal - Light and Matter - Light Sources - The Phong Reflection Model Computation of Vectors - Polygonal Shading - Approximation of a Sphere by Recursive Subdivision Specifying Lighting Parameters - Implementing a Lighting Model - Shading of the Sphere Model
UNIT IV
HIERARCHICAL MODELING AND PROCEDURAL METHODS
8
Symbols and Instances - Hierarchical Models - A Robot Arm -Trees and Traversal - Use of Tree Data
Structures -Animation - Graphical Objects - Scene Graphs - Implementing Scene Graphs - Other Tree
Structures - Language - Based Models - Recursive Methods and Fractals - Procedural Noise
UNIT V
ADVANCED RENDERING
8
Going Beyond Pipeline Rendering - Ray Tracing - Building a Simple Ray Tracer - The Rendering Equation Radiosity - Global Illumination and Path Tracing - RenderMan - Parallel Rendering - Hardware GPU
Implementations - Implicit Functions and Contour Maps - Volume Rendering - Isosurfaces and Marching
Cubes - Marching Tetrahedra - Mesh Simplification - Direct Volume Rendering - Image-Based Rendering
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
Edward Angel, Dave Shreiner, “Interactive Computer Graphics: A Top Down Approach with
WebGL”, Pearson Education, Seventh Edition, 2015
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Kouichi Matsuda, Rodger Lea, “WebGL Programming Guide: Interactive 3D Graphics Programming
with WebGL”, Pearson Education, 2013
2.
Patrick Cozzi, “WebGL Insights“, CRC Press
3.
Donald D. Hearn, M. Pauline Baker and Warren Carithers, “Computer Graphics with OpenGL”,
Pearson Education, Fourth Edition, 2010.
4.
James D. Foley, Andries Van Dam, Steven K. Feiner, John F. Hughes, “Computer Graphics
Principles and Practice in C”, Pearson Education, Second Edition, 2007.
5.
F .S. Hill, “Computer Graphics using OPENGL”, Pearson Education, Second Edition, 2003.
WEB REFERENCES:
1.
https://webglfundamentals.org/
2.
learningwebgl.com/
3.
https://www.khronos.org/webgl/
4.
https://www.chromeexperiments.com/webgl
65
15CS702
COMPUTATIONAL INTELLIGENCE
L
T
P
C
3
0
2
4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To learn the concepts of computational intelligence for solving problems

To understand the representation of knowledge and reasoning mechanisms

To learn to construct plans of actions

To study network models used for reasoning in uncertainty

To introduce models that learn from samples of data
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Formulate a problem and find the solution using searching techniques

Use the knowledge and the process of inference to derive new facts

Represent planning problems and find the sequence of actions to achieve goals

Build network models to reason under uncertainty

Design and apply Learning models
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Introduction - Intelligent agents - Problem Solving: Solving problems by searching - Problem solving Agents Example Problems - Searching for solutions - Uninformed search strategies - Informed search strategies:
Greedy best first search, A* search - Memory bounded Heuristic search - Heuristic functions
UNIT II
KNOWLEDGE AND REASONING
9
Logic Agents: Knowledge based agents - Wumpus world - Logic - Propositional logic - Syntax and Semantic of
FOL - Using FOL - Propositional vs First order inference - Unification and Lifting - Forward chaining Backward chaining - Resolution
UNIT III
PLANNING
9
Classical Planning: Definitions - Examples - Algorithms for Planning as state space search - Planning graphs Planning and acting in the real world: Time, Schedule and Resources - Hierarchical planning - Planning and
acting in Non deterministic domain - Multi agent planning
UNIT IV
UNCERTAIN KNOWLEDGE AND REASONING
9
Quantifying Uncertainty - Acting under Uncertainty - Basic probability notation - Inference using Full joint
distribution - Independence - Bayes rule - Probabilistic Reasoning - Semantics of Bayesian networks Bayesian nets with continuous variable - Exact inference in Bayesian networks
UNIT V
LEARNING
9
Forms of learning - Supervised learning - Learning decision trees - Artificial neural networks - Ensemble
learning - Case study: Handwritten digit recognition
Lab Component: Working with Searching, Reasoning and Learning Algorithms
15
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
Stuart Russell, Peter Norvig, "Artificial Intelligence: A Modern Approach", Pearson education, Third
edition, 2014
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Nils.J.Nilsson, "Artificial Intelligence: A new synthesis", Elsevier, July 2003
2.
AndriesP.Engelbrecht, "Computational Intelligence: An Introduction", John Wiley & Sons, 2nd edition,
2007
3.
John Fulcher, L.C. Jain, “Computational Intelligence: A Compendium, Studies in Computational
Intelligence”, Vol.115, Springer,2008
66
WEB REFERENCES:
1.
http://www.formal.stanford.edu/jmc/whatisai/
2.
http://www.sciencedaily.com/news/computers_math/artificial_intelligence/
3.
NPTEL course material
15CS751
COMPUTER GRAPHICS LABORATORY
L
T
P
C
0
0
4
2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To practice drawing various 2D and 3D objects and perform transformations and clipping operations

To practice to create a graphics scene using WebGL and perform Viewing, shading, lighting and
texture mapping

To practice to create images using Procedural methods in WebGL
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Draw various 2D and 3D Objects and perform various transformations and Clipping

Create realistic scenes

Draw Complex Image Using Iterated Functions and various Procedural methods
1.
Code Bresenham’s line drawing algorithm.
2.
Implement line and Polygon clipping algorithms
3.
Draw the various 2D and 3D shapes using existing API
4.
Perform Transformations
5.
Apply Composite Transformations
6.
Apply texture mapping
7.
Draw 3D scene with various light and material properties
8.
Build a scene graph
9.
Generate Fractal images.
10. Construct complex objects using CSG
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Edward Angel, Dave Shreiner, “Interactive Computer Graphics: A Top Down Approach with WebGL”,
Pearson Education, Seventh Edition, 2015
2.
Kouichi Matsuda, Rodger Lea, “WebGL Programming Guide: Interactive 3D Graphics Programming
with WebGL”, Pearson Education, 2013
3.
Patrick Cozzi, “WebGL Insights“, CRC Press
4.
Donald D. Hearn, M. Pauline Baker and Warren Carithers, “Computer Graphics with OpenGL”,
Pearson Education, Fourth Edition, 2010.
5.
James D. Foley, Andries Van Dam, Steven K. Feiner, John F. Hughes, “Computer Graphics
Principles and Practice in C”, Pearson Education, Second Edition, 2007.
6.
F .S. Hill, “Computer Graphics using OPENGL”, Pearson Education, Second Edition, 2003.
67
15CS752
SOFTWARE APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT LABORATORY
L
T
P
C
0
0
4
2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To give an exposure on real world application project development

To practice developing a Desktop or Web based or Mobile based application

To understand and practice the various phases in developing an application

To practice the use of Configuration Management

To understand the issues in deploying the product
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Develop a Desktop or Web based or Mobile based application

Develop project plan

Complete and come out with artifacts related to
o
Project Problem Formulation
o
Planning a project
o
Requirements
o
Test case Design
o
Design
o
Coding and Unit Testing
o
Testing
o
Deployment

Use Configuration Management System and work break down structure

Complete an inquiry
PROJECT DEVELOPMENT GUIDELINES
The students have to select an application which could be a Desktop Application, Web based application,
Mobile based application, cross platform or universal application. It is preferred to have the application to
either address a social issue or bring out an element of innovation, or demonstrate use of latest technological
trends. After fixing the application, they have to complete the following:
1.
The Problem Statement
2.
Project Proposal consisting of
3.
a.
Project Title
b.
Project Description
c.
Objectives
d.
Team Members
e.
Customer
f.
Direct & Indirect Users
g.
Scope
h.
Proposed Technology for development / deployment
i.
Rationale behind the project (innovation, new technology, Proof of concept, etc)
j.
Approximate effort / cost estimate with rationale
Complete the Project Plan activity and develop a project plan with
a.
Version Number and Date
b.
Modification History
c.
Detailed Project Description
d.
Scope of the project
e.
Key Deliverables and Success Criteria
68
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
f.
Estimation
g.
Schedule and Work Breakdown structure
h.
SDLC
i.
Project Tracking - Milestones
j.
Risk Management
k.
Configuration Management Plan
l.
Quality Assurance - Reviews and audits
Work on Software Requirements and write an SRS which has
a.
b.
c.
Detailed Project Description
d.
Hardware Requirements
e.
Assumptions, constraints and dependencies
f.
Users and Use case Diagram
g.
Functional Requirements
h.
Non-Functional Requirements
Prepare a Test Case Design with
a.
b.
c.
Equivalence Partitioning
d.
Boundary Value Analysis
e.
Test Cases
Complete the Software Design showing
a.
b.
c.
Architecture
d.
UI Design
e.
Business Logic
f.
Database Design
Perform Coding and Unit Testing with
a.
Code as per coding guidelines
b.
Unit test report
Testing which includes
a.
Interface Testing
b.
System testing
c.
Acceptance testing
Deployment
a.
Release Document
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Books related to software engineering and domain of interest.
69
CORE ELECTIVE - I (for Semester V)
15CSC01
PARALLEL COMPUTING ARCHITECTURE
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To learn the different ways of exploiting Instruction Level Parallelism

To study vector architecture and GPU architecture.

To understand the different multiprocessor architectures and memory consistency models.

To learn the architecture, issues and working of warehouse scale computers.

To study multicore architecture and their design issues.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Explore Instruction Level Parallelism

Analyze the architecture of Vector, SIMD and GPU architecture.

Compare the cache coherence protocols for symmetric and distributed memory multiprocessor
systems.

Analyze the issues in warehouse scale computing.

Compare various multicore processor architectures.
PREREQUISITES:
Basic Computer Architecture
UNIT I
INSTRUCTION LEVEL PARALLELISM
9
Classes of computers - Trends in technology, power, energy and cost - Dependability - Measuring, Reporting
and summarizing performance - Quantitative principles of computer design - Classes of parallelism.
ILP: Concepts and challenges - Basic compiler techniques for exposing ILP - Branch prediction - Dynamic
scheduling - Hardware based Speculation - Multiple issue, static and dynamic scheduling - Limitations of ILP
UNIT II
VECTOR, SIMD AND GPU ARCHITECTURES
9
Vector architecture - SIMD instruction set extensions for multimedia - Graphics processing units - Detecting
and enhancing loop level parallelism - Case studies.
UNIT III
MULTIPROCESSOR ARCHITECTURE
9
Multiprocessor architecture: Issues and approaches - Centralized shared memory architecture Multiprocessor cache coherence - Snooping cache coherence protocols - Limitations - Distributed shared
memory - Directory based cache coherence protocols - Performance issues - Synchronization - Models of
memory consistency.
UNIT IV
WAREHOUSE-SCALE ARCHITECTURES
9
Programming models and workloads for Warehouse-Scale computers - Architectures for Warehouse-Scale
computing - Physical infrastructure and costs - Cloud computing - Case studies.
UNIT V
MULTICORE ARCHITECTURES
9
Software and hardware multithreading - SMT and CMP architectures - Design issues - Case studies: Intel
multicore architecture - SUN CMP architecture - Heterogeneous multicore processors - Case study: IBM cell
processor.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
John L. Hennessey and David A. Patterson, “Computer architecture - A quantitative approach”,
Morgan Kaufmann / Elsevier Publishers, 5th edition, 2012.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
David E. Culler, Jaswinder Pal Singh, “Parallel computing architecture: A hardware/software
70
approach”, Morgan Kaufmann /Elsevier Publishers, 1999.
2.
Kai Hwang and Zhi Wei Xu, “Scalable Parallel Computing”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2003.
3.
Kai Hwang, “Advanced Computer Architecture”, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2003
4.
Richard Y. Kain, “Advanced Computer Architecture a Systems Design Approach”, Prentice Hall,
2011.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://docs.nvidia.com/cuda/cuda-c-programming-guide/
2. http://www.cs.cmu.edu/~fp/courses/15213-s07/lectures/27-multicore.pdf
3. http://rolfed.com/nehalem/nehalemPaper.pdf
15CSC02
EMBEDDED SYSTEM DEVELOPMENT
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To learn the architecture and programming of ARM processor.

To be familiar with the design of embedded computing platform

To be exposed to the basic concepts of real time Operating system.

To learn the design techniques for embedded systems

To know the design and issues of sample embedded systems
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Write simple programs for ARM processor.

Explore embedded computing platform.

Differentiate between the general purpose operating system and the real time operating system

Design and develop embedded systems

Model real-time applications using embedded system concepts
PREREQUISITES:
Microprocessors and Microcontrollers, Programming Concepts
UNIT I
EMBEDDED COMPUTING WITH ARM PROCESSORS
9
Complex systems and micro processors- Embedded system design process - Instruction sets - ARM
Processor - CPU: programming input and output- supervisor mode, exceptions and traps - Co-processorsMemory system mechanisms - CPU performance - CPU power consumption.
UNIT II
DESIGN OF EMBEDDED COMPUTING PLATFORM
9
The CPU Bus - Memory devices and systems - Designing with computing platforms - consumer electronics
architecture - platform-level performance analysis - Components for embedded programs - Models of
programs - Assembly, linking and loading - compilation techniques - Program level performance analysis Software performance optimization - Program level energy and power analysis and optimization Analysis and optimization of program size - Program validation and testing.
UNIT III
EMBEDDED OPERATING SYSTEMS
9
Introduction - Multiple tasks and multiple processes - Multirate systems - Preemptive real-time operating
systems - Priority based scheduling - Interprocess communication mechanisms - Evaluating operating system
performance - power optimization strategies for processes - Example Real time operating systems - POSIX Windows CE
UNIT IV
EMBEDDED SYSTEM DESIGN TECHNIQUES
9
Design methodologies - Design flows - Requirement Analysis - Specifications - System analysis and
architecture design - Quality Assurance techniques - Distributed embedded systems - MPSoCs and shared
memory multiprocessors
71
UNIT V
CASE STUDIES
9
Data compressor - Alarm Clock - Audio player - Software modem - Digital still camera - Telephone answering
machine - Engine control unit - Video accelerator.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
Marilyn Wolf, “Computers as Components - Principles of Embedded Computing System Design”,
Morgan Kaufmann Publisher (An imprint from Elsevier), Third Edition, 2012.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Jonathan W.Valvano, “Embedded Microcomputer Systems Real Time Interfacing”, Cengage
Learning, Third Edition, 2012.
2.
David. E. Simon, “An Embedded Software Primer”, Addison-Wesley Professional, 1st Edition, Fifth
Impression, 2007.
3.
Sriram V Iyer, Pankaj Gupta, “Embedded Real Time Systems Programming”, Tata Mc Graw Hill,
2004
4.
Raymond J.A. Buhr, Donald L.Bailey, “An Introduction to Real-Time Systems- From Design to
Networking with C/C++”, Prentice Hall, 1999.
WEB REFERENCES:
1.
www.mit.edu/courses/
2.
www.nptel.ac.in
15CSC03
INTRODUCTION TO DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To study the basic concepts of signals and systems.

To be familiar with frequency transforms.

To learn to design IIR filter.

To learn to design FIR filter.

To learn to apply DSP techniques in real world problems
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Work with the basic concepts of Signals and Systems

Apply frequency transformation techniques in DT System

Design IIR filter using several mapping techniques

Design FIR filter using window and frequency sampling techniques

Explore applications of DSP techniques
PREREQUISITES:
Laplace Transform, Basic Knowledge of Filters
UNIT I
SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS
10
Basic elements of DSP - Concepts of frequency in analog and digital signals - Sampling theorem - Discrete
time signals and systems - Analysis of discrete time LTI systems - Z transform properties - Convolution Correlation.
UNIT II
FREQUENCY TRANSFORMATIONS
9
Introduction to DFT - Properties of DFT - Circular convolution - Filtering methods based on DFT - FFT
Algorithms - Decimation in time algorithms - Decimation in frequency algorithms - Use of FFT in linear filtering
-DCT
72
UNIT III
IIR FILTER DESIGN
9
Structures of IIR - Analog filter design - Discrete time IIR filter from analog filter - IIR filter design by impulse
invariance - Bilinear transformation - Approximation of derivatives - Filter design (LPF, HPF, BPF, BRF) using
frequency translation
UNIT IV
FIR FILTER DESIGN
9
Structures of FIR - Linear phase FIR filter - Filter design using windowing techniques (Rectangular Window,
Hamming Window, and Hanning Window) - Frequency sampling techniques - Finite word length effects in
digital Filters: Errors - Limit Cycle.
UNIT V
APPLICATIONS
8
Multirate signal processing: Decimation - Interpolation - Sampling rate conversion by a rational factor Adaptive Filters: Introduction - Applications of adaptive filtering to equalization - Echo cancellation Interference cancellation - Speech recognition systems - Speech synthesis systems
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
John G. Proakis & Dimitris G.Manolakis, “Digital Signal Processing - Principles, Algorithms and
Applications”, Pearson education / Prentice Hall, Fourth edition, 2007
2.
Emmanuel C.Ifeachor, & Barrie.W.Jervis, “Digital Signal Processing”, Pearson Education Prentice
Hall, Second edition, 2002
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Alan V.Oppenheim, Ronald W. Schafer & Hohn. R.Back, “Discrete Time Signal Processing”, Pearson
Education, Second Edition,2005.
2.
Andreas Antoniou, “Digital Signal Processing”, Tata McGraw Hill,2001.
3.
Nagoor Kani A, “Digital Signal Processing” , Tata McGraw Hill, Second Edition, 2012.
4.
Sanjit K Mitra, “Digital Signal Processing”, Tata McGraw Hill, Third Edition,2006
5.
Rafeal C. Gonzalez, Richard E. Woods, “Digital Image Processing”, Pearson Education, First Edition
WEB REFERENCES:
1.
http://ocw.mit.edu/resources/res-6-008-digital-signal-processing-spring-2011/
2.
www.nptel.ac.in
3.
http://www.alwayslearn.com/dft%20and%20fft%20tutorial/DFTandFFT_FFT_Overview.html
15CSC04
WEB PROGRAMMING
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To learn to design web pages using HTML5

To gain knowledge on creating interactive web pages using JavaScript, jQuery

To know to use Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) and DOM.

To study different technologies related to XML

To learn to develop server side scripting using PHP

To learn to develop web services using AJAX
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Develop website using HTML5

Create interactive web pages using JavaScript, jQuery

Design interesting and appealing pages using CSS

Access and process various elements of web page using DOM
73
L
T
P
C
2
0
2
3

Represent web data using XML and perform translation using XSLT

Develop server side code using PHP.

Create, describe, publish and consume the Web Services using AJAX
PREREQUISITES:
Fundamentals of Programming
UNIT I
BASICS INTERNET PROTOCOLS, HTML5
6+4
Basic Internet Protocols - The World Wide Web - HTTP messages - Web servers and clients - Introduction to
HTML5 - Editing HTML5 - W3C HTML validation service - Headings - Linking - Images - Special characters
and horizontal rules - Lists - Tables - Forms - Internal linking - Meta elements - New HTML5 Form input types
- Input and datalist elements and auto complete attribute - Page structure elements - Introduction to Canvas Canvas Coordinate System - Rectangles - Drawing Arcs and Circles - Shadows
UNIT II
JAVASCRIPT, JQUERY
6+4
Introduction to JavaScript - Syntax - Variables and data types - JavaScript Control Statements - Operators Literals - Functions - Objects - Arrays - Built in objects - Event handling - Fundamentals of JQuery - JQuery
selectors - JQuery methods to access HTML attributes - Traversing - Manipulators - Events - Effects
UNIT III
CSS3, DOM
6+4
Types of CSS - Conflicting style sheets - Positioning Elements - Element Dimension - Box model and Text
Flow - Media types - Media Queries - Drop-Down Menus - Text shadows - Rounded corners - Color - Box
Shadows - Introduction to the Document Object Model - DOM History and Levels - Intrinsic Event Handling Modifying Element Style - The Document Tree - Properties of window - DOM Collections - Using Timer and
Dynamic Styles to Create Animated Effects - JavaScript Event Handling - Reviewing the load, mousemove,
mouseover, mouseout events - Form processing with focus, blur, submit, reset - Event Bubbling - More Events
UNIT IV
XML AND PHP
6+4
XML documents and vocabularies - XML versions and declarations - XML namespace - Representing data
types : DTD, XML schema - XSLT - XPath - XQuery - Introduction to PHP - Converting Between Data Types Arithmetic Operators - Initializing and Manipulating Arrays - String Comparisons - String Processing with
Regular Expressions - Form Processing and Business Logic - Reading from a Database - Using Cookie Dynamic Content
UNIT V
AJAX AND WEB SERVICES
6+4
Ajax - Enabled rich internet applications with XML and JSON - Web Services Introduction - WCF Services
Basics - SOAP - REST - JSON - Publishing and Consuming SOAP-Based Web Services, REST-Based XML
Web Services, REST-Based JSON Web Services
TOTAL: 50 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
P.J.Deitel, H.M.Deitel, “Internet and World Wide Web - How to program”, Pearson Education
Publishers, Fifth Edition, 2009.
2.
Jeffrey C. Jackson, "Web Technologies - A Computer Science Perspective", Pearson Education,
2007.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Robert. W. Sebesta, "Programming the World Wide Web", Pearson Education, Fourth Edition, 2007.
2.
Kogent Learning Solutions Inc., “Html5 Black Book: Covers CSS3, JavaScript, XKL, XHTML, AJAX,
PHP and jQuery”, Dreamtech Press, 2011.
3.
Joe Fawcett, Danny Ayers, Liam R. E. Quin, “Beginning XML”, John Wiley & Sons Publisher, Fifth
Edition, 2012
4.
Bates, “Developing Web Applications”, Wiley, 2006.
74
WEB REFERENCES:
1.
www.nptel.ac.in
2.
http://www.echoecho.com/javascript.htm
3.
http://www.w3schools.com/jquery/default.asp
4.
http://www.quackit.com/ajax/tutorial/
5.
http://www.w3schools.com/php/
6.
http://www.theshulers.com/whitepapers/internet_whitepaper/index.html
7.
http://www.protocols.com/pbook/tcpip2/#UDP
15ITC05
SOFTWARE PROJECT MANAGEMENT
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To estimate the cost associated with a project

To plan and monitor projects for the risk management

To explore the process of monitoring and controlling

To manage people and organization of teams

To study various software development standards
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Estimate cost benefits, risk and forecast cash flow for software projects

Evaluate the activities, risks and hazards in the project management

Apply cost monitoring and control strategies for software projects

Manage the organizational behavior of people working in teams

Use open source tools for managing projects
PREREQUISITES:
Software Engineering
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Project Definition – Contract Management – Activities covered by Software Project Management – Overview
of Project Planning – Stepwise Project Planning - Project evaluation - Strategic Assessment – Technical
Assessment – Cost Benefit Analysis – Cash Flow Forecasting – Cost Benefit Evaluation Techniques – Risk
Evaluation
UNIT II
ACTIVITY PLANNING
9
Objectives – Project Schedule – Sequencing and Scheduling Activities – Network Planning Models – Forward
Pass – Backward Pass – Activity Float – Shortening Project Duration – Activity on Arrow Networks – Risk
Management – Nature Of Risk – Types Of Risk – Managing Risk – Hazard Identification – Hazard Analysis –
Risk Planning And Control
UNIT III
MONITORING AND CONTROL
9
Creating Framework – Collecting the Data – Visualizing Progress – Cost Monitoring – Earned Value –
Prioritizing Monitoring – Getting Project Back To Target – Change Control – Managing Contracts –
Introduction – Types of Contract – Stages in Contract Placement – Typical Terms of a Contract – Contract
Management – Acceptance
UNIT IV
MANAGING PEOPLE AND ORGANIZING TEAMS
9
Understanding Behavior – Organizational Behavior – Selecting The Right Person For The Job – Instruction in
the Best Methods – Motivation – The Oldham Hackman Job Characteristics Model – Working In Groups –
Becoming A Team – Decision Making – Leadership – Organizational Structures – Stress – Health And Safety
75
– Case Studies
UNIT V
DEVELOPMENT AND MANAGEMENT STANDARDS
9
Microsoft solution Framework - PMBOK Guide - NASA practices - PRINCE 2 - Capability Maturity Model Integration - open source tools for managing projects: Project information flow - basic infrastructure collaborative document writing
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
Bob Hughes, Mike Cotterell, “Software Project Management”, Fifth Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2011
2.
Adolfo Villafiorita, “Introduction to Software Project Management”, CRC Press 2014
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1
Ramesh, Gopalaswamy, "Managing Global Projects", Tata McGraw Hill, 2001.
2
Royce, “Software Project Management”, Pearson Education, 1999
3
Jalote, “Software Project Management in Practice”, Pearson Education, 2002
WEB REFERENCES :
1
http://www.cs.ox.ac.uk/people/michael.wooldridge/teaching/soft-eng/lect05.pdf
2
https://at-web1.comp.glam.ac.uk/staff/dwfarthi/projman.htm
3
https://www2.swc.rwth-aachen.de/docs/98_FESMA.pdf
CORE ELECTIVE - II (for Semester VI)
15CSC05
J2EE TECHNOLOGY
L
T
P
C
2
0
2
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1.
To learn to develop web applications by separating presentation and logic using JSP and Servlet.
2.
To study the behaviour of EJB
3.
To learn the functionality of Java Mail and JMS
4.
To develop web application using JSF.
5.
To develop and deploy web services.
6.
To build web applications using Struts2
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1.
Capable of writing Server side programming using Servlet and JSP.
2.
Develop web application using EJB
3.
Work with Java Mail API and JMS
4.
Develop a Web Application using JSF
5.
Capable of creating, describing, publishing and consuming the Web Service
6.
Develop a Web Application using Struts2 MVC Architecture
PREREQUISITES:
Fundamentals of Java Programming, Web Programming
UNIT I
SERVLET AND JSP
6+4
Introduction to J2EE - Servlet - Life cycle - Parameter data - Sessions - Cookies - URL rewriting - Other
servlet capabilities - Servlets and concurrency - Database connectivity.
Separating programming and presentation - JSP technology - JSP expression language - JSP markup - JSTL
core actions - Tag libraries and files
76
UNIT II
EJB
6+4
EJB Container - EJB Classess - EJB Interfaces - Deployment Descriptors - environment elements - Session
Java Bean - stateless vs stateful - creating a session Java Bean - Entity Java Bean - Message Driven Bean
UNIT III
JAVA MAIL AND JMS
6+4
Java Mail : API - Protocols - Send Email Message - Retrieving Email Messages - deleting Email Messages Forwarding Email Message - Sending and Receiving Attachments
Java Message service : JMS Fundamentals - Components of JMS - sending Message - receiving Messagecreating a Publisher - Creating a Subscriber
UNIT IV
JSF AND WEB SERVICES
6+4
Java Server Faces - overview - architecture - Life cycle - various tags - data tables - JSF JDBC integration Event handling - Application using JSF.
Web Services :JAX-RPC-Concepts-Writing a Java Web Service-Writing a Java Web Service ClientDescribing Web Services - WSDL- SOAP
UNIT V
MVC ARCHITECTURE
6+4
MVC Architecture - Struts overview-Architecture - Struts Action Class- Using Struts HTML Tags - Struts
Validation Framework - Developing Application with Struts- Introduction to Spring - Introduction to Hibernate
TOTAL: 50 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
Jim Keogh, “The Complete Reference - J2EE”, McGraw Hill, 2009.
2.
Jeffrey C. Jackson, "Web Technologies--A Computer Science Perspective", Pearson Education, 2006.
3.
Sharanam and Vaishali Shah, “Struts 2 for Beginners”, Shroff Publishers, 2009
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
P.J. Deitel, H.M. Deitel, “Internet and World Wide Web - How to program”, Pearson Education Publishers,
Fifth Edition, 2009.
2.
Hortsmann & Cornell, “CORE JAVA 2 - Advanced Features, VOL.II”, Pearson Education, 2002.
WEB REFERENCES:
1.
http://docs.oracle.com/javaee/6/tutorial/doc/bnafd.html
2.
http://www.javatpoint.com/servlet-tutorial
3.
http://www.javatpoint.com/jms-tutorial
4.
http://www.tutorialspoint.com
5.
http://www.w3schools.com
15CSC06
PARALLEL PROGRAMMING
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To acquire knowledge on models and issues of parallel computing

To understand the various parallel algorithms

To introduce message passing paradigm using MPI

To demonstrate the shared memory paradigm with Pthreads and OpenMP

To study GPU based parallel programming using OpenCL and CUDA
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Identify issues in parallel programming

Parallelize the algorithm for different applications

Write parallel programs using MPI framework
77
L
T
P
C
2
0
2
3

Write shared memory parallel programs using Pthreads and OpenMP

Design and develop CUDA and OpenCL parallel programs
PREREQUISITES:
Knowledge of Parallel Architecture is preferred, Algorithms
UNIT I
FOUNDATIONS OF PARALLEL PROGRAMMING
6+4
Motivation for parallel programming - Concurrency in computing - basics of processes, multiprocessing and
threads - cache - cache mappings - caches and programs - virtual memory - instruction level parallelism hardware multi threading - SIMD - MIMD - interconnection networks - cache coherence - shared memory
model - issues in shared memory model - distributed memory model - issues in distributed memory model hybrid model - I/O - performance of parallel programs - parallel program design
UNIT II
PARALLEL ALGORITHMS
6+4
Elementary parallel algorithms- Reduction-Broadcast-Prefix sum. Matrix multiplication- Algorithm for processor
array-Algorithm for multiprocessors and multicomputer. Sorting: Odd even transposition sort - Bitonic mergeQuick sort based algorithms.
UNIT III
MESSAGE PASSING PARADIGM
6+4
Basic MPI programming - MPI_Init and MPI_Finalize - MPI communicators - SPMD programs - Message
passing - MPI_Send and MPI_Recv - Message matching - MPI I/O - Parallel I/O - Collective communication MPI_Reduce - MPI_Allreduce broadcast scatter gather allgather - derived types - Remote Memory Access Dynamic Process Management - MPI for Grids - Performance evaluation of MPI programs
UNIT IV
SHARED MEMORY PARADIGM: PTHREAD AND OPENMP
6+4
Basics of Pthreads - Thread Synchronization - Critical sections - Busy waiting - Mutexes - Semaphores Barriers and Condition variables- Basic OpenMP constructs - Scope of variables - Reduction clause - Parallel
For directive - Loops in OpenMP - Scheduling loops - Synchronization in OpenMP.
UNIT V
GRAPHICAL PROCESSING PARADIGMS: CUDA AND OPENCL
6+4
Introduction to GPU architecture. CUDA - Introduction- CUDA programming examples - CUDA Execution
model - CUDA Memory hierarchy - Introduction to OpenCL - OpenCL programming examples - Programs and
Kernels - Buffers and Images - Event model -OpenCL language- OpenCL case study
Lab components:
Implementation of parallel algorithms using MPI, PThread, OpenMP
TOTAL: 50 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1.
Peter S. Pacheco, “An introduction to parallel programming”, Morgan Kaufmann, 2011.
2.
Michael J. Quinn, “Parallel Computing: Theory & Practice”, Tata McGraw Hill Edition, 2003.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
M. J. Quinn, “Parallel programming in C with MPI and OpenMP”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2003.
2.
W. Gropp, E. Lusk, and R. Thakur, “Using MPI-2: Advanced features of the message passing
interface”, MIT Press, 1999.
3.
W. Gropp, E. Lusk, and A. Skjellum, “Using MPI: Portable parallel programming with the message
passing interface”, MIT Press, Second Edition, 1999.
4.
B. Chapman, G. Jost, and Ruud van der Pas, “Using OpenMP”, MIT Press, 2008.
5.
B. Lewis and D. J. Berg, “Multithreaded programming with Pthreads”, Sun Microsystems Press, 1998.
6.
Munshi, B. Gaster, T. G. Mattson, J. Fung, and D. Ginsburg, “OpenCL programming guide”, Addison
Wesley, 2011.
7.
Rob Farber, “CUDA application design and development”, Morgan Haufmann, 2011.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106106112/1
78
2. http://mc.stanford.edu/cgi-bin/images/b/ba/M02_2.pdf
3. http://www.dmi.unict.it/~bilotta/gpgpu/notes/12-opencl-images.html
15CSC07
MULTIMEDIA SYSTEMS
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To introduce the concepts of multimedia

To understand the functions of the various elements of multimedia

To understand the storage media and compression techniques

To be familiar with multimedia operating system and networking concepts

To learn the multimedia application development models
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Design a multimedia architecture for handling the stream

Work with the various elements of multimedia system

Select storage media and compression technique

Develop animation, images, Sound using Multimedia Tools.

Develop a multimedia applications
PREREQUISITES:
Basic Encoding and Decoding Principles, Fundamentals of Operating Systems and Networking
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Introduction to multimedia - Characteristics - Utilities - Creation - Uses - Promotion - Digital Representation Media and Data streams - Properties of multimedia systems - Basic Sound, Image and Video Concepts Multimedia Architecture - Multimedia Documents
UNIT II
ELEMENTS OF MULTIMEDIA
9
Multimedia Building Blocks: Text - Graphics - Video Capturing - Sound Capturing and Editing - Introduction to
2D and 3D Graphics - surface characteristics and texture - lights - Animation: key frames and Tweeningtechniques - Principles of animation - Techniques of animation - 3D animation - File formats.
UNIT III
STORAGE AND COMPRESSION
9
Visual Display Systems - CRT - video adapter card - video adapter cable - LCD - PDP - optical storage media
- CD technology - DVD Technology - Compression Types and Techniques - CODEC - GIF coding standards lossy and lossless - JPEG - MPEG-1 - MPEG-2 - MP3 - Fractals - MMDBS
UNIT IV
MULTIMEDIA OPERATING SYSTEM AND NETWORKING
9
Real time and Multimedia - Resource Management -Real time process management - Multimedia file system Unix multimedia extension - Windows multimedia extensions - Application subsystem - Transport Subsystem Quality of service and resource management.
UNIT V
MULTIMEDIA APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT
9
Software life cycle - ADDIE Model - conceptualization - content collection and processing - story - flowline script - storyboard - implementation - multiplatform issues - Authoring - Metaphors - Testing - report writing documentation - Case study: Web Application - Console Application - Distributed Application - Mobile
Application - Games consoles - iTV - Kiosks - Education
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
Parekh R, “Principles of Multimedia”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2013
79
2.
Ralf Steinmetz, KlaraNahrstedt, “Multimedia: Computing, Communications and Applications”,
Pearson Education, 2009
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Villamil and Louis Molina, “Multimedia: An Introduction”, Prentice Hall, New Delhi 1998.
2.
Tay Vaughan, “Multimedia: Making It Work”, McGraw-Hill Professional, 2006.
3.
Deitel&Deitel, “Internet & World Wide Web - How to Program”, Prentice Hall, Fourth Edition, 2008.
4.
Banerji Ashok & Ghosh Ananda Mohan, “Multimedia Technologies”, TMH, New Delhi 2010.
5.
Li, Ze-Nian& Drew-Mark S, “Fundamentals of Multimedia”, Phi Learning Private Limited, New Delhi
2012.
6.
K. R. Rao, Zoran S. Bojkovic, Dragorad A.Milovacovic, D. A. Milovacovic, “Multimedia
Communication Systems: Techniques, Standards, and Networks”, Prentice Hall, First Edition, 2002.
7.
Ze-Nian Li and Mark S. Drew, “Fundamentals of Multimedia”, Pearson, 2004.
15CSC08
DIGITAL IMAGING
L
T
P
C
2
0
2
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To acquire knowledge on fundamentals of image processing.

To get familiar with Image transformations and enhancements

To understand the image restoration and segmentation algorithms

To study the multi resolution analysis and image compression techniques

To learn the significance of image representation

To understand the task of recognition and analysis in images and video
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Perform the basic image processing operations using MATLAB

Apply Image transformations and enhancements

Use the image restoration and segmentation algorithms

Work with multi resolution analysis and image compression techniques

Represent the features of image

Recognize and classify the images and video.
PREREQUISITES:
Digital Signal Processing, Knowledge of Matrices
UNIT I
FUNDAMENTALS OF IMAGE PROCESSING
6+4
Introduction - Steps in image processing systems - Image acquisition - Sampling and Quantization Pixel relationships - Color fundamentals and models - File Formats, Image operations: Arithmetic, Geometric
and Morphological - Introduction to MATLAB - Image operations using MATLAB
UNIT II
IMAGE ENHANCEMENT
6+4
Spatial Domain - Gray level transformations - Histogram processing - Spatial filtering - Smoothing and
sharpening - Frequency domain: Filtering in frequency domain - DFT, FFT, DCT - Smoothing and sharpening
filters - Homomorphic filtering - Image enchantment using MATLAB
UNIT III
IMAGE RESTORATION AND SEGMENTATION
6+4
Noise models - Mean Filters - Order Statistics - Adaptive filters - Band reject Filters - Band pass Filters - Notch
Filters - Optimum Notch Filtering - Inverse Filtering - Wiener filtering.
Segmentaion: Detection of discontinuities - Edge operators - Edge linking and boundary Detection Thresholding - Region based segmentation - Morphological Watersheds - Motion segmentation
80
UNIT IV
MULTI RESOLUTION ANALYSIS AND COMPRESSIONS
6+4
Multi Resolution analysis: Image pyramids - Multi resolution expansion - Wavelet transforms - Image
compression: Fundamentals - Models - Elements of information theory - Error free compression - Lossy
compression - JPEG standard, JPEG 2000, SPIHT, MPEG Standards. Image compression and enhancement
using Wavelet transforms.
UNIT V
IMAGE REPRESENTATION AND RECOGNITION
6+4
Boundary representation - Chain Code - Polygonal approximation, signature, boundary segments - Boundary
description - Shape number - Fourier Descriptor, moments- Regional Descriptors - Topological feature,
Texture - Patterns and Pattern classes - Recognition based on matching. Image Classification, retrieval.
Image fusion - Digital compositing - Video motion analysis.
LAB COMPONENT:
Arithmetic, Geometric and Morphological operations
Image Enhancement
Filtering, Edge detection and Segmentation
Wavelet transforms and texture processing
TOTAL: 50 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
Rafael C.Gonzalez and Richard E.Woods, “Digital Image Processing”, Pearson Education, Third
Edition, 2009.
2.
Anil K.Jain, “Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing”, PHI, 2011.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Milan Sonka, Vaclav Hlavac and Roger Boyle, “Image Processing, Analysis and Machine Vision”,
Thompson Learning, Second Edition, 2007.
2.
Willliam K Pratt, “Digital Image Processing”, John Willey, 2002.
3.
Malay K. Pakhira, “Digital Image Processing and Pattern Recognition”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., First
Edition, 2011.
4.
Sanjit K. Mitra and Giovanni L. Sicuranza, “Non Linear Image Processing”, Elsevier, 2007.
5.
S.Sridhar, “Digital Image Processing”, Oxford University Press, 2011.
WEB REFERENCES:
1.
http://inst.eecs.berkeley.edu/~ee225b/fa12/lectures/
2.
http://www.debugmode.com/imagecmp/
3.
http://ocw.mit.edu/courses
15CSC09
ADVANCED DATA STRUCTURES
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To learn effective searching using advanced search trees

To study various advanced heap structures

To gain knowledge on multi way and digital search trees.

To study the synchronization mechanism

To gain knowledge on concurrent linked lists, stacks, and queues
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Search using advanced search trees

Build various advanced heap structures

Work with multi way trie and digital search trees
81
L
T
P
C
2
0
2
3

Achieve synchronization using shared objects and concurrent objects

Apply concurrency on linked lists, stacks, and queues
PREREQUISITES:
Data Structure fundamentals, Algorithms
UNIT I
ADVANCED SEARCH TREES
6+4
AA Tree- K-D Search Tree - Red Black Tree - Splay Tree - Weight balanced tree - Selection tree - Skip List 2-3 Trees
UNIT II
ADVANCED HEAP STRUCTURES
6+4
Min heap - Min-Max heap - Double ended heap - Leftist Heaps - Binomial Heaps - Fibonacci Heaps - Skew
Heaps - Interval Heap.
UNIT III
MULTI WAY AND DIGITAL SEARCH STRUCTURES
6+4
Multi way Search structures: m-Way Search tree - B-tree - B+ tree. Digital Search Structures: Digital Search
tree - Binary Trie - Patricia - Multi way Trie - Strings - Tries and Compressed Tries - Suffix trees.
UNIT IV
SHARED OBJECTS AND CONCURRENT OBJECTS
6+4
Shared Objects and Synchronization - Properties of Mutual Exclusion - The Producer-Consumer Problem The Readers-Writers Problem - Realities of Parallelization - Mutual Exclusion - Critical Sections - Thread
Solutions -The Filter Lock - Fairness - Bounded Timestamps - Concurrent Objects - Concurrency and
Correctness -Sequential Objects - Quiescent Consistency - Sequential Consistency - Linearizability - Progress
Conditions - The Java Memory Model
UNIT V
CONCURRENT DATA STRUCTURES
6+4
Linked Lists - The Role of Locking - List-Based Sets - Concurrent Reasoning - Coarse-Grained
Synchronization -Fine-Grained Synchronization - Optimistic Synchronization - Lazy Synchronization - NonBlocking Synchronization - Concurrent Queues - A Bounded Partial Queue - An Unbounded Total Queue - An
Unbounded Lock-Free Queue. Concurrent Stacks and Elimination - An Unbounded Lock-Free Stack - The
Elimination Backoff Stack.
LAB COMPONENT:
Implement Advanced trees, Heap, multi way trees
Implement concurrent linked list, stack and Queue
TOTAL: 50 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
E. Horowitz, S. Sahni and Dinesh Mehta, “Fundamentals of Data structures in C++”, Silicon Press,
Second Edition, 2007
2.
M. Herlihy and N. Shavit, “The Art of Multiprocessor Programming”, Morgan Kaufmann, 2012.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Ellis Horowitz and SartajSahni, “Fundamentals of Data Structures”, Galgotia Book Source, Gurgaon,
1976.
2.
3.
WEB REFERENCES:
1.
http://www.geeksforgeeks.org/pattern-searching-set-8-suffix-tree-introduction/
2.
http://iamwww.unibe.ch/~wenger/DA/SkipList/
3.
http://www.cs.au.dk/~gerth/slides/soda98.pdf
82
4.
http://www.cs.sunysb.edu/~algorith/files/suffix-trees.shtml
5.
http://pages.cs.wisc.edu/~shuchi/courses/880-S07/scribe-notes/lecture20.pdf
6.
http://ocw.mit.edu/courses
15CSC10
FUNDAMENTALS OF BIG DATA
L
T
P
C
(Offered by Infosys)
2
0
2
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To understand the Basic concepts of Big Data, Analytics and Technology landscape

To examine the Hadoop framework that supports processing of large data sets

To study the Mongo DB and Cassandra for formulating the data

To learn MapReduce Programming and Hive

To gain knowledge on Pig and open source reporting tools
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Explore the big data landscape and analytics

Demonstrate the Hadoop platform for processing massive volume of data

Implement CRUD operations using MongoDB and Cassandra

Work on MapReduce framework and Hive

Analyze big data using pig

Prepare Reports using Jaspersoft studio
PREREQUISITES:
Database Management System, Programming Concepts
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO BIG DATA, ANALYTICS AND TECHNOLOGY LANDSCAPE
6+4
Classification of Digital Data - Introduction to Big Data: Characteristics – Evolution – Definition - Challenges
with Big Data - Other Characteristics of Data - Why Big Data - Traditional Business Intelligence versus Big
Data - Data Warehouse and Hadoop Environment
Big Data Analytics: Classification of Analytics – Challenges - Big Data Analytics important - Data Science Data Scientist - Terminologies used in Big Data Environments - Basically Available Soft State Eventual
Consistency - Top Analytics Tools
Big Data Technology Landscape: NoSQL, Hadoop
UNIT II
INTRODUCTION TO HADOOP
6+4
RDBMS Versus Hadoop - Distributed Computing Challenges – History - Hadoop Overview - Use Case of
Hadoop - Hadoop Distributors - Hadoop Distributed File System - Processing Data with Hadoop - Managing
Resources and Applications with Hadoop YARN - Interacting with Hadoop Ecosystem
UNIT III
INTRODUCTION TO MONGODB AND CASSANDRA
6+4
MongoDB: Why Mongo DB - Terms used in RDBMS and Mongo DB - Data Types - MongoDB Query
Language - Cassandra: Features - CQL Data Types – CQLSH – Keyspaces - CRUD Operations – Collections
- Using a Counter - Time to Live - Alter Commands - Import and Export - Querying System Tables
UNIT IV
INTRODUCTION TO MAPREDUCE PROGRAMMING AND HIVE
6+4
MapReduce: Mapper – Reducer – Combiner – Partitioner – Searching – Sorting – Compression
Hive: Introduction – Architecture - Data Types - File Formats - Hive Query Language Statements – Partitions –
Bucketing – Views - Sub- Query – Joins – Aggregations - Group by and Having - RCFile Implementation Hive User Defined Function - Serialization and Deserialization - Hive Analytic Functions
UNIT V
INTRODUCTION TO PIG & JASPERREPORTS
6+4
Pig: Introduction - History and Anatomy – Features – Philosophy - Use Case for Pig - Pig Latin Overview - Pig
Primitive Data Types - Running Pig - Execution Modes of Pig - HDFS Commands - Relational Operators - Eval
83
Function - Complex Data Types - Piggy Bank - User-Defined Functions - Parameter Substitution - Diagnostic
Operator - Word Count Example using Pig - Pig at Yahoo! - Pig Versus Hive - JasperReport using Jaspersoft.
LAB COMPONENT:
Implementation of Hadoop framework
Mapreduce program
Work with MongoDB, Cassandra,Pig,Hive and Jaspersoft
TOTAL: 50 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
Seema Acharya, SubhashiniChellappan, “Big Data and Analytics”, Wiley Publications, First
Edition,2015
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Judith Huruwitz, Alan Nugent, Fern Halper, Marcia Kaufman, “Big data for dummies”, John Wiley &
Sons, Inc. (2013)
2.
Tom White, “Hadoop The Definitive Guide”, O’Reilly Publications, Fourth Edition, 2015
3.
Dirk Deroos, Paul C.Zikopoulos, Roman B.Melnky, Bruce Brown, Rafael Coss, “Hadoop For
Dummies”, Wiley Publications, 2014
4.
Robert D.Schneider, “Hadoop For Dummies”, John Wiley & Sons, Inc. (2012)
5.
Paul Zikopoulos, “Understanding Big Data: Analytics for Enterprise Class Hadoop and Streaming
Data, McGraw Hill, 2012
6.
Chuck Lam, “Hadoop In Action”, Dreamtech Publications, 2010
WEB REFERENCES:
1.
https://www.mangodb.org
2.
http://cassandra.apache.org
3.
http://apache.bytenet.in/hadoop/common/hadoop-2.6.0
4.
http://apache.bytenet.in/hive
5.
http://apache.bytenet.in/pig
6.
https://community.jaspersoft.com
15CSC26
COMBINATORICS AND GRAPH THEORY
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The main objectives of the course are

To introduce topics and techniques of combinatorics methods.

To learn the basics of combinatorics: enumeration, recurrence, generating Functions

Understanding the elements of Graph Theory.

To introduce the students about graphs, their properties and their applications as models of
networks.

To solve theoretical problems and apply them in algorithms based on graph structures.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On successful completion of the course students will be able to

Know the permutations and combinations for all possible results in an experiment.

Use generating functions to solve a variety of combinatorial problems.

Formulate problems in terms of graphs.

Have knowledge of the graph theoretic concepts needed for some algorithms.
84

Solve graph theoretic problems and apply algorithms taught in the course
PREREQUISITES:
Number theory, Logic and Proof methods.
UNIT I
COMBINATORICS
9
The pigeon-hole principle - Basic counting problems - The binomial coefficients (the binomial theorem,
algebraic vs. combinatorial proof, Pascal’s identity, Pascal’s triangle, Catalan numbers) - the principle of
inclusion and exclusion.
UNIT II
RECURRENCES
9
Fibonacci numbers - The substitution method - Linear recurrences (mostly homogenous recurrences, the
characteristic polynomial/equation) - Generating functions - (Catalan numbers revisited, divisions of a number
UNIT III
INTRODUCTION TO GRAPH THEORY
9
Definition examples – subgraphs – complements and graph isomorphism – Euler trail and circuits – planar
graphs – Hamilton paths and cycles.
UNIT IV
TREES
9
Definition – rooted trees – trees and sorting – weighted trees and prefix codes – biconnected components and
Articulation points.
UNIT V
OPTIMIZATION AND MATCHING
9
Dijkstra’s shortest path algorithm – Kruskal and Prim algorithms – Max-Flow Min-cut theorem – Matching
theory.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
nd
1.
Douglas B. West, “Introduction to Graph Theory “: Prentice-Hall of India, 2
III)
2.
Ralph P. Grimaldi, “Discrete and combinatorial mathematics: An applied introduction”, Pearson, 5
Edition, 2004. (Units IV, V)
Edition, 2012. (Units I, II,
th
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Narsingh Deo,” Graph Theory with applications to Engineering and Computer Science”, Prentice-Hall
th
of India, New Delhi, 11 printing, 1995.
2.
John Clark, Derek Allan Holton, “A first look at Graph Theory”, world Scientific publishing company
incorporated 1991.
3.
Alan Tucker,” Applied Combinatorics”, John wiley and sons, 2002.
15ITC37
STATISTICS
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The main objectives of the course are

To learn to employ statistical tools to clarify, analyse and draw inferences from data

To acquire knowledge of various statistical techniques useful in making rational decision in
management problems

To introduce the concept of design of experiment to make the scientific judgments in the real life
problems.

To provide a foundation and motivation to expose statistical ideas subsequently to the course.

To familiarize the student with the knowledge of reliability of systems and statistical quality control of
the products.
85
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student would

Draw inferences through application of statistical tools

Define and explain basic concepts in descriptive statistics and basic probability.

Be introduced to the notion of sampling distributions and have acquired knowledge of statistical
techniques useful in making rational decision in management problems.

Be exposed to statistical methods designed to contribute the process of making scientific judgments
in the face of uncertainty and variation.

Construct a confidence interval to estimate a population mean.
PREREQUISITES:
Elementary probability theory and Statistical Measures.
UNIT I
Sampling Distribution
9
Sampling distributions: Sampling distribution of mean and proportion - Various sampling techniques - Point
and Interval estimates for population parameters of large sample and small samples - Determining the sample
size.
UNIT II
TESTING OF HYPOTHESIS
9
Hypothesis testing: one sample and two sample tests for means and proportions of large samples (z-test) one sample and two sample tests for means of small samples (t-test) - F-test for two sample standard
deviations.
UNIT III
NON – PARAMETRIC METHODS
9
Chi-square tests - independence of attributes and goodness of fit - Sign test for paired data - Rank sum test –
Kolmogorov Smirnov test for goodness of fit - Mann–Whitney U test - Kruskal Wallis test - One sample run test
- Rank correlation.
UNIT IV
DESIGN OF EXPERIMENTS
9
Analysis of variance – One way classification (CRD) – Two way classification (RBD) – Latin square Design
(LSD)
UNIT V
RELIABILITY AND QUALITY CONTROL
9
Concepts of reliability - Hazard functions - Reliability of series and parallel systems - Control charts for
measurements (Mean and Range charts) – Control charts for attributes (p, c and np charts).
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
J. S. Milton and J.C. Arnold, “Introduction to Probability and Statistics”, Tata McGraw Hill, 4th edition,
2009.
2.
Levin R.I. and Rubin D.S., “Statistics for Management”, 7th edition, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New
Delhi, 2012 .
3.
R.A. Johnson and C.B. Gupta, “Miller and Freund’s Probability and Statistics for Engineers”, Pearson
Education, Asia, 7th edition, 2009.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Walpole, R. E., Myers, R. H. Myers R. S. L. and Ye. K, “Probability and
th
Scientists”, Seventh Edition, Pearsons Education, 9 Edition, 2011.
2.
Lipschutz. S and Schiller. J, “Schaum’s outlines - Introduction to Probability and Statistics”, McGraw-Hill,
st
New Delhi, 1 edition, 2011.
3.
Gupta, S.C, and Kapur, J.N., “Fundamentals of Mathematical Statistics”, Sultan Chand, Ninth Edition,
New Delhi ,1996.
86
Statistics for Engineers and
CORE ELECTIVE - III, IV and V (for Semester VII)
15CSC11
MOBILE APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT
L
T
P
C
2
0
2
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To understand the difference between mobile based application and conventional application

To learn to design user interface for Mobile applications

To learn to develop simple Android based mobile applications

To learn to integrate database with an Android Application

To be familiar with mobile frame works like IOS, windows and blackberry
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Explore the differences between mobile based application and conventional application

Design UI in the context of mobile application

Develop mobile applications for Android

Write Android application involving integration of sensors, connectivity to database, etc.

Write simple App for IOS, blackberry and Windows phone
PREREQUISITES:
Java Programming
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
8
Brief History of Mobile Software Development - Mobile Web Vs. Mobile App - Hardware and Software for
different Mobile frameworks - Difference between Mobile and Desktop applications
UNIT II
USER INTERFACE DESIGN
9
Mobile Application users - Basic Design principles - Mobile Information Design - Mobile Platforms: Android,
IOS, BlackberryOS, WindowsPhone
UNIT III
APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT FOR ANDROID-I
6+5
Android Platform - Different SDKs and their growth - Android Architecture - Android Development Environment
Setup - Anatomy of Android Application - Views & Layouts - List View - Adapters - HTTP Connection initiation
Lab Component: Android Programs using Layout and Views
UNIT IV
APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT FOR ANDROID-II
6+5
Database Integration - Android Preferences - Broadcast Receivers - Content providers - Usage of different
sensors – Services - intent filters
Lab Component: Android Programs with data integration, intent filters, broadcast receivers
UNIT V
OTHER MOBILE FRAMEWORKS
6+5
IOS - Objective C Basics - a simple App in IOS - Windows Phone basics - Simple Application in Windows
Phone - Blackberry basics - Simple Application in Blackberry - Introduction to Cross-platform Mobile
Application development.
Lab Component: Simple applications in IOS, Windows and cross platforms
TOTAL: 50 PERIODS
TEXT BOOK:
Jeff McWherter and Scott Gowell, "Professional Mobile Application Development", Wrox,2012
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Joseph Annuzzi, Jr.,LaurenDarcey, Shane Conder “Introduction
Development, Addision-Wesley, Fourth Edition, 2014
2.
Charlie Collins, Michael Galpin and Matthias Kappler, “Android in Practice”, DreamTech, 2012
87
to Android™ Application
3.
Professional Cross-Platform Mobile Development in C#, By Scott Olson, John Hunter, Ben Horgen,
Kenny Goers, wrox, 2012
WEB REFERENCES:
1.
http://developer.android.com/index.html
2.
https://www.udacity.com/course/developing-android-apps--ud853
3.
https://developer.apple.com/ios8/
4.
http://developer.blackberry.com/
5.
http://www.microsoftvirtualacademy.com/training-courses/windows-phone-8-1-development-forabsolute-beginners
15CSC12
NETWORK ANALYSIS AND MANAGEMENT
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To learn the analysis of network requirements and network flow.
 To understand the design, security and privacy issues in network communication requirements.
 To understand management technology to manage today’s systems.
 To study about the network management in organization
 To understand the effectiveness of management assessment
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Do requirement analysis and flow analysis for network design

Address the routing and security issues in networks.

Work with management lifecycle and management reference models.

Design communication management protocols

Integrate and assess the impact of network management
PREREQUISITES:
Computer Networks
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Introduction - Overview of Analysis, Architecture and Design Processes - Systems Methodology - Systems
Description - Service Description - Service Characteristics - Performance Characteristics - Network
Supportability - Requirement analysis concepts - User, Application, Device, Network and Other Requirements
-Requirement analysis process - Flow Analysis - Flow Models - Flow Prioritization
UNIT II
ARCHITECTURE
9
Network architecture - Component Architectures - Reference Architecture - Architectural Models - Addressing
and routing architecture - Architecture and Routing Mechanisms - Architecture and Routing Strategies Performance architecture - Security and privacy architecture - Network analysis tool
UNIT III
NETWORK MANAGEMENT BASICS
9
Network management overview - Basic Ingredients of Network Management
Management perspective: Dimensions of the management - Management interoperability - Management
Subject - Management life cycle - Management layers - Management functions and reference models.
UNIT IV
NETWORK MANAGEMENT COMMUNICATION
9
Management information - MIBs - Modeling Management Information - Management communication patterns Layers of Management Interactions - Manager and Agent Initiated Interactions - Rules of conversation Common management protocols - SNMP - CLI - Netflow - Management organization - Scaling Network
Management -Management Mediation
88
UNIT V
NETWORK MANAGEMENT INTEGRATION
9
Applied network management: Management integration - Challenges and Approaches to Management
Integration - Containing Complexity of the Managed Domain - Service level management
Management metrics: Assessing management impact and effectiveness
Case Study: NMS, Organization Network
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. James D.McCabe, “Network Analysis, Architecture and Design”, Elsevier, 3rd Edition, 2007.
2. Alexander Clemm, “Network Management Fundamentals”, Cisco Press, 1st Edition, 2007.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Larry Walsh, “SNMP MIB Handbook”, 2008.
2. Steven T.Karris, "Network Design and Management", Orchard Publications, 2009.
3. Laura Chappell and Gerals combs, “Wireshark Network Analysis”, 1st Edition, 2010.
4. William Stallings, “SNMP, SNMPV2, SNMPV3, AND RMON 1&2”, 3rd Edition, 1999.
WEB REFERENCES:
1.
http://www.slac.stanford.edu/xorg/nmtf/nmtf-tools.html
2.
http://www.ils.indiana.edu/faculty/hekbia/web/other/Ekbia_ManagingNetworkOrgs.pdf
3.
http://www.change-management.com/tutorial-integrating-cm-pm.html
15CSC13
DATA WAREHOUSING AND DATA MINING
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To study the concepts of data warehousing architecture

To understand data mining principles and techniques

To learn to use association rule mining for handling large data

To study classification and clustering for better organization and retrieval of data

To expose business applications and recent trends of Data mining
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Identify the components of data warehousing architecture

Implement data preprocessing for mining applications

Apply the association rules for mining the data

Deploy appropriate classification and clustering techniques

Use recent trends of Data mining in business applications
PREREQUISITES:
Database Management System, Probability Theory
UNIT I
DATA WAREHOUSING
10
Introduction to Data warehousing - Data warehousing Components - Building a Data Warehouse - Mapping
the Data Warehouse to Multiprocessor Architecture - DBMS Schemas for Decision Support - OnLine
Analytical Processing and tools.
UNIT II
INTRODUCTION TO DATA MINING
8
Introduction to KDD process - Knowledge discovery from databases - Data mining functionalities Technologies used - Applications - Issues - Knowing Data: Data objects and attributes - Statistical description
of data - Data visualization - Measuring similarity and dissimilarity - Data preprocessing: Data cleaning - Data
89
integration and transformation - Data reduction - Data discretization and Concept hierarchy generation
UNIT III
ASSOCIATION RULE MINING
9
Introduction - Association rule mining - Mining frequent itemsets with and without candidate generation Pattern evaluation methods - Mining various kinds of association rules: Pattern mining - Mining multilevel
association - Mining multidimensional association - Constraint based mining.
UNIT IV
CLASSIFICATION AND CLUSTERING
10
Basic concepts - Decision tree induction - Bayesian classification - Rule based classification - Classification by
back propagation - Model Evaluation and Selection - Techniques to improve classification - Cluster analysis Clustering techniques: Partitioning methods - Hierarchical methods - Evaluation of clustering
Outlier detection: Outliers and Outlier analysis - Outlier detection methods
UNIT V
CASE STUDY
8
Sequential pattern mining in symbolic sequences - Mining graphs and networks - Visual and audio data mining
- Data mining for intrusion detection and prevention - Data mining and Recommender systems - Working with
WEKA, GEPHI tools, Massive Online Analysis
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
Jiawei Han and Micheline Kamber, “Data Mining: Concepts and Techniques”, Morgan Kaufmann
Publishers, Third edition, 2011.
2.
Alex Berson and Stephen J. Smith, “Data Warehousing, Data Mining & OLAP”, Tata McGraw Hill
Edition, 21st Reprint, 2011.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
G. K. Gupta, “Introduction to Data Mining with Case Studies”, Prentice Hall of India, Easter Economy
Edition, 2014
2.
Mehmed Kantardzic, “Data mining concepts, models, methods and algorithms”, Wiley IEEE Press,
2nd edition, 2011
3.
Ian Witten, Eibe Frank, “Data Mining: Practical Machine Learning Tools and Techniques”, Morgan
Kaufmann, Third edition, 2011
4.
George M Marakas, “Modern Data Warehousing, Mining and Visualization”, Prentice Hall, 2003
WEB REFERENCES:
1.
www.nptel.ac.in
2.
http://www.gtbit.org/downloads/dwdmsem6/dwdmsem6lman.pdf
3.
http://www.abbottanalytics.com/data-mining-resources-websites.php
4.
http://www.gephi.org
5.
http://ocw.mit.edu/courses/sloan-school-of-management/15-062-data-mining-spring-2003
15CSC14
VIRTUAL MACHINES
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To understand the Basics of Virtual Machines and Emulation

To learn the ways of Implementing Virtual Machines

To learn to apply Code signed and System Virtual Machines

To be familiar with emerging applications using Virtual Machines
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Realize the concept of Virtual Machine

Implement and address the issues related to optimization
90
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3

Implement VMs in High Level Languages

Virtualize various system resources to enhance performance of the system

Explore the emerging applications
PREREQUISITES:
Principles of Compilers, Programming Principles
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Introduction - Computer Architecture - Virtual Machine Basics - Process Virtual Machines - System Virtual
Machines - A Taxonomy - Interpretation - Binary Translation - Dynamic Translation - Control Transfer
Optimization - Instruction Set Issues
UNIT II
EMULATION
9
Virtual Machine Implementation - Compatibility - State Mapping - Emulation - Code Cache Management System Environment - Dynamic Program Behavior - Profiling - Optimizing Translation Blocks - Optimization
Framework - Code Reordering - Code Optimizations - Same-ISA Optimization Systems
UNIT III
HIGH LEVEL LANGUAGE ARCHITECTURE AND
IMPLEMENTATION
9
Pascal P-Code Virtual Machine - Object Oriented Virtual Machines - JVM Architecture - APIs - Microsoft
Common Language Infrastructure - Dynamic Class Loading - Implementing Security - Garbage Collection Java Native Interface - Basic Emulation - High Performance Emulation
UNIT IV
CODESIGNED AND SYSTEM VIRTUAL MACHINES
9
Memory and Register State Mapping - Self Modifying and Self Referencing Code - Support of Code Caching Implementing Precise Traps - Input / Output - Applying Codesigned Virtual Machines - Key concepts of
System Virtualization - Resource Virtualization - Processors - Memory - Input / Output - Performance
Enhancement
UNIT V
VIRTUAL MACHINE APPLICATIONS
9
Multiprocessor Systems - Partitioning - Virtualization with different Host and Guest ISAs - Security - Migration
- Grids - Case Studies: The Jikes Research VM - Transmeta Crusoe - IBM AS / 400 - VMware Virtual
Platform - The Intel VT-x Technology - Cellular Disco System VM Based Partitioning – VM Portability –
Distributed VMs – Objects and VMs – Virtual VMs
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. James Edward Smith, Ravi Nair, “Virtual Machines: Versatile Platforms for Systems and Processes”,
Elsevier, 2005.
2. Iain D. Craig “Virtual Machines”, Springer, 2006 edition.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Bernard Golden, “Virtualization For Dummies”, First edition, 2007
2. Tim Lindholm, Frank Yellin, Gilad Bracha, Alex Buckley, “The Java Virtual Machine Specification,
Java SE 8 Edition”, Addison-Wesley Professional, First edition, 2014
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://cs.nyu.edu/courses/spring14/CSCI-GA.3033-015/
2. https://www.virtualbox.org/manual/ch01.html
3. http://www.shavlik.com/onlinehelp/protect80htmlhelp/notes_about_virtual_machines.htm
91
15CSC15
MACHINE TO MACHINE COMMUNICATION
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To understand the concept of machine-to-machine (M2M) communications and their standards

To gain knowledge on the various machine-to-machine (M2M) communications architectures

To study the scheduling concepts, mobility concepts and security protocols.

To learn to handle large groups of devices with energy optimizations

To get exposure on commercial aspects of machine-to-machine (M2M) solutions.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Visualize the architecture and standards of machine-to-machine communication.

Select appropriate machine-to-machine (M2M) communication architecture

Secure machine-to-machine and Internet of Things applications

Minimize energy consumptions.

Exploit M2M solutions in eHealth and smart grid applications.
PREREQUISITES:
Network Principles and Standards
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION, ARCHITECTURES AND STANDARDS - I
9
Introducing machine-to-machine (M2M) communication - Benefits of M2M - Business models for M2M - M2M
Standards - Overview of ETSI machine-to-machine and one M2M architectures - Overview of 3GPP machinetype communication standardization.
UNIT II
ARCHITECTURES AND STANDARDS - II
9
Lower-power wireless mesh networks for machine-to-machine communications using the IEEE 802.15.4
standard - M2M interworking technologies and underlying market considerations - Supporting machine-tomachine communications in long-term evolution (LTE) networks.
UNIT III
ACCESS, SCHEDULING, MOBILITY AND SECURITY PROTOCOLS
9
Traffic models for machine-to-machine communications: Types and applications - Packet scheduling
strategies for machine-to-machine communications over LTE cellular networks - Mobility management for
machine-to-machine communications - Establishing security in machine-to-machine communication devices
and services.
UNIT IV
NETWORK OPTIMIZATION FOR M2M COMMUNICATIONS
9
Group-based optimization of large group of devices in machine-to-machine communications networks Optimizing power saving in cellular networks for machine-to-machine communications - Increasing power
efficiency in LTE networks for machine-to-machine communications.
UNIT V
APPLICATIONS
9
Machine-to-Machine communications for smart cities - Machine-to-Machine communications for e-health Intrusion Detection System for Machine-to-Machine communication in the Smart Grid
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
Carles Anton-Haro, Mischa Dohler, “Machine-to-Machine (M2M) Communications: Architecture,
Performance and Applications”, Elsevier, 2015.
2.
Vojislav B. Misic, Jelena Misic, “Machine-to-Machine Communications: Architectures, Technology,
Standards, and Applications”, CRC Press 2014.
3.
Zhong Fan, Russell J. Haines, Parag Kulkarni, “M2M communications for e-health and smart grid: An
industry and standard perspective”, Vol. 21, No. 1, pp. 62-69, Feb 2014.
92
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
David Boswarthick, Omar Elloumi, Olivier Hersent, “M2M Communications: A Systems Approach”,
John Wiley & Sons, 2012.
2.
Kwang-Cheng Chen, Shao-Yu Lien, “Machine-to-machine communications: Technologies and
challenges”, Ad Hoc Networks, Volume 18, Pages 3-23, July 2014.
WEB REFERENCES:
1.
http://www.barnesandnoble.com/sample/read/9781782421023
2.
http://www.iith.ac.in/~tbr/teaching/docs/M2M-CPS.pdf
3.
http://www.3gpp2.org/public_html/specs/__S.R0141-0_v1.0_M2M_Study_Report.pdf
4.
http://www.etsi.org/deliver/etsi_ts/102600_102699/102690/02.01.01_60/ts_102690v020101p.pdf
15CSC16
DATA SCIENCE
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To understand the importance of high-dimensional space and subspaces

To study the role of random graphs in data science

To learn to use random walks, Markov chains and machine learning models

To explore various algorithms for massive data problem and clustering

To learn about the various models used in data representation
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Represent the data using high-dimensional space and subspaces

Analyse the random graphs

Find solution using random walks, Markov chains and machine learning models

Examine the various algorithms for massive data problem and clustering

Use data models to represent the data
PREREQUISITES:
Database Management Systems, Probability Theory
UNIT I
HIGH-DIMENSIONAL SPACE AND BEST-FIT SUBSPACES AND
SINGULAR VALUE DECOMPOSITION
9
Properties of High-Dimensional Space - The Law of Large Numbers - The High-Dimensional Sphere Volumes of Other Solids - Generating Points Uniformly at Random on the Surface of a Sphere - Gaussians in
High Dimension - Bounds on Tail Probability - Applications of the tail bound - Random Projection and
Johnson-Lindenstrauss Theorem - Singular Vectors - Singular Value Decomposition - Best Rank k
Approximations - Left Singular Vectors - Power Method for Computing the Singular Value Decomposition Applications of Singular Value Decomposition - Singular Vectors and Eigenvectors.
UNIT II
RANDOM GRAPHS
9
The G(n,p) Model - Phase Transitions - The Giant Component - Branching Processes - Cycles and Full
Connectivity - Phase Transitions for Increasing Properties - Phase Transitions for CNF-sat - Nonuniform and
Growth Models of Random Graphs - Growth Models - Small World Graphs.
UNIT III
RANDOM WALKS, MARKOV CHAINS AND MACHINE LEARNING
MODELS
9
Stationary Distribution - Electrical Networks and Random Walks - Random Walks on Undirected Graphs with
Unit Edge Weights - Random Walks in Euclidean Space - The Web as a Markov Chain - Markov Chain Monte
Carlo - Areas and Volumes - Convergence of Random Walks on Undirected Graphs – Learning - Linear
Separators, the Perceptron Algorithm, and Margins - Nonlinear Separators, Support Vector Machines, and
93
Kernels - Strong and Weak Learning – Boosting - Number of Examples Needed for Prediction: VC-Dimension
- Vapnik-Chervonenkis or VC-Dimension - The VC Theorem - Simple Learning.
UNIT IV
ALGORITHMS
CLUSTERING
FOR
MASSIVE
DATA
PROBLEMS
AND
9
Frequency Moments of Data Streams - Matrix Algorithms Using Sampling - Sketches of Documents - Some
Clustering Examples - A k-means Clustering Algorithm - A Greedy Algorithm for k-Center Criterion Clustering Spectral Clustering - Recursive Clustering Based on Sparse Cuts - Kernel Methods - Agglomerative Clustering
- Dense Submatrices and Communities - Flow Methods - Finding a Local Cluster Without Examining the
Whole Graph - Axioms for Clustering.
UNIT V
TOPIC MODELS, HIDDEN MARKOV PROCESS, GRAPHICAL
MODELS, AND BELIEF PROPAGATION
9
Topic Models - Hidden Markov Model - Graphical Models, and Belief Propagation - Bayesian or Belief
Networks - Markov Random Fields - Factor Graphs - Tree Algorithms - Message Passing in general Graphs Graphs with a Single Cycle - Belief Update in Networks with a Single Loop - Maximum Weight Matching Warning Propagation - Correlation Between Variables – Rankings - Hare System for Voting - Compressed
Sensing and Sparse Vectors – Applications – Gradient - Linear Programming - Integer Optimization - SemiDefinite Programming.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
John Hopcroft, Ravindran Kannan, “Foundations of Data Science”, 2014.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Nina Zumel, John Mount, “Practical Data Science with R”, dreamtech press, Reprint Edition, 2015.
2.
Anand Rajaraman, Juriji Leskovec and Jeffrey Ullman, “Mining of Massive Datasets”, Cambridge
3.
Foster Provost, Tom Fawcett, “Data Science for Business: What You Need to Know about Data
Mining and Data-analytic Thinking”, O’Reilly Media, First Edition, 2013.
4.
Trevor Hastie, Robert Tibshirani, Jerome Friedman, “The Elements of Statistical Learning: Data
Mining, Inference and Prediction”, Springer, Second Edition, 2008.
WEB REFERENCES:
1.
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=eo2CSgmfO2I
2.
http://research.microsoft.com/en-us/people/navingo/e0-229.aspx
3.
http://columbiadatascience.com/about-the-class/
4.
https://www.coursera.org/course/datasci
15CSC17
REAL TIME SYSTEMS
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To familiarize with various performance measures and scheduling algorithms

To characterize a good real-time programming language

To understand real time databases

To provide an effective communication between various devices of a real time system

To familiarize with real time reliability techniques
94
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Apply different scheduling algorithms

Apply suitable programming constructs according to the specification

Use real time databases for efficient storage

Apply real time communication techniques and Fault tolerance techniques in networks

Exploit reliability in real time applications
PREREQUISITES:
Operating System - Principles of Programming - Fundamentals of Database Management Systems
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
7
Introduction – Issues in Real Time Computing – Structure of a Real Time System – Task Classes –
Performance Measures for Real Time Systems – Estimating Program Runtimes – Task Assignment and
Scheduling – Classical Uniprocessor Scheduling Algorithms – Uniprocessor Scheduling of IRIS Tasks – Task
Assignment - Mode Changes – Fault Tolerant Scheduling
UNIT II
PROGRAMMING LANGUAGES AND TOOLS
11
Desired Language characteristics- Data Typing- Control structures- Facilitating Hierarchical DecompositionPackages- Run-time Exception- Error handling- Overloading and Generics- Multitasking- Low Level
Programming- Task scheduling- Timing Specifications- Programming Environments- Run-time Support- Brief
survey of languages
UNIT III
REAL TIME DATABASES
9
Basic Definition- Real time Vs General Purpose Databases- Main Memory Databases- Transaction prioritiesTransaction Aborts- Concurrency Control Issues- Disk Scheduling Algorithms- Two-Phase Approach to
improve Predictability- Maintaining Serialization Consistency- Databases for Hard Real Time systems
UNIT IV
COMMUNICATION
9
Real-Time Communication – Communications Media- Network Topologies Protocols- Fault Tolerant Routing.
Fault Tolerance Techniques – Fault Types- Fault Detection – Fault Error containment Redundancy- Data
Diversity- Reversal Checks- Integrated Failure handling
UNIT V
EVALUATION TECHNIQUES
9
Reliability Evaluation Techniques – Obtaining Parameter Values- Reliability Models for Hardware
Redundancy- Software Error Models – Clock Synchronization – Clock Impact of Faults- Fault Tolerant
Synchronization in Hardware - Fault Tolerant Synchronization in Software
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
C.M. Krishna, Kang G. Shin, “Real-Time Systems”, McGraw-Hill International Editions, Third Reprint,
2010.
2.
Phillip A. Laplante, Seppo J. Ovaska, “Real-Time Systems Design and Analysis: Tools for the
Practitioner” John Wiley & Sons, Third Edition, 2011.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1 . Rajib Mall, ”Real-time systems: theory and practice”, Pearson Education, 2007
2 . R.J.A Buhur, D.L. Bailey, “ An Introduction to Real-Time Systems”, Prentice-Hall International, 1999.
3.
Philip.A.Laplante “Real Time System Design and Analysis” PHI, Third Edition, April 2004.
4.
Stuart Bennett, “Real Time Computer Control-An Introduction”, Prentice Hall PTR, Second edition,
1994.
5.
Peter D. Lawrence, “Real time Micro Computer System Design – An Introduction”, McGraw Hill,
1988.
95
6.
S.T. Allworth and R.N. Zobel, “Introduction to real time software design”, Macmillan, Second Edition,
1987.
7.
Jane W. S. Liu, “Real-time Systems”, Prentice Hall, 2000
WEB REFERENCES:
1.
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Real-time_operating_system
2.
http://www.cse.unsw.edu.au/~cs9242/08/lectures/09-realtimex2.pdf
3.
http://www.rtc-vsat.com/
4.
www.cs.helsinki.fi/u/jplindst/papers/rtds.pdf
5.
http://cs.unomaha.edu/~stanw/031/csci4510/KS-Scheduling.pdf
6.
http://w3.cs.huji.ac.il/~dolev/pubs/p89-halpern.pdf
15CSC18
VIRTUAL REALITY AND AUGMENTED REALITY
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To introduce virtual reality and input and output devices

To acquire knowledge on computing architectures and modeling

To explore VR programming and human factors

To learn various applications of VR

To get exposure on augmented reality
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Explore different input and output devices used in virtual reality system

Model the VR system

Create scene graph using different toolkits

Apply VR in various fields.

Apply visualization techniques for AR
PREREQUISITES:
Multimedia
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO VIRTUAL REALITY AND INPUT AND OUTPUT
DEVICES
9
Introduction: The three I’s of Virtual Reality - A short history of early virtual reality - Early commercial VR
technology - VR becomes an industry - The five classic components of a VR system. Input devices: ThreeDimensional position trackers - tracker performance parameters - ultrasonic trackers - optical trackers navigation and manipulation interfaces - gesture interfaces. Output devices: graphics displays - large-volume
displays - sound displays.
UNIT II
COMPUTING ARCHITECTURES AND MODELING OF A VR
SYSTEM
9
Computing architectures for VR: The rendering pipeline - The graphics rendering pipeline - The haptics
rendering pipeline - PC graphics architecture - PC graphics accelerators - Graphics benchmarks - Distributed
VR architectures - Multipipeline synchronization - Colocated rendering pipelines. Modeling: geometric
modeling - kinematics modeling - physical and behavior modeling
UNIT III
VR PROGRAMMING AND HUMAN FACTORS
9
Toolkits and scene graphs - WorldToolKit - Model geometry and appearance - The WTK scene graph Sensors and action functions - WTK networking - Java 3D - Model geometry and appearance - Java 3D
scene graph - Sensors and behaviors - Java 3D networking - WTK and Java 3D performance comparison -
96
Methodology and terminology - user performance studies - VR health and safety issues - VR and society
UNIT IV
APPLICATIONS OF VR
9
Medical applications of VR - Virtual anatomy - Triage and diagnostic - Surgery - VR in education - VR and the
Arts - Entertainment applications of VR - military VR applications - Army use of VR - VR applications in the
Navy - Air force use of VR - Applications of VR in Robotics - Robot programming - Robot teleoperation
UNIT V
AUGMENTED REALITY
9
Augmented reality: An overview: Introduction - History - Augmented reality technologies - Computer vision
methods in AR - AR devices - AR interfaces - AR systems. Visualization techniques for augmented reality:
data integration - Depth perception - Augmenting pictorial depth cues - Occlusion handling - Image based Xray visualization - Scene manipulation - Rearranging real world objects - Space-distorting visualization.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Grigore C. Burdea, Philippe Coiffet, “Virtual reality technology”, Wiley, Second Edition, 2006
2. “Handbook of augmented reality”, Borko Furht, Springer, 2011.
REFERENCE BOOK:
Sherman, William R & Craig, Alan B, “Understanding Virtual reality”, Elsevier India Private Limited,
Noida, 2008
WEB REFERENCES:
1.
http://www.cs.upc.edu/~virtual/RVA/CourseSlides/03.%20VR%20Input%20Hardware.pdf
2.
https://www.cs.uic.edu/~jbell/Courses/Eng591_F1999/HWGUIDE_NT.PDF
15CSC19
GRID AND CLUSTER COMPUTING
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To gain knowledge on Grid Computing and its applications

To study about standards like OGSA and OGSI and Globus Toolkit

To know about cluster computing and related services

To gather knowledge about fault tolerant and high performance clusters

To learn the networking and I/O in a cluster.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Explore the activities, architecture, applications and services associated with Grid Computing

Analyze the working of OGSA, OGSI and Globus toolkit

Identify the requirements and issues of cluster computing

Compare fault tolerant, high performance and metacomputing grids.

Investigate network and I/O for clusters.
PREREQUISITES:
Distributed Systems
UNIT I
GRID COMPUTING INITIATIVES AND APPLICATIONS
9
Introduction: Early Grid Activities - Current Grid Activities - An overview of Grid Business Areas - Grid
Applications - Grid Infrastructure. Grid Computing Organizations and their Roles: Organizations developing
Grid Standards and Best Practice Guidelines - Organizations developing Grid Computing Toolkits and the
Framework. Organizations building and using Grid based solutions. The Grid Computing Anatomy - The Grid
Computing Road Map - Service Oriented Architecture - Web service architecture - XML Messages and
Enveloping - Service Message Description Mechanisms - Relationship between Web Service and Grid Service
97
UNIT II
TECHNOLOGICAL VIEWPOINTS
9
Open Grid Services Architecture (OGSA) - Sample use cases - OGSA Platform Components - Open Grid
Services Infrastructure (OGSI): Technical Details of OGSI Specification - Service data Concepts - Grid Service
naming. OGSA Basic Services - GLOBUS GT3 Toolkit: Architecture.
UNIT III
CLUSTER
ISSUES
COMPUTING
REQUIREMENTS
AND
GENERAL
9
Cluster Computing at a glance - Cluster Setup and its administration: setting up the cluster - Security - System
Monitoring - System Tuning. Constructing Scalable Services: Environment - Resource Sharing - Resource
Sharing Enhanced Locality - Prototype Implementation and Extension.
UNIT IV
DEPENDABLE AND HIGH THROUGHPUT CLUSTER COMPUTING
9
Dependable Cluster Computing: Dependabilty Concepts - Cluster Architectures - Detecting and Masking
Faults -Recovering from faults - The practice of dependable Clustered Computing. Deploying a High
Throughput Computing Cluster: Condor Overview - Software development - System Administration.
Metacomputing: Need for metacomputing - Evolution - Design Objectives and Issues - Metacomputing
Projects - Emerging Metacomputing Environments.
UNIT V
NETWORKING AND I/O IN CLUSTERS
9
High Speed Networks: Design Issues - Fast Ethernet - High Performance Parallel Interface - Asynchronous
Transfer Mode - Scalable Coherent Interface - Servernet - Myrinet - Memory Channel - Synfinity. Parallel I/O
for Clusters: Parallel I/O Problem - Methods and Techniques - Architecture and Systems. Representative
Cluster Systems: Beowulf - COMPaS: A Pentium Pro PC Based SMP Cluster.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
Joshy Joseph & Craig Fellenstein, “Grid Computing”, Pearson Education 2004.
2.
R. Buyya, High Performance Cluster Computing: Architectures and Systems, Volume 1, Pearson
Education, 2008.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Maozhen Li, Mark Baker, The Grid Core Technologies, John Wiley & Sons ,2005
2.
Fran Berman, Geoffrey Fox, Anthony J.G. Hey, “Grid Computing: Making the Global Infrastructure a
reality”, John Wiley and sons, 2003
3.
Ian Foster and Carl Kesselman, The Grid: Blueprint for a New Computing Infrastructure, Morgan
Kaufmann, Elsevier, 2004.
4.
Ahmar Abbas, “Grid Computing: Practical Guide to Technology & Applications”, Firewall Media, 2004.
5.
Chakrabarti, Grid Computing Security, Springer, 2007.
6.
B.Wilkinson, Grid Computing: Techniques and Applications, CRC Press, 2009.
7.
D. Janakiram, Grid Computing, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2005.
8.
S. R. Prabhu, Grid and Cluster Computing, PHI, 2008.
9.
Donald J. Becker, John Salmon, Daniel F. Savarese and Thomas Sterling, “How to Build a BeowulfA Guide to the Implementation and Application of PC Clusters”, The MIT Press, 1999
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.gridcomputing.com/
2. http://toolkit.globus.org/toolkit/
3. http://www.codeproject.com/Articles/11709/Cluster-Computing
4. https://www.linux.com/community/blogs/133-general-linux/9401
5. http://www.cray.com/products/computing/cs-series
6. https://www.ogf.org
98
15CSC20
NATURAL LANGUAGE PROCESSING
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To know the basic concepts of natural language processing and language modelling

To learn the word level and syntax analysis techniques.

To understand the working of semantic analysis and discourse processing

To familiar with natural language generation and machine translation

To study about information retrieval techniques and lexical resources
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Construct the various language models

Analyze the natural language text using word level and syntactic methods

Examine the semantic analysis and discourse processing for the natural language text

Generate the natural language and apply machine translation techniques.

Apply information retrieval techniques and evaluate the lexical resources
PREREQUISITES:
Principles of Compilers
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION AND LANGUAGE MODELING
9
Introduction: Origins and challenges of NLP - Language and Grammar - Processing Indian Languages - NLP
Applications - Information Retrieval. Language Modeling: Various Grammar-based Language Models Statistical Language Model.
UNIT II
WORD LEVEL AND SYNTACTIC ANALYSIS
9
Word Level Analysis: Regular Expressions - Finite-State Automata - Morphological Parsing - Spelling Error
Detection and correction - Words and Word classes - Part-of Speech Tagging. Syntactic Analysis: Contextfree Grammar – Constituency – Parsing - Probabilistic Parsing.
UNIT III
SEMANTIC ANALYSIS AND DISCOURSE PROCESSING
9
Semantic Analysis: Meaning Representation - Lexical Semantics – Ambiguity - Word Sense Disambiguation.
Discourse Processing: Cohesion - Reference Resolution - Discourse Coherence and Structure.
UNIT IV
PRAGMATICS
9
Reference Resolution – Reference Phenomena – Pronoun Interpretation – Pronoun Resolution Algorithm –
Text Coherence – Discourse Structure – Dialogue Acts – Types of Interpretation of Dialogue - Generation –
Introduction – Architecture – Surface Realization – Discourse Planning – Machine Translation – Metaphor –
Syntactic Transformations – Lexical Transfers – Direct \ Statistical Translation
UNIT V
NATURAL LANGUAGE GENERATION AND MACHINE TRANSLATION
9
Natural Language Generation: Architecture of NLG Systems - Generation Tasks and Representations Application of NLG. Machine Translation: Problems in Machine Translation - Characteristics of Indian
Languages - Machine Translation Approaches - Translation involving Indian Languages- Lexical Resources:
WordNet – FrameNet - Stemmers - POS Tagger - Research Corpora.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
Tanveer Siddiqui, U.S. Tiwary, “Natural Language Processing and Information Retrieval”, Oxford
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Daniel Jurafsky and James H Martin, “Speech and Language Processing: An introduction to Natural
Language Processing, Computational Linguistics and Speech Recognition”, 2nd Edition, Prentice
Hall, 2008.
99
2.
James Allen, “Natural Language Understanding”, 2nd edition, Benjamin /Cummings publishing
company, 1995.
WEB REFERENCES:
1.
2.
http://www.tutorialspoint.com/artificial_intelligence/artificial_intelligence_natural_language_processin
g.htm
3.
http://nlp.stanford.edu/
4.
http://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical-engineering-and-computer-science
15CSC21
DESIGN PATTERNS
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To understand the common design patterns.

To learn to code using creational patterns.

To study the various structural patterns.

To learn to identify appropriate behavioral patterns.

To learn the architectural patterns for software architecture.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Select appropriate design patterns.

Design code using creational Patterns

Design Software by following standard principles/practices using structural patterns

Select and apply suitable behavioral patterns in specific contexts.

Follow Architectural Patterns while deciding on the software architecture
PREREQUISITES:
Object Oriented Analysis and Design
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO DESIGN PATTERNS
9
Introduction - Design Pattern - Design Patterns in Smalltalk MVC - Describing Design patterns - Catalog of
Design Patterns - Organizing the Catalog - How Design Patterns Solve Design Problems - How to select a
Design Pattern - How to use a Design Pattern.
UNIT II
CREATIONAL PATTERNS
9
Abstract Factory - Builder - Factory Method - Prototype - Singleton - Case Studies applying Creational
Patterns
UNIT III
STRUCTURAL PATTERNS
9
Adapter - Bridge - Composite - Decorator - Facade - Flyweight - Proxy - Case Studies applying Structural
Patterns
UNIT IV
BEHAVIORAL PATTERNS
9
Chain of Responsibility - Command - Interpreter - Iterator - Mediator - Memento - Observer - State - Strategy Template Method - Visitor - Case Studies applying Behavioral Patterns
UNIT V
ARCHITECTURAL PATTERNS
9
Patterns and Software Architecture - Architectural Patterns: Layers, Pipes and Filters, Blackboard - Distributed
Systems - Adaptable Systems - Enabling Techniques for Software Architecture - The Pattern Community.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
Erich Gamma, Richard Helm, Ralph Johnson, John Vlissides, “Design patterns: Elements of
100
Reusable Object - Oriented Software”, Addison-Wesley, 1995.
2.
Frank Bachmann, Regine Meunier, Hans Rohnert,et.al “Pattern Oriented Software Architecture A
System of Patterns” Volume 1, John Wiley, 1996.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Mark Grand ,” Patterns in Java: A Catalog of Reusable Design Patterns Illustrated with UML, Volume
1”, Wiley, Second edition, 2002
2.
William J Brown et al., "Anti-Patterns: Refactoring Software, Architectures and Projects in Crisis",
John Wiley, 1998.
WEB REFERENCES:
1.
https://sourcemaking.com/design_patterns
2.
http://www.tutorialspoint.com/design_pattern/index.htm
3.
http://www.blackwasp.co.uk/GofPatterns.aspx
15CSC22
INTRODUCTION TO MACHINE LEARNING
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
Course Objectives:

To study the basics of machine learning

To learn linear models

To understand distance based clustering techniques

To know about tree and rule based models

To understand ensemble learning
Course Outcomes:

Explore the concepts of machine learning

Apply the linear modelling techniques to solve a problem

Work with distance based clustering techniques

Build tree and rule based models

Apply ensemble learning techniques
PREREQUISITES:
Partial differential Equations, Matrices
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Machine learning - Task : problems solved with machine learning,
Looking for structure, performance
evaluation - Models: Geometric models, Probabilistic models, Logical models, Grouping and grading -Features
- Binary Classification : Classification, Scoring and ranking, Class probability estimation - Handling more than
two classes – Regression-Movie genre identification and rating system
UNIT II
LINEAR MODELS
9
Concepts: Supervised, Unsupervised and Descriptive learning - Hypothesis space - Linear classification –
univariate linear regression – multivariate linear regression – logistic regression – perceptron – multilayer
neural networks – learning neural networks structures – support vector machines- Credit card approval system
UNIT III
DISTANCE-BASED MODELS
9
Distance and measure - Neighbours and exemplars - Nearest neighbour classification - Distance based
clustering: K-means algorithm, clustering around medoids – clustering using kernels - silhouettes –
hierarchical clustering –Document clustering
UNIT IV
TREE AND RULE MODELS
9
Decision trees – learning decision trees – ranking and probability estimation trees – regression trees –
clustering trees – learning ordered rule lists – learning unordered rule lists – descriptive rule learning – first-
101
order rule learning- spam filtering
UNIT V
MODEL ENSEMBLES
9
Features : Kinds of feature, Feature transformation , Feature Construction and Selection - Ensemble learning:
bagging and random forests – Boosting: Boosted rule learning - Mapping the ensemble landscape : Bias,
variance, margin, other ensemble methods - Meta learning –Diabetes diagnosis system.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
P. Flach, “Machine Learning: The art and science of algorithms that make sense of data”, Cambridge
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
K. P. Murphy, “Machine Learning: A probabilistic perspective”, MIT Press, 2012.
2.
C. M. Bishop, “Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning”, Springer, 2007.
3.
M. Mohri, A. Rostamizadeh, and A. Talwalkar, “Foundations of Machine Learning”, MIT Press, 2012
WEB REFERENCES:
1.
http://ocw.mit.edu
2.
https://www.coursera.org/learn/machine-learning/
3.
http://archive.ics.uci.edu/ml/
4.
www.nptel.ac.in
5.
www.imdb.com
15ITC14
SERVICE ORIENTED ARCHITECTURE
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To study the importance of Service Oriented Architecture.

To learn to implement SOA in the J2EE and .Net environment

To study the advanced features of SOA

To be familiar with java web services

To study extended web services for SOA
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Identify how the components are interrelated in SOA.

Able to develop a simple web services using SOA principles

Apply various activity management and a series of composition techniques for SOA

Implement the various services using J2EE

Apply various Web Service specification standards
PREREQUISITES:
NIL
UNIT I
SOA AND BUSINESS PROCESS MANAGEMENT CONCEPTS
9
Service Oriented Enterprise – Service Oriented Architecture (SOA) – SOA and Web Services – MultiChannel Access – Business Process management – Extended Web Services Specifications – Overview
of SOA – Concepts – Key Service Characteristics – Technical Benefits – Business Benefits
UNIT II
SOA AND WEB SERVICES
9
Web Services Platform – Service Contracts – Service-Level Data Model – Service Discovery – Service-Level Security
– Service-Level Interaction patterns – Atomic Services and Composite Services – Proxies and Skeletons –
Communication – Integration Overview – XML and Web Services - .NET and J2EE Interoperability – Service-
102
Enabling Legacy Systems – Enterprise Service Bus Pattern – Creating simple web services
UNIT III
SOA AND MULTICHANNEL ACCESS
9
Multi-Channel Access – Business Benefits – SOA for Multi Channel Access – Tiers – Business Process Management
– Concepts – BPM - SOA and Web Services – WS- BPEL – Web Services Composition
UNIT IV
JAVA WEB SERVICES ARCHITECTURE
9
Java Web Service Developer pack– JAXP- Architecture-SAX-DOM-XSLT-JDOM-JAX RI – JAX-RPC-Service Model JAX RPC and J2EE - JAXM – JAXM Architecture –JAXR - Registries and Repositories – JAXR Architecture – JAXR
Information Model - JAXB – Architecture – Developing with JAXB - XML to Java mapping – JAXB API - Validation
with JAXB – Customizing JAXB.
UNIT V
EXTENDED WEB SERVICES SPECIFICATION
9
Metadata Management - Metadata Specification - Policy – Metadata exchange – Web Services Security -Core
concepts – Challenges - Threads and Remedies – Message Level Security – Data Level Security – Advanced
Messaging – Reliable Messaging - Notification – Transaction Management - Protocols and Specification –
Transaction Specification
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Eric Newcomer, Greg Lomow, “Understanding SOA with Web Services”, First Edition, Pearson
Education, 2005
2. James McGovern, Sameer Tyagi, Michael E Stevens, Sunil Mathew, “Java Web Services
Architecture”, Elsevier, 2003
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Thomas Erl, “Service Oriented Architecture”, Pearson Education, 2005.
2. Frank Cohen, “Fast SOA”, Elsevier, 2007.
3. Scott Campbell, Vamsi Mohun, “Mastering Enterprise SOA”, W iley, 2007.
4. Eric Pulier, Hugh Taylor, “Understanding Enterprise SOA”, Dreamtech Press, 2007.
5. Jeff Davies, “The Definitive Guide to SOA”, Apress, 2007.
6. Sandeep Chatterjee, James Webber, “Developing Enterprise Web Services”, Pearson Education,
2004.
WEB REFERENCES:
1.
http://www.service-architecture.com/web-service/articles/service
oriented_architecture_soa_definition.html
2.
http://www. W3.orh/TR/soap12-part1/
3.
http://www.w3.org/TR/ws-arch/
4.
http://www.whatissaoa.com/
5.
http://www.ibm.com/developerworks/webservices/library/ws-soadl/
6.
http://xml.coverpages.org/Burdett-WSChoreographyJune032003.pdf
7.
http://download.oracle.com/javaee/1.4/tutorial/doc/JAXR2.html
8.
http://java.sun.com/developer/technicalArticles/xml/jaxb/
9.
http://java.ociweb.com/mark/JavaUserGroup/JAXB.pdf
10. http://java.sun.com/xml/downloads/jaxrpc.html
103
15ITC15
AD HOC AND SENSOR NETWORKS
(Common to CSE and IT)
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To study about the fundamentals and different types of Adhoc routing protocols

To learn about the QoS aware Adhoc routing protocols

To study about power and energy management in adhoc networks

To understand the basics of Sensor Networks, its architecture and Protocols

To understand the nature, applications and security issues of sensor networks
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Apply various MAC protocols for Ad hoc networks

Interpret issues in unicast and multicast routing protocols

Infer the need for energy management and review the working of transport layer protocols

Apply wireless sensor networks to solve given scenarios

Identify the suitable MAC and Routing protocols for sensor networks
PREREQUISTES:
Computer Networks and Programming
UNIT I
ADHOC NETWORKS FUNDAMENTALS AND MAC PROTOCOLS
8
Issues in Ad hoc wireless networks – Ad hoc Wireless Internet - Issues in Design of MAC Protocols – Design
Goals – MAC Protocol Classifications – Contention-Based MAC Protocols – Reservation Mechanisms –
Scheduling Mechanisms – Using Directional Antennas – Other MAC Protocols – MAC Layer QoS Solutions
UNIT II
ADHOC NETWORKS ROUTING PROTOCOLS
12
Issues in Routing Protocol - Challenges in providing QoS – Classification of Routing Protocols – Table Driven
Routing Protocols (DSDV, CGSR, OLSR) – On-Demand Routing Protocols (DSR, AODV, TORA) – Hybrid
Protocols (CEDAR, ZRP) – Hierarchical Routing Protocols(HSR, FSR) - Efficient Flooding Mechanisms –
Power-Aware Routing Protocols – Architecture Reference Model for Multicast Routing Protocols –
Classifications – Tree-Based Multicast Routing Protocols – Mesh-Based Multicast Routing Protocols – EnergyEfficient Multicasting – Multicasting with QoS Guarantees
UNIT III
ADHOC NETWORKS TRANSPORT LAYER PROTOCOLS AND
ENERGY MANAGEMENT
8
Issues in Design of Transport Layer Protocols – Design Goals – TCP over Ad hoc – Other Transport Layer
Protocols – Need for Energy Management in Ad Hoc Wireless Networks – Classification of Energy
Management Schemes – Battery Management Schemes – Transmission Power Management Schemes –
System Power Management Schemes.
UNIT IV
WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORKS
9
Motivation – Challenges and Constraints – Ad-hoc Vs sensor networks – Sensing Subsystem – Processor
Subsystem – Communication Interfaces – Prototypes - Sensor Network architecture– Applications of sensor
networks – Enabling Technologies for Wireless Sensor Networks – Data Dissemination – Data Gathering –
Location discovery – Quality of Sensor Networks
UNIT V
SENSOR NETWORKS MAC AND ROUTING PROTOCOLS
8
Characteristics of MAC & Routing Protocols in Sensor Networks – Contention-Free MAC Protocols (TRAMA,
LEACH) – Contention-Based MAC Protocols (SMAC, TMAC) – Hybrid MAC (ZMAC) – Routing Metrics –
Flooding and Gossiping – Data centric Routing – Location Based Routing – QoS Based Routing
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
104
TEXTBOOK:
C. Siva Ram Murthy and B.S.Manoj, “Ad hoc Wireless Networks – Architectures and Protocols’,
Pearson Education, 2004
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Erdal Çayırcı , Chunming Rong, “Security in Wireless Ad Hoc and Sensor Networks”, John Wiley and
Sons, 2009
2.
Waltenegus Dargie, Christian Poellabauer, “Fundamentals of Wireless Sensor Networks Theory
and Practice”, John Wiley and Sons, 2010.
3.
Carlos De Morais Cordeiro, Dharma Prakash Agrawal, “Ad Hoc and Sensor Networks: Theory and
Applications”, World Scientific Publishing, Second Edition, 2011.
4.
Holger Karl & Andreas Willig, “Protocols And Architectures for Wireless Sensor Networks”, John
Wiley, 2005.
5.
C.K.Toh, “Adhoc Mobile Wireless Networks”, Pearson Education, 2002.
6.
Feng Zhao and Leonidas Guibas, “Wireless Sensor Networks”, Morgan Kaufman Publishers,
2004.
7.
Adrian Perrig, J. D. Tygar, "Secure Broadcast Communication: In Wired and Wireless Networks",
Springer, 2006
8.
Fraser Cadger et al.,”A Survey of Geographical Routing in Wireless Ad-Hoc Networks”, IEEE
Communications Surveys & Tutorials, Vol. 15, No. 2, Second Quarter 2013
9.
Bo Sun et al., “Intrusion Detection Techniques in Mobile Ad Hoc and Wireless Sensor Networks”,
IEEE Wireless Communications, October 2007
10. Carlos de Morais Cordeiro et al., “Multicast over Wireless Mobile Ad Hoc Networks :Present and
Future Directions”, IEEE Network , January/February 2003
WEB REFERENCES:
1.
http://www.cs.jhu.edu/~cs647/intro_adhoc.pdf
2.
http://www.ece.ncsu.edu/wireless/Resources/Papers/adhocSurvey.pdf
3.
http://dsn.tm.kit.edu/medien/publications-tutorials/AdHoc-RoutingMac-Tutorial-MoMuC-Muenchen.pdf
4.
http://people.cs.vt.edu/~hamid/Mobile_Computing/papers/frodigh_ericsson00.pdf
5.
http://www.olsr.org/docs/wos3-olsr.pdf
6.
http://cwi.unik.no/images/Manet_Overview.pdf
7.
http://people.ece.cornell.edu/~haas/Publications/NM-zhou-haas-1999-11+12.pdf
8.
http://www.netlab.tkk.fi/opetus/s38030/k02/Papers/12-Petteri.pdf
9.
http://ceng.usc.edu/~bkrishna/research/talks/WSN_Tutorial_Krishnamachari_ICISIP05.pdf
10.
http://www.isi.edu/~johnh/PAPERS/Estrin99e.pdf
11.
http://courses.cs.tamu.edu/rabi/cpsc617/resources/sensor%20nw-survey.pdf
12.
http://nesl.ee.ucla.edu/tutorials/mobicom02/slides/Mobicom-Tutorial-4-DE.pdf
15ITC16
CLOUD COMPUTING
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To understand the concept and issues of cloud and utility computing

To familiarize the types of virtualization

To understand various cloud service models

To know the lead players in cloud

To appreciate the emergence of cloud as the next generation computing paradigm
105
COURSE OUTCOMES :

Realize the architecture, challenges and reference models of cloud computing

Apply virtualization techniques

Apply suitable resource management techniques to cloud infrastructure

Implement Cloud programming models

Use Cloud services for different applications
PREREQUISITES:
Distributed System
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION, PRINCIPLES AND ARCHITECTURE
9
Cloud Computing : Reference model - characteristics and challenges – historical development – building cloud
computing environment – Computing platforms and Technologies – Parallel Vs distributed computing –
Elements of parallel and distributed computing – Technologies for distributed computing - Cloud Computing
Architecture : NIST Cloud Computing Reference Architecture – Types of Clouds - economics – Open
challenges.
UNIT II
VIRTUALIZATION
7
Characteristics of virtualized environments - Taxonomy of virtualization techniques - Execution virtualization Machine reference model - Hypervisors - Hardware virtualization techniques - Operating system-level
virtualization - Application-level virtualization - Virtualization and cloud computing - Pros and cons of
virtualization - Technology examples - Xen: Para-virtualization - VMware: Full virtualization and binary
translation - Microsoft Hyper-V - Management of Virtual Machines for Cloud infrastructure – Anatomy –
distributed management – scheduling techniques – Capacity management to meet SLA commitment.
UNIT III
CLOUD INFRASTRUCTURE AND RESOURCE MANAGEMENT
9
Cloud Computing and Services Model – Public, Private and Hybrid Clouds – Cloud Eco System – IaaS - PaaS
– SaaS - Architectural Design of Compute and Storage Clouds – Layered Cloud Architecture Development –
Design Challenges - Inter Cloud Resource Management – Resource Provisioning and Platform Deployment –
Global Exchange of Cloud Resources - Resource Scheduling for cloud computing – Economic Models for
resource allocation – Heuristics models for task execution – Real time scheduling in cloud computing.
UNIT IV
CLOUD PROGRAMMING AND SOFTWARE ENVIRONMENT
11
Cloud capabilities and platform features – data features and databases - Parallel and Distributed Programming
Paradigms – MapReduce – Mapping Applications - Google App Engine - Amazon AWS – Microsoft Azure Cloud Software Environments – Eucalyptus - Open Nebula - OpenStack – Cloudsim programming. Case
Study: Amazon Web Service – GoGrid - Rackspace.
UNIT V
CLOUD APPLICATIONS
9
Amazon web services - Compute services - Storage services - Communication services - Google App Engine
- Architecture and core concepts. Application life cycle - Cost model – Observations - Microsoft Azure - SQL
Azure – Salesforce.com - Scientific Applications –Business and Consumer Applications - Energy efficiency in
clouds - Market-based management of clouds - Federated clouds / InterCloud - Third-party cloud services Trust - Reputation and Security management
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
Kai Hwang, Geoffrey C Fox, Jack G Dongarra, “Distributed and Cloud Computing, From Parallel
Processing to the Internet of Things”, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 2012.
2.
Rajkumar Buyya, Christian Vecchiola. S.Thamarai Selvi, “Mastering Cloud Computing”, McGraw Hill
Education, 2013.
3.
Frederic Magoules, Jie Pan, Fei Tang, “Cloud Computing: Data-Intensive Computing and
Scheduling” CRC press, Taylor and Francis, 2013.
106
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Rajkumar Buyya, James Broberg, Andrzej Goscinski, “Cloud Computing :Principles and Paradigms”,
Wiley, 2012
2.
George Reese, “Cloud Application Architectures: Building Applications and Infrastructure in the
Cloud” O'Reilly
3.
Ronald L. Krutz, Russell Dean Vines, “Cloud Security – A comprehensive Guide to Secure Cloud
Computing”, Wiley – India, 2010.
4.
John W.Rittinghouse and James F.Ransome, “Cloud Computing: Implementation, Management, and
Security”, CRC Press, 2010.
WEB REFERENCES:
1.
http://aws.amazon.com/
2.
http://www.cloudbus.org/
3.
http://www.ibm.com/cloud-computing/in/en/
4.
https://www.openstack.org/
5.
https://www.youtube.com/user/OpenStackFoundation/videos
CORE ELECTIVE - VI (for Semester VIII)
15CSC23
SOFTWARE QUALITY AND TESTING
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To learn the basics and goals of software testing

To study various methods of unit and white box testing techniques

To understand integration, system and acceptance testing techniques

To introduce the software quality standards for establishing quality environment

To understand the methods and evaluation procedures for improving the quality models
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Choose the right type of software testing process for any given real world problem

Carry out the unit and white box software testing process

Implement integration, system and acceptance testing techniques

Use software quality standards for developing quality software

Analyze and improve the quality procedures through continuous improvement process
PREREQUISITES:
UNITI
INTRODUCTION
8
Basics Concepts of Software Testing and Quality Assurance - Theory of Program Testing: Basic Concepts in
Testing Theory - Theory of Goodenough and Gerhart - Theory of Weyuker and Ostrand - Theory of Gourlay Adequacy of Testing - Limitations of Testing - Testing Techniques: Black Box - White Box - Gray Box testing Manual vs Automated Testing - Static vs Dynamic Testing - Taxonomy of Software Testing Techniques
UNITII
UNIT AND WHITE BOX TESTING
9
Unit Testing - Control Flow Testing: Control Flow Graph - Paths in a Control Flow Graph - Path Selection
Criteria - Generating Test Input - Examples of Test Data Selection - Containing Infeasible Paths
Data Flow Testing: Data Flow Graph - Data Flow Testing Criteria - Comparison of Data Flow Test Selection
Criteria - Feasible Paths and Test Selection Criteria - Comparison of Testing Techniques
UNITIII
INTEGRATION, SYSTEM AND ACCEPTANCE TESTING
10
Integration Testing: Different Types of Interfaces and Interface Errors - Granularity of System Integration
107
Testing - System Integration Techniques - Software and Hardware Integration - Test Plan for System
Integration - Off-the-Shelf Component Integration
System Test: System Test Categories, Functional Testing: Functional Testing Concepts of Howden Complexity of Applying Functional Testing - Pairwise Testing - Equivalence Class Partitioning - Boundary
Value Analysis - Decision Tables - Random Testing - Error Guessing - Category Partition
Acceptance Testing: Types - Acceptance Criteria - Selection of Acceptance Criteria - Test Plan - Test
Execution - Test Report - Acceptance Testing in eXtreme Programming
UNITIV
SOFTWARE QUALITY MODELS
9
Software quality -Verification versus Validation- Components of Quality Assurance - SQA Plan - Quality
Standards - McCall’s Quality Factors and Criteria - Capability Maturity Model and its levels - People
Capability Maturity Model - CMM-Integration - Test Process Improvement - Testing Maturity Model - ISO
9126 Quality Characteristics - ISO 9000:2000 Software Quality Standard - Malcolm Baldrige National Quality
Award
UNITV
QUALITY THROUGH CONTINUOUS IMPROVEMENT PROCESS
9
Role of Statistical Methods in Software Quality: Cause-and-Effect Diagram, Flow Chart, Pareto Chart, Run
Chart, Histogram, Scatter Diagram, Control Chart - Deming’s Quality Principles - Continuous
Improvement through Plan Do Check Act (PDCA) process - Quality Management Systems: Terms Elements - Key to Quality management - QMS for software
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
KshirasagarNaik, PriyadarshiTripathy, “Software Testing and Quality Assurance -Theory and
Practice”, John Wiley & Sons publication, 2011
2.
William E.Lewis, “Software Testing and Continuous Quality Improvement”, Auerbach Publications,
Third edition, 2011
3.
Alan C Gillies, “Software Quality Theory and Management”, Cengage Learning, Second Edition, 2011
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Ron Patton, “Software testing”, Second edition, Pearson Education, 2007
2.
Elfriede Dustin, Jeff Rashka, John Paul, “Automated
Management and Performance”, Addison-Wesley, 1999
3.
William E. Perry, “Effective Methods for Software Testing”, Wiley India, Second Edition, 2006.
Software
Testing:
Introduction,
WEB REFERENCES:
1.
http://www.etestinghub.com/introduction_to_testing.php
2.
http://www.guru99.com/software-testing.html
3.
http://www.tutorialspoint.com/software_testing/software_testing_qa_qc_testing.htm
4.
http://www.guru99.com/all-about-quality-assurance.html
15CSC24
INFORMATION STORAGE AND RETRIEVAL
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To study information storage system, data protection and intelligent storage system

To learn various storage networking technologies and virtualization

To study the backup, recovery and replication techniques

To identify the components of an information retrieval system

To understand the factors which optimize the information retrieval process
108
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Distinguish the information and intelligent storage system

Explore the various storage networking technologies and virtualization

Analyse the backup and recovery, local and remote replication

Compare different information retrieval models

Evaluate existing information retrieval systems
PREREQUISITES:
Data Structures, Computer Networks
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO INFORMATION STORAGE SYSTEM AND
DATA PROTECTION
9
Introduction - Information Storage - Evolution of Storage Technology and Architecture - Data Center
Infrastructure - Key Challenges in Managing Information - Information Lifecycle. Storage System Environment:
Components of a Storage System Environment - Disk Drive Components - Disk Drive Performance - Data
Protection: RAID - Implementation of RAID- RAID Array Components - RAID Levels - RAID Comparison RAID Impact on Disk Performance - Applications.
UNIT II
INTELLIGENT STORAGE SYSTEM AND STORAGE NETWORKING
TECHNOLOGIES
9
Intelligent Storage System: Components of an Intelligent Storage System - Intelligent Storage Array - DirectAttached Storage and Introduction to SCSI: Types of DAS - DAS Benefits and Limitations - Disk Drive
Interfaces - Introduction to Parallel SCSI - Storage Area Networks: Fibre Channel - SAN Evolution Components of SAN - FC Connectivity - Fibre Channel Ports - Fibre Channel Architecture - Zoning - Fibre
Channel Login Types - FC Topologies - Network-Attached Storage: Benefits - NAS File I/O - Components of
NAS - NAS Implementations - NAS File-Sharing Protocols.
UNIT III
STORAGE VIRTUALIZATION, BACKUP
LOCAL AND REMOTE REPLICATION
AND
RECOVERY,
9
Storage Virtualization: Forms of Virtualization - SNIA Storage Virtualization Taxonomy - Storage Virtualization
Configurations - Storage Virtualization Challenges - Types of Storage Virtualization - Backup Purpose Considerations - Granularity - Methods - Process - Backup and Restore Operations - Backup Topologies Backup in NAS Environments - Backup Technologies - Local Replication: Data Consistency - Technologies Restore and Restart Considerations - Creating Multiple Replicas - Remote Replication: Modes - Technologies
- Network Infrastructure.
UNIT IV
INTRODUCTION TO INFORMATION RETRIEVAL
9
Boolean retrieval - Vocabulary and posting lists: Document delineation and character sequence decoding Determining the Vocabulary of terms - Faster posting list intersection via skip pointers - Positional posting and
phrase queries - Dictionaries and tolerant retrieval: Wildcard queries - Spelling correction - Phonetic
correction.
UNIT V
INFORMATION RETRIEVAL AND EVALUATION
9
Index Construction: Hardware basics - Blocked sort-based indexing - single-pass in-memory indexing Distributed indexing - Dynamic indexing - Other types of indexes - Index Compression: Statistical properties of
terms in information retrieval - Dictionary compression -Evaluation in information retrieval: Information retrieval
system evaluation - Standard test collections - Evaluation of unranked retrieval sets - Evaluation of ranked
retrieval results - Assessing relevance.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
G. Somasundaram, Alok Shrivastava, “Information Storage and Management”, EMC Corporation,
Wiley Publication, 2009.
2.
Christopher D. Manning, Prabhakar Reghavan and Hinrich Schutze, “Introduction to Information
109
Retrieval”, Cambridge University, 2008.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Gerald J. Kowalski, Mark T. Maybury, “Information Storage and Retrieval Systems”, Kluwer
Academic Publishers, 2002.
2.
C. Manning, P. Raghavan and H.Schutze, “Information Retrieval”, Cambridge University Press, 2008.
3.
Ricardo Baeza - Yates and Berthier Ribeiro - Neto, Modern Information Retrieval: The Concepts and
Technology behind Search, ACM Press Books, Second Edition, 2011.
WEB REFERENCES:
1.
https://www.itracs.com.
2.
http://www-nlp.stanford.edu/IR-book/
3.
https://developer.mozilla.org/en/docs/Web/Guide/API/DOM/Storage
15CSC25
HUMAN COMPUTER INTERACTION
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To study the effectiveness of interacting with computers

To understand the principles and goals of usability

To learn the various models that can be used for designing systems

To understand the importance of design techniques

To learn to design dialog for representation
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Use the Human Computer Interaction(HCI) principles while developing software

Evaluate the performance of interactive systems in terms of usability

Identify the appropriate design model for HCI

Design experiments and analyse interaction

Postulate appropriate interaction styles
PREREQUISITES:
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION AND DESIGN PROCESS
9
Human: Memory - Reasoning and Problem Solving - Emotion - Psychology and design of interactive systems Computer: Devices - Memory - Processing and networks - Interaction process: Models for interaction Frameworks and HCI - Ergonomics - Interaction and interactivity - Paradigms for interaction - Interaction
Designing basics Usability Engineering - Iterative Design - Design Rules - Evaluation Techniques Universal Design
UNIT II
USABILITY
9
Usability of interactive systems: Usability requirements - Usability measures - Usability motivations - Goals Guidelines - Principles - Theories - Object - Action Interface Model
UNIT III
MODELS
9
Cognitive model: Goal and Task hierarchies - linguistic models - Physical and device models - cognitive
architectures - Socio technical models - Communication and Collaboration models: Face to Face
communication - Conversation - Text based communication - Group working - Task models - Task analysis
and design.
UNIT IV
EXPERIMENTAL DESIGN AND ANALYSIS OF HCI
9
Experimental Research - Types - Hypothesis - Independent and Dependent variables in HCI - Basic
components - Limitations - Designing Experiments - Choosing the design approach - Survey - benefits - target
110
users - Developing survey questions - Data Analysis.
UNITV
INTERACTION STYLES
9
Direct Manipulation - Virtual environment - 3D Interfaces - Teleoperations - Virtual and augmented reality Menu Selection - Form Fillin - Dialog boxes - Dialog semantics - Dialog Analysis and design - collaboration
and Social media participation - Modelling rich interaction
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
Alan Dix, Janet Finlay, Gregory Abowd, Russell Beale, “Human Computer Interaction”, Prentice Hall,
3rd Edition, 2004.
2.
B. Shneiderman, “Designing the User Interface”, Addison Wesley, fifth edition, 2010.
3.
Jonathan Lazar Jinjuan Heidi Feng, Harry Hochheiser, “Research Methods in Human- Computer
Interaction”, Wiley, 2010(Unit-IV).
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Julie A. Jacko (Ed), The Human-Computer Interaction Handbook. CRC Press, (3rd edition), 2012
2.
M.G. Helander,Handbook of Human-Computer Interaction, Elsevier, 2014
3.
Andrew Sears, Julie A. Jacko,Human-Computer Interaction: Development Process, CRC Press, 2009
4.
Andrew Sears, Julie A. Jacko,Human-Computer Interaction: Design Issues, Solutions, and
Applications, CRC Press, 2009.
WEB REFERENCES:
1.
2.
http://hci.bham.ac.uk/
3.
www.hcibook.com/e3/online
15ITC33
SOFTWARE DEFINED NETWORKS
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To gain knowledge of the various network operations

To learn the functions of a SDN, and its architecture

To understand the internals of a SDN and get an experience of designing such systems

To learn about behavior of the network at different conditions
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Apply the knowledge of network operations to SDN

Apply SDN for real world scenarios

Apply the knowledge of SDN to data center

Apply the knowledge of software defined networks to open source framework

Develop simple applications for SDN
PREREQUISITES:
Computer Networks
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO SOFTWARE DEFINED NETWORKS
9
Virtualization – Server virtualization – Storage virtualization – Defining SDN – Need for SDN – Evolution of
switched and control Planes – Cost – Increased cost of development– Increased cost of operating the network
– Implications for research and innovation – Data center innovation– Compute and storage virtualization–
Inadequacies in Networks – Needs – Genesis of SDN – Forerunners of SDN – Centralized and distributed
control planes and data planes
111
UNIT II
WORKING OF SDN
9
Working of SDN – Fundamental characteristics– SDN operation – SDN devices – SDN controller – Core
modules – Interfaces – Existing SDN controller – Issues with the SDN controller – SDN applications –
Alternate SDN methods – Open flow – switch specification - Channel - Controller modes - Configuration and
management protocol – Drawbacks of open SDN
UNIT III
SDN IN DATA CENTER
9
Data center concepts and constructs – SDN in data center – Data center definition – Data Center Demands –
Tunneling technologies – Virtual extensible LAN – GRE – Stateless transport tunneling – Path technologies –
General multipath routing issues – Multiple spanning tree protocol –Shortest path bridging – Equal-cost
multipath – Shortest-path complexity – Ethernet fabrics – SDN use cases in data center – Open SDN Vs.
Overlays in data center – Data center implementation – SDN in other environment
UNIT IV
TOPOLOGY AND FRAMEWORK
9
Network topology and topological information abstraction - Traditional methods – LLDP - BGP-TE/LS - BGPLS with PCE – ALTO - BGP-LS and PCE interaction with ALTO - I2RS Topology - Juniper SDN framework –
IETF SDN framework – Open Daylight controller/Framework - SDN evolution - Enterprise networks Transport networks - Optical transport networks - Scalable SDN - SDN management
UNIT V
APPLICATIONS AND FUTURE TRENDS
9
SDN applications – SDN open source – Terminology – Issues – Profile – OpenStack – Applying SDN open
source – Business ramifications – EaS – Classifying SDN vendors – Impact on incumbent NEMs – Impact on
enterprise consumers – Major SDN acquisitions – SDN startups – SDN futures – Current state of affairs–
Applications of open SDN– Physical layer links – Programming techniques to networks – Security applications
– Roaming in mobile networks – Traffic engineering in mobile networks – Energy savings – SDN-enabled
switching chips
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
Paul Goransson, Chuck Black, “Software Defined Networks: A Comprehensive Approach” , Morgan
Kaufmann, 2014
2.
Patricia A. Morreale, James M. Anderson, “Software Defined Networking: Design and Deployment”,
CRC Press, 2014
3.
Thomas D. Nadeau, Ken Gray , “SDN: Software Defined Networks”, Oreilly, 2013
REFERENCE BOOK:
Siamak Azodolmolky, "Software Defined Networking with OpenFlow", packt publishing, 2013
WEB REFERENCES:
1.
http://noise.gatech.edu/classes/cs8001-sdn/fall2013/
2.
https://sites.google.com/site/sdnreadinglist/
3.
http://www.brocade.com/solutions-technology/technology/software-defined-networking/index.page
4.
http://www.cisco.com/web/IN/solutions/trends/sdn/index.html
5.
https://www.coursera.org/course/sdn1
ALLIED ELECTIVES – SYLLABUS
Offered by Civil Department
15CEA01
INDUSTRIAL POLLUTION PREVENTION AND CONTROL
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To understand the concept of sustainability.

To know environmental regulations.
112
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3

To realize the environmental pollution

To understand the air pollution control methods

To know the principles of water treatment
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the students will be able to

Identify the importance of sustainability and its indicators, strategies and barriers.

Implement the environmental regulations, policies and Regulations for clean environment

Familiarize the pollution and its regulating standards

Apply the different air pollution control methods gases and particulates

Apply the principles of water treatment and recovery methods.
COURSE PREREQUISITE:
Knowledge on Environmental Science
UNIT I
SUSTAINABILITY
9
Industrial activity and environment - Industrialization and sustainable development - Indicators of sustainabilitySustainability strategies - Barriers to sustainability - Pollution prevention in achieving sustainability
UNIT II
ENVIRONMENTAL REGULATIONS
9
Prevention vs. control of industrial pollution - Environment policies and Regulations to encourage pollution
prevention - Environment friendly chemical processes - Regulations for clean environment and implications for
industries
UNIT III
POLLUTION
9
Definition of pollutant - Types of pollution - Air - Water - Land - Noise - Adverse effects of pollutants eco system
and human health - Need for effluent treatment and toxicity control - Standards for portable water - Agricultural
and left-off streams- Air standards for cities - Industrial areas and Resorts.
UNIT IV
AIR POLLUTION CONTROL METHODS
9
Particulate Emission Control- Gravitational Settling Chambers- Cyclone separators - Fabric filters - Electrostatic
Precipitators - Wet scrubbers - Absorbers - Control of sulphur di oxide - Oxides of nitrogen - Carbon monoxide
and hydrocarbons - Noise pollution measurements and its control.
UNIT V
PRINCIPLES OF WATER TREATMENT
9
Primary, secondary and tertiary treatments - Advanced waste water treatments - Recovery of metals from
process effluents
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
Bishop.P, "Pollution Prevention: Fundamentals and Practice", McGraw Hill International, McGraw Hill Book
Co., Singapore, 2010
2.
Freeman.H.M, "Industrial Pollution Prevention Hand Book", McGraw Hill, 1995
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Rose.G.R.D, “Air pollution and Industry”, Van No strand Reinhold Co., New York 1972
2.
Pandey.G.N and Carney.G.C, “Environmental Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi,1989
3.
James. G. Mann and Liu.Y.A, "Industrial Water Reuse and Waste WaterMinimization", McGraw Hill, 1999
EXTENSIVE READING:
th
Kapoor.B.S, “Environmental Engineering”, 5 Edition, Khanna publishers, 2012
WEB REFERENCES:
http://www.tutorialspoint.com/
113
15CEA02
INTRODUCTION TO ENGINEERING SEISMOLOGY
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To impart the basic knowledge about the Engineering Seismology

To create the awareness about the earthquake recording instruments and seismic records

To instruct the knowledge about the earthquake hazards and seismic hazard assessment

To understand the various seismic hazard analysis

To introduce the different types of risk and vulnerability assessment
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Categorize the various components of engineering seismology

Identify the different types of seismic recording instruments

Classify the various earthquake hazards and seismic hazard assessment

Do the various seismic hazard analysis

Analyze the types of risk and vulnerability
Knowledge on basics on earthquake
UNIT I
ENGINEERING SEISMOLOGY
9
Introduction to engineering seismology - Terminologies and definitions - Earthquake types - Overview of plate
tectonics - Earthquake source mechanisms - Source models - Types of faults - Activity and fault studies Concepts of seismic magnitudes and intensity -Earthquake size, different magnitude scales and relations, Theory
of wave propagation - Seismic waves, body and surface waves.
UNIT II
EARTHQUAKE RECORDING INSTRUMENTS
9
Earthquake recording instrumentations - Concept of seismograph - Seismic station - Sensors and data loggers Mechanical and digital sensors - Interpretation of Seismic Records -Acceleration, Velocity and Displacement Frequency and Time Domain parameters - Response Spectra and Spectral parameters - Epicentre and
magnitude determination.
UNIT III
EARTHQUAKE HAZARDS AND SEISMIC HAZARD ASSESSMENT
9
Introduction to earthquake hazards -Strong ground motions and site effects - World great Earthquakes - Large
and Damaging Earthquakes of India - Instruction to seismic zones and codes - Global and National seismic
hazard assessment mapping programs - Safety of individual site - Concept of seismic micro zonation - Need for
Micro zonation - Types and Scale – Methodology.
UNIT IV
SEISMIC HAZARD ANALYSIS
9
Introduction to Seismic Hazard Analysis- Methods - Deterministic and Probabilistic - Attenuation models and
Simulation of Strong Ground Motion - Introduction to Site characterization - Different methods and experiments Geotechnical properties - Site classification and worldwide code recommendation.
UNIT V
RISK CLASSIFICATIONS AND MAPPING
9
Concept of site response - Local site effects and evaluation methods - Ground motion amplifications and
estimation - Development of response /design spectrum - Introduction to liquefaction - Mechanism and factors
causing liquefaction - estimation methods and procedures- Mapping - Earthquake induced landslide - Landslide
hazard mapping - Tsunami hazard and Consideration for Tsunami hazard mapping.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
st
Stein, S., and M. Wysession, “An Introduction to Seismology, Earthquakes, and Earth Structure”, 1 edition,
Malden, MA: Blackwell, September 2003.
114
Steven L Kramer, “Geotechnical Earthquake Engineering”, Pearson Education, 2003
2.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Bozorgnia, Y. and Bertero, V.V., “Earthquake Engineering - From Engineering Seismology to Performance Based Engineering” CRC Press, Washington, 2004.
2.
Leon Reiter, “Earthquake hazard Analysis - Issues and Insights”, Columbia University Press, New York,
1990.
3.
Havskov, J. and Alguacil, G.,“Instrumentation in Earthquake Seismology”,Springer,Netherlands, 2004.
EXTENSIVE READING:
Judith Petts, “Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment Vol. I & II”, Blackwell Science, 1999
WEB REFERENCES:
1.
http://nisee.berkeley.edu/
2.
http://www.ethiopians.com/earthquake_engineering_resources.htm
15CEA03
SOLAR ENERGY UTILIZATION
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To enable the students to acquire knowledge of solar radiation data and its measurement.

To explain the concept of various forms of solar thermal systems.

To create basic knowledge on direct steam generation systems.

To learn the maintenance and implementation of solar photovoltaic.

To recognize the latest heat energy storages in buildings.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course the students will be able to,

Recognize the concepts of solar radiation data and its measurement.

Understand the working process of various solar thermal systems.

Appreciate the principles of solar parabolic concentrators and direct steam generation systems.

Know the importance of solar photovoltaic maintenance and their implementation.

Identify the orientation and design of buildings by using latest heat energy storages.
Knowledge on energy conservation
UNIT I
SOLAR RADIATION
9
Sun and earth geometry- Solar radiation- Beam and diffuse radiations- Measurement of solar radiation –
Pyranometer-Pyrheliometer- Sunshine recorder-Solar collectors and applications.
UNIT II
SOLAR THERMAL SYSTEMS
9
Flat plate and evacuated tube collectors- Domestic hot water and process heat systems- Solar cooker- Solar
dryer-Solar desalination and solar pond.
UNIT III
SOLAR POWER PLANT
9
Principles of solar parabolic concentrators- Trough and dish types- Compound parabolic concentrators- Fresnel
lens collectors- Central receiver plant- Direct steam generation systems-Solar furnaces.
UNIT IV
SOLAR PHOTOVOLTAICS
9
Solar photovoltaic theory- Mono and polycrystalline silicon technologies- PV modules and integrated systemsimplementation and maintenance.
115
UNIT V
SOLAR-CONSCIOUS BUILDINGS
9
Orientation and design of buildings- Passive solar heat- Thermal capacity -Insulation- Solar cooling-refrigeration
and air-conditioning- Space heating- Sensible and latest heat energy storages in buildings.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1.
Sukhatme.K, Suhas P. Sukhatme, “Solar energy: Principles of thermal collection and storage”, Tata McGraw
Hill publishing Co. Ltd, 8th edition, 2008.
2.
Soteris A. Kalogiru, “Solar Energy Engineering: Processes and systems”, First edition, Academic press,
2009.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
rd
1.
Duffie.J.A, &Beckman.W.A, “Solar Engineering of Thermal Processes”, 3 edition, John Wiley & Sons, Inc.,
2006.
2.
Martin A. Green, “Third generation Photovoltaics: Advanced energy conversion”, 1st edition, 2005.
3.
Garg.H.P, Prakash.J, “Solar energy fundamentals and applications”, Tata McGraw Hill publishing Co. Ltd,
2006.
4.
Yogi Goswami.D, Frank Kreith, Jan F.Kreider, “Principle of solar engineering”, 2nd edition, Taylor and
Francis, 2nd edition, 2000.
5.
Tiwari.G.N, “Solar energy: Fundamentals, Design, Modeling and Applications”, CRC Press Inc., 2002.
15CEA04
ENVIRONMENTAL GEOTECHNOLOGY
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To understand the physics and chemistry of soil

To know inorganic and organic geochemistry.

To realize contaminant fate and transport in soil

To understand the soil remediation technologies

To find the principles behind site selection and methods of disposal
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Classify theIndex properties, classification and exchange capacity.

Analyse the inorganic and organic geochemistry and Distribution of metals in soils

Identify the contaminant fate and transport in soil

Apply the soil remediation technologies available in the affected soil

Procure idea in site selection and disposal methods
Knowledge on basic soil mechanics
UNIT I
PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY OF SOIL
9
Soil formation - Composition - soil fabric - Mass volume relationship - Index properties and soil classification Hydraulic and consolidation characteristics - Chemical properties - Soil pH - Surface charge and point of zero
charge - Anion and Cation exchange capacity of clays - Specific surface area - Bonding in clays - Soil pollution Factors governing soil - Pollutant interaction.
UNIT II
INORGANIC AND ORGANIC GEOCHEMISTRY
9
Inorganic Chemistry - Metal contamination - Distribution of metals in soils - Geochemical processes controlling
the distribution of the metals in soils - Chemical analysis of metal in soil - Organic geochemistry - Organic
116
contamination - Distribution of NAPLs in soils - Process controlling the distribution of NAPLs in soil - Chemical
analysis of NAPLs in soils.
UNIT III
CONTAMINANT FATE AND TRANSPORT IN SOIL
9
Transport processes - Advection - Diffusion - Dispersion - Chemical mass transfer processes - Sorption and
desorption - Precipitation and dissolution - Oxidation and reduction - Acid base reaction - Complexation - Ion
exchange - Volatilization - Hydrolysis - Biological process - Microbial transformation of heavy metals.
UNIT IV
SOIL REMEDIATION TECHNOLOGIES
9
Contaminated site characterization – Containment – Soil vapor extraction – Soil washing – Solidification and
stabilization – Electro-kinetic remediation – Thermal desorption – Vitrification – In-situ and Ex-situ Bioremediation
– Phytoremediation – Soil fracturing – Biostimulation – Bioaugumentation – Chemical oxidation and reduction.
UNIT V
SITE SELECTION AND METHODS OF DISPOSAL
9
Criteria for sites for waste disposal facilities – Current practices for waste disposal – Sub surface techniques –
Passive contaminant system – Leachate contamination – Application of geo-membranes – Rigid and flexible
membrane liners
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Calvin Rose, “An introduction to the Environmental Physics of Soil, Water and Water Sheds”, Cambridge
2. Paul Nathanail C. and Paul Bardos R., “Reclamation of contaminated Land”, John Wiley & Sons Limited,
2004.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Hari D. Sharama and Krishna R.Reddy, “Geo-Environmental Engineering: Site Remediation, Water
Contamination and Emerging Water Management Technologies”, John Wiley & Sons Limited, 2004.
2. Marcel Vander Perk, “Soil and Water contamination from Molecular to catchment Scale”, Taylor &Franncis,
2006.
EXTENSIVE READING:
William J. Deutsch, “Groundwater Geochemistry: Fundamentals and Applications to Contamination”, Lewis
Publishers, 1997.
WEB REFERENCES:
http://www.tutorialspoint.com/
15CEA05
PRINCIPLES OF GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

Introduce students to the basic principles of Global Positioning System

Familiarize with GPS signals and data

Impart knowledge on GPS data processing

Know about various errors in GPS data

provide students with the skills required to link locational data to certain projections and present same as
maps
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course students will be able to

Acquaint with the fundamentals of Global Positioning System

Employ various methods to collect GPS data by receiving signals from receiver

Perform basic GPS receiver operation and data processing
117

Check the accuracy of GPS data and able to do necessary adjustments.

Produce a simple map from field data acquired using hand-held GPS
Knowledge on Surveying
UNIT I
FUNDAMENTALS OF GPS
9
Components of GPS - GPS receivers - Reference coordinates systems - Datum, geoid, ellipsoid, WGS 84
system –Time and signal propagation through atmosphere- Their modelling and estimation - Satellite orbit
andEngineering Applications.
UNIT II
GPS SIGNALS AND DATA
9
Navigational data - Collection methods - static positioning, kinematic positioning, Pseudo - Kinematic and stop
and go methods -Observation planning and strategy.
UNIT III
GPS OBSERVABLES
9
Pseudo range and carrier phase parameters - Estimations, data handling, cycle slip detection and correction,
ambiguity resolution- GPS data processing -Single, Double and Triple differences.
UNIT IV
ERRORS IN GPS DATA
9
Satellite geometry -Errors in different segments - Multipath errors - accuracy of GPS data and measures Network adjustments.
UNIT V
DATUM TRANSFORMATION AND DIFFERENTIAL GPS
9
Reduction of observation -Transformation to various map projection systems - Real time kinematic GPS -Multiple
reference stations -Virtual reference stations.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
Satheesh, Gopi, “Global Positioning System and its Applications”, McGraw Hill, 2005.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Leick, A., “GPS Satellite Surveying”, John Wiley, 2004
2.
Kaplan, E.D. and Hegarty, C.J., “Understanding GPS: Principles and Applications”, Artech House, 2006
3.
Gunter, S., „Satellite Geodesy“, 2
15CEA06
nd
Ed., WalterbdeGruyter, 2003.
NON-CONVENTIONAL ENERGY RESOURCES
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To enable the students to acquire the knowledge of with various sources of Non-conventional energy
such as solar wind, small hydro, ocean & wave energy

To understand the working of solar thermal power plants

To know various aspects of geo-thermal energy

To have knowledge in wind and Thermo-electrical energy

To have exposure on biomass energy management
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the curse student will be able to

Learn fundamentals of solar radiation geometry, application of solar energy

Selection of sites for wind farm, different types of wind generators.

Realize the basic of small hydro, ocean & wave energy.

Have knowledge in geo-thermal energy
118

Appreciate bio mass energy management
Knowledge on alternate energy resources
UNIT I
NON-CONVENTIONAL ENERGY RESOURCES
9
Various non-conventional energy resources- Introduction, availability, classification, relative Merits and Demerits Solar Cells - Theory of solar cells - Solar cell materials -Solar cell array -Solar cell power plant -Limitations.
UNIT II
SOLAR THERMAL ENERGY
9
Solar radiation- Flat plate collectors and their materials - Applications and performance - Focussing of collectors
and their materials -Applications and performance -Solar thermal power plants - Thermal energy storage for solar
heating and cooling - Limitations.
UNIT III
GEOTHERMAL ENERGY
9
Resources of geothermal energy - Thermodynamics of geo-thermal energy conversion- Electrical conversion and
non-electrical conversion -Environmental considerations - Magneto-hydrodynamics (MHD) - Principle of working
of MHD Power plant - performance and limitations - Fuel Cells - Principle of working of various types of fuel cells
and their working, performance and limitations.
UNIT IV
WIND ENERGY
9
Wind Energy - Wind power and its sources- Site selection- Criterion - Momentum theory- Classification of rotorsConcentrations and augments- Wind characteristics- Performance and limitations of energy conversion systems Thermo-electrical and thermionic Conversions - Principle of working - Performance and limitations.
UNIT V
BIO-MASS
9
Bio-mass - Availability of bio-mass and its conversion theory - Ocean Thermal Energy Conversion (OTEC) Availability, theory and working principle -Performance and limitations -Wave and Tidal Wave - Principle of
working -Performance and limitations -Waste Recycling Plants.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
John Twideu and Tony Weir, “Renewal Energy Resources” BSP Publications, 2006.
2.
M.V.R. KoteswaraRao, “Energy Resources: Conventional & Non-Conventional”, BSP Publications, 2006.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
D.S. Chauhan, “Non-conventional Energy Resources”, New Age International, 2002
2.
C.S. Solanki, “Renewal Energy Technologies: A Practical Guide for Beginners”, PHI Learning, 2006
3. Raja, “Introduction to Non-Conventional Energy Resources”,SciTech Publications, 2008
EXTENSIVE READING:
Peter Auer, "Advances in Energy System and Technology - Vol. 1 & 2", Academic Press, 2005.
15CEA07
ENERGY CONSERVATION AND MANAGEMENT
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To enable the students to acquire the knowledge of energy conservation measures.

To understand conservation measures in steam systems

To know energy conservation aspects of fluid machinery

To have knowledge in electrical energy conservation in various industries

To have exposure on energy management
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course student will be able to
119
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3

Have knowledge of energy conservation measures

Appreciate conservation measures in steam systems

Realize energy consumption and energy saving potentials

Have knowledge on electrical energy conservation

Practice energy management
Knowledge on energy conservation
UNIT I
ENERGY CONSERVATION PRINCIPLES
9
Energy scenario - Principles of energy conservation - Resource availability - Energy savings - Current energy
consumption in India - Roles and responsibilities of energy managers in industries.
UNIT II
ENERGY CONSERVATION IN STEAM SYSTEMS
9
Power plant components, conservation measures in steam systems - Losses in boiler - Methodology of upgrading
boiler performance - Blow down control - Excess air control - Pressure reducing stations - Condensate recovery Condensate pumping - Thermo compressors - Recovery of flash steam - Air removal and venting - Steam traps Cooling towers.
UNIT III
ENERGY CONSERVATION IN FLUID MACHINERY
9
Centrifugal pumps - Energy consumption and energy saving potentials - Design consideration - Minimizing over
design - Fans and blowers -Specification - Safety margin - Choice of fans - Controls and design considerations Air compressor and compressed air systems - Selection of compressed air layout - Energy conservation aspects
to be considered at design stage.
UNIT IV
ELECTRICAL ENERGY CONSERVATION
9
Potential areas for electrical energy conservation in various industries - Conservation methods - Energy
management opportunities in electrical heating, lighting system - Cable selection - Energy efficient motors Factors involved in determination of motor efficiency - Adjustable AC drives - Variable speed drives - Energy
efficiency in electrical system.
UNIT V
ENERGY MANAGEMENT
9
Organizational background desired for energy management persuasion -Motivation - Publicity role, Tariff analysis
- Industrial energy management systems - Energy monitoring - Auditing and targeting - Economics of various
energy conservation schemes – Energy policy and energy labelling.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
st
1.
Reay.D.A, “Industrial energy conservation”, Pergamon Press, 1 edition, 2003.
2.
White.L.C, “Industrial Energy Management and Utilization”, Hemisphere Publishers, 2002.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Smith.C.B, “Energy Management Principles”, Pergamon Press, 2006.
2.
Trivedi.P.R and Jolka.K.R, “Energy Management”, Common Wealth Publication, 2002.
EXTENSIVE READING:
Hamies, “Energy Auditing and Conservation;Methods, Measurements,Management and Case study”,
Hemisphere, 2003.
15CEA08
ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To understand the concepts of sustainability and EIA
120
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3

To expose the students to the need, methodology of EIA

To realize the documentation and application of Environmental Impact Assessment

To Understand the pollution control methods

To develop the skill to prepare Environmental Management Plan
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course student will be able to

Identify the impact on environment by the Infrastructural projects

Impart the knowledge in legal and regulatory aspect in India according to MoEF.

Comprehend the various components of EIA and its methods.

Appreciate the Methodologies, prediction and Assessment.

Prepare Environmental Management plan for Infrastructure engineering project.
Knowledge on environmental science
UNIT I
BASIC FUNDAMENTALS COMPONENTS OF EIA
9
Historical Development of Environmental Impact Assessment - EIA in Project Cycle - Legal and Regulatory
Aspects in India - Types and Limitations of EIA - Cross Sectorial Issues and terms of references in EIA - Public
Participation in EIA.: EIA Process- Screening and Scoping - Setting - Analysis and Mitigation.
UNIT II
METHODOLOGY
9
Matrices - Networks - Checklists - Connections and Combinations of Processes-Cost benefit analysis - Analysis
of Alternative - Software Packages for EIA - Expert Systems in EIA.
UNIT III
PREDICTION AND ASSESSMENT
9
Prediction tools for EIA - Mathematical modelling for impact prediction - Assessment of Impacts on Air, Water and
Soil - Assessment of Impacts on Biological Community - Cumulative Impact Assessment - Documentation of EIA
findings -Report Preparation.
UNIT IV
SOCIO-ECONOMIC IMPACT ASSESSMENT
9
Definition of Social Impact Assessment - Social Impact Assessment model and the planning process - Rationale
and measurement for SIA variables- Relationship between social impacts and change in community and
institutional arrangements - Individual and family level impacts - Communities in transition - Neighbourhood and
community impacts - Selecting, testing and understanding significant social impacts - Mitigation and
enhancement in social assessment - Environmental costing of projects.
UNIT V
ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN
9
Environmental Management Plan - Preparation - EMP - Implementation and Review - Mitigation and
Rehabilitation plans - Policy and guidelines for planning and monitoring programmes - Post Project Audit - Ethical
and Quality aspects of Environmental Impact Assessment - Case Studies - EIA related to infrastructure,
Construction and Housing - Mining - Industrial Projects - Thermal Power - River Valley and Hydroelectric- Coastal
Projects -Nuclear Power.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
Petts, J., “Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment, Vol., I and II”, Blackwell science, London, 1999.
2.
Canter, L.W., “Environmental Impact Assessment”, McGraw Hill, New York, 1996
REFERENCE BOOK:
Lawrence, D.P., “Environmental Impact Assessment – Practical Solutions to recurrent problems”, WileyInterscience, New Jersey, 2003.
121
15CEA09
FUNDAMENTALS OF SUPPLY CHAIN
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To introduce the fundamentals of the supply chain.

To provide knowledge on designing the supply chain network

To provide exposure on various types of facility location and network design

To impart knowledge on planning and managing of inventories in a supply chain.

To provide experience on sourcing, transportation and pricing products.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the students will be able to;

Comprehend the concepts behind the supply chain network.

Design the supply chain network.

Locate the facilities and design the network.

Plan and manage the inventories in a supply chain.

Do the sourcing, transportation and pricing products.
Knowledge on Engineering Economics & Cost analysis
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO SUPPLY CHAIN
9
Supply chain systems -Stages and decision phases and process view of supply chain - Supply chain flows Examples of supply chains -Competitive supply chain strategies -Drivers for supply chain performance.
UNIT II
DESIGNING THE SUPPLY CHAIN NETWORK
9
Distribution Networking –Role, Design - Supply Chain Network - SCN – Role –Factors -Framework for design
decisions.
UNIT III
FACILITY LOCATION AND NETWORK DESIGN
9
Models for facility location and capacity location - Impact of uncertainty on SCN -Discounted cash flow analysis Evaluating network design decisions using decision trees - Analytical problems.
UNIT IV
PLANNING AND MANAGING OF INVENTORIES IN A SUPPLY CHAIN
9
Inventory concepts -Trade promotions -Managing multi-echelon cycle inventory -Safety inventory determination Impact of supply uncertainty aggregation and replenishment.
UNITV
SOURCING, TRANSPORTATION AND PRICING PRODUCTS
9
Role of sourcing -Supplier- Scoring and assessment - Selection and contracts -Design collaboration -Role of
transportation -Models of transportation and designing transportation network - Revenue management.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
Blanchard, D., “Supply chain management: Best practices”, John Wiley &Sons,New Jersey,2007.
2.
Simchi-Levi, David, Xin Chen, and JulienBramel, “The Logic of Logistics: Theory, Algorithms, and
nd
Applications for Logistics and Supply Chain Management” 2 edition. Springer, New York, 2004.
REFERENCE BOOK:
Graves, S. C., and A. G. De Kok, “Handbook in operations research and management science” Vol. 11,
Elsevier Publishing Company, 2003.
122
15CEA10
COASTAL ENGINEERING
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To provide knowledge on various aspects of coastal engineering

To provide an overview of the analysis and design procedures used in the field of coastal engineering

To understand the various issues connected with coastal sediment transport

To familiarize with planning and design of various coastal protection works

To impart knowledge on various types of modeling aspects
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Acquire knowledge on wave theory

Apply these engineering principles to solve the problems

Understand the basic concepts of coastal sediment transport

Design shore defense structures

Develop site specific physical and numerical models
Knowledge on Water Resources Engineering
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO COASTAL ENGINEERING
9
Introduction - Wind and waves - Sea and Swell - Introduction to small amplitude wave theory -Use of wave
tables- Mechanics of water waves - Linear (Airy) wave theory.
UNIT II
WAVE PROPERTIES AND ANALYSIS
9
Introduction to non-linear waves and their properties - Waves in shallow waters - Wave Refraction - Diffraction
and Shoaling - Hinds east wave generation models -Wave shoaling -Wave refraction -Wave breaking - Wave
diffraction random and 3D waves- Short term wave analysis -Wave spectra and its utilities - Long term wave
analysis- Statistics analysis of grouped wave data
UNIT III
COASTAL SEDIMENT TRANSPORT
9
Dynamic beach profile -Cross-shore transport -Along shore transport (Littoral transport) -Sediment movement
UNIT IV
COASTAL DEFENSE
9
Field measurement -Models, groins, sea walls, offshore breakwaters and artificial nourishment -Planning of coast
protection works - Design of shore defence structures –Case studies
UNIT V
MODELING IN COASTAL ENGINEERING
9
Physical modeming in Coastal Engineering - Limitations and advantages - Role of physical modelling in coastal
engineering - Numerical modelling - Modelling aspects -Limitations - Case studies using public domain models
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1.
US Army Corps of Engineers, “Coastal Engineering Manual, Vol. I-VI”, Coastal Engineering Research
Centre, Department of the Army, Washington DC, 2006.
2.
Kamphuis, J.W. “Introduction to Coastal Engineering and Management”, 2000.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
US Army Corps of Engineers, “Coastal Engineering Manual, Vol. I-VI”, Coastal Engineering Research
Centre, Department of the Army, Washington DC, 2006.
2.
Kamphuis, J.W. “ Introduction to Coastal Engineering and Management”, 2000
3.
Dean, R.G. and Dalrymple, R.A. “ Water wave mechanics for Engineers and Scientists”, Prentice-Hall, Inc.,
123
Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey, 1994
4.
Sorenson, R.M. “Basic Coastal Engineering”, Wiley-Interscience Publication, New York, 1978.
15CEA11
MANUFACTURING COST ESTIMATION
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To understand the basics of cost estimation and different types of cost estimating methods.

To impart clear knowledge on cost and various factory expenses.

To gain knowledge on budget and measures of cost economics.

To compute the cost estimation in different shops.

To calculate machining time and cost for the different process.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Comprehend the different types of cost estimating methods.

Gain knowledge on calculating cost and expenses of various factory processes.

Acquire knowledge on measures of cost economics and able to create budget for the industry.

Calculate the process cost involved in different shops.

Work out machining time and cost for the different process.
Knowledge on Estimation
UNIT I
COST ESTIMATION
9
Objective of cost estimation- Costing -Cost accounting- Classification of cost-Elements of cost- Types of
estimates -Methods of estimates -Data requirements and sources- Collection of cost- Allowances in estimation.
UNIT II
COSTS AND EXPENSES
9
Aims of costing and estimation - Functions and procedure - Introduction to costs- Computing material cost- Direct
labor cost-Analysis of overhead costs - Factory expenses-Administrative expenses-Selling and distributing
expenses - Cost ladder - Cost of product.
UNIT III
COST ECONOMICS
9
Budget -Need and Types - Budgetary control - Objectives and Benefits - Measures of cost economics - Make or
buy decision and Analysis - Depreciation - Causes of depreciation -Methods of Depreciation - Allocation of
overheads.
UNIT IV
ESTIMATION OF COSTS IN DIFFERENT SHOPS
9
Estimation in Forging shop - Losses in forging - Forging cost-Estimation in welding shop - Gas cutting - Electric
welding-Estimation in foundry shop - Pattern cost - Casting cost - Illustrative examples.
UNIT V
ESTIMATION OF MACHINING TIMES AND COSTS
9
Estimation of machining time for lathe operations - Drilling, Boring, Shaping, Planning, Milling and Grinding
operations - Illustrative examples.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
R. Kesavan, C. Elanchezhian, B. VijayaRamanath, “Process Planning And Cost Estimation”, New Age
International (P) Ltd., Second Edition, 2015
2.
Chitale.A.K and Gupta.R.C, “Product Design and manufacturing”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, Sixth
Edition, 2013.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Adithan. M, “Process Planning And Cost Estimation”, New Age International (P) Ltd., Second Edition, 2015.
124
2.
Banga.T.R and Sharma.S.C, “Mechanical Estimating and Costing including contracting”, Khanna publishers,
New Delhi, 2012.
3.
Joseph G. Monks, “Operations Management, Theory and Problems”, McGraw Hill Book Company, New
Delhi, 2001.
4.
Narang.G.B.S and Kumar.V, “Production and Planning”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, Fourth edition 2010.
5.
Adithan.M. and Pabla.B.S, “Estimating and costing for the Metal Manufacturing Industries”, CRC press,
1992.
Offered by EEE Department
15EEA01
INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge on

Measurement of force, torque and speed.

Measurement of industrial parameters like acceleration, Vibration and density.

Monitoring techniques for pressure in industrial process.

Advanced techniques for temperature and high temperature measurement.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Analyze Instrumentation systems and explain their applications to various industries.

Measure the changes in pressure, temperature in an industry.
COURSE PREREQUISITES:
Basics of measurements standards – Instrumentation system – Basic knowledge on industrial process.
UNIT I
CHARACTERISTICS, ERRORS & STANDARDS OF INSTRUMENTS
9
Functional elements of generalized instrumentation systems- Static and dynamic characteristics of measuring
instruments- Absolute, gross, systematic, random and limiting errors in measurements - Statistical estimation of
measurements data (Arithmetic mean, Average deviation, Standard deviation, Variance and Probable error of
mean) – Standards and calibration.
UNIT II
MEASUREMENT OF ACCELERATION, VIBRATION AND FORCE
9
Accelerometers: - LVDT, Piezoelectric, Strain gauge and Variable reluctance type accelerometers - Seismic
instruments as accelerometer - Vibration sensor. Different types of load cells - Hydraulic, Pneumatic, strain
gauge and Piezoelectric load cells
UNIT III
PRESSURE MEASUREMENT
9
Units of pressure – Manometers and their types,-McLeod Gauge-Elastic type pressure gauges: Bourdon tube,
bellows and diaphragms - Capacitive type pressure gauge – Piezo-resistive pressure sensor- Thermal
conductivity gauges – Ionization gauge - calibration of pressure gauges. Dead weight tester.
UNIT IV
LOW TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT
9
Definitions and standards - Primary and secondary fixed points - Calibration of thermometers - Different types of
filled in system thermometers - Bimetallic thermometers - RTD - characteristics and signal conditioning-3 lead
and 4 lead RTDs - Thermistors.
UNIT V
HIGH TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT
9
Thermocouples - Laws of thermocouple - Fabrication of industrial thermocouples – Compensating cable- Signal
conditioning for thermocouple - Radiation fundamentals - Radiation methods of temperature measurement - Total
radiation pyrometers - Optical pyrometers.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
125
TEXTBOOKS:
3. Doebellin, E.O.and Manik D.N., “Measurement systems Application and Design”, Special Indian Edition,
Tata McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd, 2007.
4. Jones. B.E, "Instrument Technology”, Vol.2, Butterworth-Heinemann, International Edition, 2003.
5. A. K. Sawhney, Puneet Sawhney, “Course in Mechanical Measurements and Instrumentation and
Control”, Dhanpat Rai & Sons, New Delhi, 2013.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
3.
Liptak, B.G., “Instrumentation Engineers Handbook (Measurement)”, CRC Press, 2005
4.
Patranabis,D., “Principles of Industrial Instrumentation”, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
Company Ltd., New Delhi, 2010.
5.
Eckman D.P., “Industrial Instrumentation”, Wiley Eastern Limited, 2003.
6.
S.K.Singh., “Industrial Instrumentation and Control”, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw - Hill Education, 2008.
7.
Jain, R.K., “Mechanical and Industrial Measurements”, Khanna Publishers, Delhi, 1999.
15EEA02
ILLUMINATION ENGINEERING
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To impart in-depth knowledge on illumination and requirements of energy efficient lighting.

To make the students familiar with measurement of illumination.

To make the students design a lighting scheme.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to

Explicate the different types of lighting schemes.

Elucidate the measurement of light.

Explain the working of different lamps.

Demonstrate the ability to design illumination systems for desired specifications.

Demonstrate the awareness of impact of energy conservation approach to illumination systems.
Basics of Electrical Engineering, awareness about artificial lighting, Energy Conservation, Algebra, Trigonometry.
UNIT I
LIGHTING FUNDAMENTALS
9
Nature of light – Importance of lighting – sensitivity of eye – colour sensation – Quantum theory of light – Terms
used in illumination – Polar Curve – Laws of illumination – Illumination at a point – Types of reflection – Types of
lighting schemes – Requirements of good lighting – Stroboscopic effect – Factory lighting – Flood lighting –
Street lighting.
UNIT II
PHOTOMETRY
9
Grease Spot Photometer Head – Lummer - Brodhun Photometer Head – Flicker Photometer – Measurement of
MSCP by Integrating Sphere – Photovoltaic cell – Distribution photometry – Illumination Photometer.
UNIT III
LAMPS AND FITTINGS
9
Filament lamps – Arc lamps – Fluorescent lamps – Mercury Vapour lamps – Sodium Vapour lamps – Halogen
lamps – Neon lamps – Induction lamps – Emergency Lamps – lighting for displays and signaling – neon signs,
Lamp fittings – Symmetrical fittings, Asymmetrical fittings.
UNIT IV
LIGHTING DESIGN AND CALCULATIONS
9
Basic design of illumination schemes for residential, commercial, street lighting, and sports ground. Selection of
lamps – Calculation of wattage, number and arrangement of lamps – Space height ratio – Calculation of
illumination level available.
126
UNIT V
ENERGY EFFICIENT LAMPS AND WIRING METHODOLOGY
9
Compact Fluorescent Lamp (CFL) – Selection of CFL – Lumens output – Disposal of waste CFL – Limitations of
CFL – Cold Cathode CFL, LED – Terminologies – Choice of LED Lamps for different lighting requirements –
Benefits of LED lighting – CFL Vs LED lighting, 12V DC home wiring – Solar powered lamps – Importance –
Constraints in 12V DC wiring – Voltage Regulation devices – wiring and distribution, Necessary Appliances.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
Joseph B. Murdoch, "Illumination Engineering from Edison's Lamp to the Laser, second edition, Visions
Comm., 1994.
2.
Jack L. Lindsey, "Applied Illumination Engineering" The Fairmont Press Inc., 1991.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Ronald N. Helms, M. Clay Beicher, "Lighting for Energy Efficient Luminous Environments", Prentice
Hall, 1991.
2.
Marc Schiler, "Simplified Design of Building Lighting" John Wiley and Sons, 1992.
3.
IES Lighting Handbook, 8th edition, 1993.
4.
C.L. Wadhwa, ‘Generation, Distribution and Utilization of Electrical Energy’, New Age International Pvt.
Ltd, Third Edition 2015.
5.
J.B. Gupta, ‘Utilization of Electric Power and Electric Traction’, S.K.Kataria and Sons, Eleventh Edition
2015.
6.
G.C.Garg, ‘Utilization of Electric Power and Electric Traction’, Khanna Publishers, Ninth Edition 2009.
7.
A.Chakrabarti, M.L.Soni, P.V.Gupta, U.S.Bhatnagar, ‘A text Book on Power System Engineering”,
Dhanpat Rai and Co, New Delhi, 2009.
WEB REFERENCES:
1.
http://energy.gov/energysaver/articles/induction-lighting-old-lighting-technology-made-new-again
2.
http://www.buildings.com/article-details/articleid/18718/title/led-vs-induction-lighting/viewall/true.aspx
3.
http://www.edisontechcenter.org/InductionLamps.html
4.
http://eartheasy.com/live_energyeff_lighting.htm
5.
http://dreamgreenhouse.com/designs/12v/index.php
6.
http://www.treehugger.com/sustainable-product-design/big-steps-in-building-change-our-wiring-to-12volt-dc.html
7.
https://www.nelt.co.jp/english/products/ccfl/about.html
15EEA03
SWITCH MODE POWER CONVERTERS
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

Different types of power semi-conductor devices and their switching characteristics.

Operation, characteristics and performance parameters of controlled rectifiers.

Operation, switching techniques and basic topologies of DC-DC switching regulators.

Different modulation techniques of pulse width modulated inverters and to understand the harmonic
reduction methods.

Operation of AC voltage controllers
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Identify and select the switching devices for different power converter applications.
127

Design a suitable DC power supply for given load specification from AC or DC supply.

Design and analyze the single or three phase inverter.

Analyze the AC voltage controller
Semiconductor physics, Steady state operation of single phase AC circuits, Differentiation, Integration and
Fourier series
UNIT I
POWER SEMI-CONDUCTOR DEVICES
9
Introduction to Power Electronics - Study of switching devices: structure, operation, static and switching
characteristics of SCR, TRIAC, BJT, MOSFET, IGBT-SCR: Two Transistor model, turn on circuits and
commutation circuits
UNIT II
PHASE-CONTROLLED CONVERTERS
9
1-pulse, 2-pulse converters - circuit, operation, waveforms - Estimation of average load voltage and average
load current for continuous current operation - Input power factor estimation for ripple free load current
UNIT III
DC TO DC CONVERTER
9
Step-down and step-up chopper - Time ratio control and current limit control –
converter-Isolated Converters: Fly back and Forward converter
UNIT IV
Buck, boost, buck-boost
INVERTERS
9
0
0
Single phase and three phase inverters (both 120 mode and 180 mode) - PWM techniques: single, multiple,
sinusoidal PWM, modified sinusoidal PWM – Voltage and harmonic control
UNIT V
AC TO AC CONVERTERS
9
Single phase AC voltage controllers –Integral cycle control, phase angle control - Estimation of RMS load
voltage, RMS load current and input power factor - Single phase cycloconverter
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
Muhammad H.Rashid, “Power Electronics Circuits, Devices and Applications”, Pearson Publication, 4
Edition, 2004.
th
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Mohan, Undeland, Robbins,” Power Electronics: Converters Applications and Design”, John Wiley &
Sons, 3rd Edition, 2003
2.
Robert W. Erickson, Dragan Maksimovic, “Fundamentals of Power Electronics”, Springer Science &
nd
Business Media, 2 edition 2001.
15EEA04
POWER PLANT INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

Power generation through various methods.

Importance of measuring devices in power plant.

Boiler control techniques and turbine control techniques.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Demonstrate the measurement of various power plant parameters.

Implement various Control techniques in power generation process.
128
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
Basics of Measurements & instrumentation – Power plant working concepts - Knowledge on power plant
parameters controls – Fundamentals of control system .
UNIT I
MEASUREMENTS & INSTRUMENTATION IN POWER PLANT - I
9
Importance of measurement and instrumentation in power plant. Measurement of water purity- Measurement of
dissolved oxygen in feed water- Measurement of PH value of water- Measurement of O2,CO2, and CO content in
the gases - Measurement of Smoke and Dust- Dosimeters.
UNIT II
MEASUREMENTS & INSTRUMENTATION IN POWER PLANT - II
9
Measurement of feed water flow, air flow, steam flow and coal flow – Drum level measurement – Steam pressure
and temperature measurement – Turbine speed and vibration measurement.
UNIT III
BOILER CONTROL
9
Combustion of fuel and excess air – Firing rate demand – Steam temperature control – Drum level control –
Single, two and three element control – Furnace draft control– flue gas dew point control.
UNIT IV
BURNER MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
9
Burners for liquid and solid fuels – Burner management – Furnace safety interlocks – Coal pulverizer control –
Combustion control for liquid and solid fuel fired boilers – air/fuel ratio control.
UNIT V
CONTROL OF TURBINE
9
Types of steam turbines – impulse and reaction turbines – compounding – Turbine governing system – Speed
and Load control- Basics of Automatic Load Frequency Control- Free Governor Mode of Operation (FGMO) Restricted Governor Mode of Operation (RGMO).
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
S.C.Arora,S. Domkundwar,” Power plant Engineering”Dhanpat Rai &Co (P)Ltd,2015.
2.
Sam Dukelow, “Control of Boilers”, Instrument Society of America, 2009.
3.
Everett Woodruff , Herbert Lammers, Thomas Lammers, “Steam Plant Operation”,9th Edition
McGraw Hill, 2012.
4.
Rajput R.K., “A Text book of Power plant Engineering”. 5th Edition, Lakshmi Publications, 2013.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Liptak B.G., “Instrumentation in Process Industries”, Chilton Book Company, 2005.
2.
Jain R.K., “Mechanical and Industrial Measurements”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2010.
3.
P.K.Nag, “Powerplant Engineering”, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 3rd edition, 2007.
4.
Tamilmani, “Power plant instrumentation”, Sams Publishers, 2011.
5.
Krishnaswamy.K and Ponnibala.M., “Power Plant Instrumentation”, PHI Learning Pvt.Ltd., New
Delhi, 2011.
15EEA05
ELECTRICAL MACHINES AND DRIVES
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

The basic concepts of different types of electrical machines and their performance.

The different methods of starting D.C motors and induction motors.

Conventional and solid-state DC and AC drives.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
129
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3

Demonstrate the concepts and different types of electrical machines.

Deliver the impact of starting D.C motors and induction motors.

Explain about conventional and solid-state DC and AC drives.
Fundamentals of Electrical Engineering
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO D.C. MACHINES
9
DC Machine – Construction – DC generator - Principle of operation – EMF equation – Self and separately excited
generators – Characteristics of series, shunt and compound generators. DC motor–Principle of operation – Back
emf and torque equation – characteristics - applications.
UNIT II
A.C. MACHINES
9
Alternators – Construction – Types – Induced EMF – Voltage regulation – EMF and MMF methods. Three-phase
induction motors – Construction – Types – Principle of operation – slip-torque characteristics. Single-phase
induction motors – Construction–Types– Principle of operation.
UNIT III
STARTING METHODS
9
Types of D.C Motor starters – Two point, three point and four point starter. Types of A.C Motor starters – DOL,
Auto transformer, Star-Delta and Rotor Resistance starter.
UNIT IV
CONVENTIONAL AND SOLID STATE SPEED CONTROL OF D.C.
9
DRIVES (Qualitative treatment only)
Speed control of DC series and shunt motors – Armature and field control, Ward- Leonard control system - Using
controlled rectifiers and DC choppers(Circuit diagram and operation) –applications.
UNIT V
CONVENTIONAL AND SOLID STATE SPEED CONTROL
9
OF A.C. DRIVES (Qualitative treatment only)
Speed control of three phase induction motor – Voltage control, V/f control, slip power recovery scheme – Using
inverters and AC voltage regulators (Circuit diagram and operation)– applications.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
rd
1.
A K Theraja & B L Theraja “A Text Book of Electrical Technology Vol-2,” 23
Publications, 2007.
2.
Dubey G.K., “Fundamentals of Electrical Drives”, Narosa Publishing House, Second Edition, 2015..
Edition S.Chand
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
P.C.Sen.,“Principles of Electrical Machines and Power Electronics”, Second Edition ,Wiley India Pvt.
Lt&Sons. 2013.
2.
K. Murugesh Kumar, “Electric Machines”, Vikas publishing house Pvt Ltd, 2002.
3.
M.D.Singh, K.B.Khanchandani, “Power Electronics”, Second Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2002.
4.
Vedam Subramanyam, “Electric Drives – Concepts and Applications”, Second Edition, McGraw Hill,
2010.
5.
Nagrath .I.J. & Kothari .D.P, “Electrical Machines” ,Fourth Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2010.
15EEA06
REAL TIME EMBEDDED SYSTEMS
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

The architecture and programming of ARM processor.

The embedded computing platform design and analysis.
130
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3

The basic concepts of real time Operating system.

The fundamentals of filters.

The system design techniques and networks for embedded systems
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the students will be able to:

Describe the architecture and programming of ARM processor..

Explain the basic concepts of real time Operating system design.

Use the system design techniques to develop software for embedded systems.

Model real-time applications using embedded-system concepts.
Basics of Microprocessor and Microcontrollers
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO EMBEDDED COMPUTING AND ARM PROCESSORS
9
Complex systems and micro processors– Embedded system design process –Design example: Model train
controller- Instruction sets preliminaries – ARM Processor – CPU: programming input and output- supervisor
mode, exceptions and traps – Co-processors- Memory system mechanisms – CPU performance- CPU power
consumption.
UNIT II
EMBEDDED COMPUTING PLATFORM AND DESIGN ANALYSIS
9
CPU buses – Memory devices – I/O devices – Component interfacing – Design with microprocessors –
Development and Debugging – Program design – Model of programs – Assembly and Linking – Basic
compilation techniques – Analysis and optimization of execution time, power, energy, program size – Program
validation and testing.
UNIT III
PROCESSES AND OPERATING SYSTEMS
9
Multiple tasks and multi processes – Processes – Context Switching – Operating Systems –Scheduling policies Multiprocessor – Inter Process Communication mechanisms – Evaluating operating system performance – Power
optimization strategies for processes.
UNIT IV
SYSTEM DESIGN TECHNIQUES AND NETWORKS
9
Design methodologies- Design flows – Requirement Analysis – Specifications-System analysis and architecture
design – Quality Assurance techniques- Distributed embedded systems – MPSoCs and shared memory
multiprocessors.
UNIT V
CASE STUDY
9
Data compressor – Alarm Clock – Audio player – Software modem-Digital still camera – Telephone answering
machine-Engine control unit – Video accelerator.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
Wayne Wolf, “Computers as Components - Principles of Embedded Computer System Design”, Morgan
Kaufmann Publisher, 2006.
2.
Marilyn Wolf, “Computers as Components – Principles of Embedded Computing System Design”, Third
Edition “Morgan Kaufmann Publisher (An imprint from Elsevier), 2012.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Jonathan W.Valvano, “Embedded Microcomputer Systems Real Time Interfacing”, Third Edition
Cengage Learning, 2012.
2.
David. E. Simon, “An Embedded Software Primer”, 1st Edition, Fifth Impression, Addison-Wesley
Professional, 2007.
3.
Raymond J.A. Buhr, Donald L.Bailey, “An Introduction to Real-Time Systems- From Design to
Networking with C/C++”, Prentice Hall, 1999.
131
4.
C.M. Krishna, Kang G. Shin, “Real-Time Systems”, International Editions, Mc Graw Hill 1997
5.
K.V.K.K.Prasad, “Embedded Real-Time Systems: Concepts, Design & Programming”, Dream Tech
Press, 2005.
6.
Sriram V Iyer, Pankaj Gupta, “Embedded Real Time Systems Programming”, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 2004.
15EEA07
FUNDAMENTALS OF ELECTRIC POWER UTILIZATION
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

Different types of lamps

Methods of heating and welding

Refrigeration and Air Conditioning

Electrolytic processes and storage of electricity

Electric traction systems

Electrical energy conservation
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Elucidate the working of various electric lamps and the various types of electric heating, electric welding
and design a heating element

Explain the working principle of refrigerators and Air Conditioning System

Explain about electrolytic processes and storage of electricity

Explain about electric traction.

Explicate the importance of electrical energy conservation and apply various measures for economic
aspects of utilising electrical energy
Basics of Electrical Engineering, Effects of electric current, Chemical reactions in electrolyte, awareness about
artificial lighting, refrigeration and air conditioning, Characteristics and application of different electric motors,
awareness about traction, Algebra, Trigonometry.
UNIT I
ILLUMINATION, INDUSTRIAL HEATING AND WELDING
9
Different types of lamps - incandescent – fluorescent – mercury vapour lamps.
Role of electric heating for industrial applications – resistance heating – induction heating – dielectric heating electric arc furnaces.
Brief introduction to electric welding – welding generator, welding transformer and their characteristics.
UNIT II
REFRIGERATION AND AIR CONDITIONING
9
Principle of a refrigerator – Vapour Compression System – Mechanical and Electrical circuits – Voltage Regulator
– Water Cooler – Coefficient of Performance – Standard rating – Maintenance and trouble shooting of
refrigerators – Air conditioning system – Types – operation – Mechanical and Electrical circuits – Cooling
capacity – Thermo-electric Refrigeration – Central Air Conditioning System.
UNIT III
ELECTROLYTIC PROCESSES AND STORAGE OF ELECTRICITY
9
Electrolysis, Faraday’s laws of Electrolysis – Electroplating – Electrical Equipments – Agitation and Filtration
Plant – Extraction and refining of metals – Storage of Electricity – Lead Acid Battery – Characteristics –
Indications of a fully charged battery – Nickel iron and Nickel cadmium batteries – Applications –Capacity rating
of batteries – Charging and maintenance of batteries – Battery chargers.
UNIT IV
ELECTRIC TRACTION
9
Merits of electric traction – requirements of electric traction system – supply systems – traction motors – d.c.
132
series motor – mechanics of train movement – Speed Time curve –tractive effort – specific energy consumption.
UNIT V
ECONOMIC ASPECTS OF ELECTRICAL ENERGY UTILISATION
9
Introduction to Energy conservation and Energy auditing - Tools for Energy auditing – Energy conservation in
Chemical industry, Pulp and Paper industry, Sugar industry, Cement industry, Textile industry, Iron and Steel
Industry – Energy Conservation in household and commercial sectors – Energy Conservation Legislation –
Tariffs - Influence of power factor – The most economic power factor - PF improvement.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
C.L. Wadhwa, ‘Generation, Distribution and Utilization of Electrical Energy’, New Age International Pvt.
Ltd, Third Edition 2015.
2.
E. Openshaw Taylor, ‘Utilization of Electrical Energy in SI Units’, Orient Longman Pvt. Ltd, Eleventh
Edition 2007.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
H. Partab, ‘Art and Science of Utilisation of Electrical Energy’, Dhanpat Rai and Co, New Delhi, Third
Edition 2014.
2.
J.B. Gupta, ‘Utilization of Electric Power and Electric Traction’, S.K.Kataria and Sons, Eleventh Edition
2015.
3.
G.C.Garg, ‘Utilization of Electric Power and Electric Traction’, Khanna Publishers, Ninth Edition 2009.
4.
A.Chakrabarti, M.L.Soni, P.V.Gupta, U.S.Bhatnagar, ‘A text Book on Power System Engineering”,
Dhanpat Rai and Co, New Delhi, 2009.
5.
N.V.Suryanarayana, ‘Utilisation of Electric Power : Including Electric Drives and Electric Traction’, New
Age International Publishers, Second Edition 2014.
6.
V.K.Mehta, Rohit Mehta, ‘Basic Electrical Engineering’, S.Chand Limited, 2008.
15EEA08
SOFT COMPUTING TECHNIQUES AND APPLICATIONS
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To provide an introduction to the emerging area of intelligent control and optimization.

To impart knowledge on expert systems, fuzzy logic systems, artificial neural networks and optimization
techniques.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Explain the concept of intelligent control and their applications.

Analyze Fuzzy Logic and Artificial Neural Networks through case studies.

Design Genetic Algorithms system through case study.
Basic understanding of problem solving, design and analysis of algorithms, Algebra, Elementary differential
Calculus, probability, basic knowledge on human nervous system and nervous cells.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Approaches to intelligent control – Architecture for intelligent control – Symbolic reasoning system – rule-based
systems – the AI approach – Knowledge representation – Expert systems.
UNIT II
ARTIFICIAL NEURAL NETWORKS
9
Concept of Artificial Neural Network and its basic mathematical model – McCulloch-Pitts neuron model – simple
perceptron – Adaline and Madaline – Feed-forward Multilayer Perceptron – Learning and Training the neural
133
network – Hopfield network – Self-organizing network – Neural Network based controller.
UNIT III
GENETIC
ALGORITHM
TECHNIQUE
AND
ANT-COLONY
OPTIMIZATION
9
Basic concept of Genetic algorithm and detailed algorithmic steps – Flowchart – GA operators – adjustment of
GA parameters – Concept of ant-colony search technique for solving optimization problems.
UNIT IV
FUZZY LOGIC SYSTEM
9
Introduction to crisp sets and fuzzy sets – basic fuzzy set operation and approximate reasoning – Introduction to
fuzzy logic modeling and control – Fuzzification – inferencing and defuzzification – Fuzzy knowledge and rule
bases.
UNIT V
APPLICATIONS
9
Applications of Neural Network to engineering problems – GA applications to engineering optimisation problems
– Fuzzy modeling and control schemes for non-linear systems.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
Sivanandam S.N., Deepa S.N., “Principles of Soft Computing”, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd., Reprint 2012.
2.
Jang J.S.R., Sun C.T. and Mizutani E., “Neuro-Fuzzy and Soft Computing: A Computational Approach
to Learning and Machine Intelligence”, PHI Learning Private Limited, New Delhi, 2014.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Jacek.M.Zurada, “Introduction to Artificial Neural Systems”, Jaico Publishing House, 1999.
2.
Klir G.J., Folger T.A., “Fuzzy sets, uncertainty and Information”, Prentice-Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., 1993.
3.
Zimmerman H.J., “Fuzzy set theory-and its Applications”, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 1994.
4.
Driankov D., Hellendoorn H., Reinfrank M., “Introduction to Fuzzy Control”, Narosa Publishers, 2001.
5.
Goldberg D.E., “Genetic algorithms in Search, Optimization and Machine learning”, Addison Wesley,
1989.
6.
Padhy N.P., “Artificial Intelligence and Intelligent System, Oxford University Press, 2005.
7.
Allain Bonnet, “Artificial Intelligence – Promise and Performance, Prentice Hall International Publishers,
1985.
8.
Sivanandam S.N., Paulraj M., “Introduction to Artificial Neural Networks”, Vikas Publishing House Pvt.
Ltd., First Edition, 2003.
9.
Donald A. Waterman, “A Guide to Expert Systems”, Addison-Wesley Publishers, Second Edition, 1993.
15EEA09
FUNDAMENTALS OF POWER QUALITY
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

Various Power Quality issues.

Power quality problems and methods of control.

Various methods of power quality monitoring and suppression.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Analyze the various power quality issues.

Analyze the power quality events and assessment.

Mitigate the power quality problems using relevant devices.
134
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO POWER QUALITY
9
Terms and definitions: Overloading, under voltage, sustained interruption; sags and swells; waveform distortion,
Total Harmonic Distortion (THD), Computer Business Equipment Manufacturers Associations (CBEMA) curve.
UNIT II
VOLTAGE SAGS ANDSWELLS
9
Sources of sags and interruptions, estimating voltage sag performance, motor starting sags, estimating the sag
severity, fast transfer switches- Sources of over voltages: Capacitor switching, lightning, ferro-resonance;
mitigation of voltage swells
UNIT III
HARMONICS
9
Harmonic distortion: Voltage and current distortion, THD-TDD, harmonic sources from commercial and industrial
loads, locating harmonic sources- resonance-harmonic distortion evaluation, devices for controlling harmonic
distortion, passive filters, active filters
UNIT IV
Power Quality Benchmarking
9
Benchmarking Process-RMS voltage variation Indices-Harmonic Indices-Power Quality Contracts-Power Quality
Insurance
UNIT V
POWER QUALITY MONITORING
9
Monitoring consideration-Power quality measurement equipment: harmonic / spectrum analyzer, flicker meters,
disturbance analyzer- applications of expert system for power quality monitoring.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
Roger.C.Dugan, Mark.F.McGranagham, Surya Santoso, H.Wayne Beaty, “Electrical Power Systems
Quality”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd, New Delhi, Third Edition, 2013.
2.
Math H.J.Bollen, “Understanding Power Quality Problems-Voltage Sag & Interruptions”, (New York:
IEEE press, 2000).
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
C.Sankaran, “Power Quality”, CRC press, 2002.
2.
Arindam Ghosh, “Power Quality Enhancement Using Custom Power Devices”, Springer International
Edition, 2002
3.
PSCAD User Manual.
4.
J.Arrilaga, N.R.Watson, S.Chen, “ Power System Quality Assessment”, John Wiley & Sons, 2000.
15EEA10
WIRING, ESTIMATION AND COSTING
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

Electrical supply systems and its protection equipments

Different wiring methods

Estimation for electrical wiring
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Address Electrical supply systems and its protection equipments

Explain about different wiring methods

Estimate for a wiring system
135
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Electrical supply system-Three-phase four wire distribution system-Types of domestic loads-Protection against
Electric shock-Earthing- Domestic Wiring Protection equipments: Fuse-Miniature Circuit Breaker – Residual
Current Circuit Breaker or Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker-General requirements of Electrical Installations
UNIT II
TYPES AND INSTALLATION OF WIRING SYSTEMS
9
Types of wires, Factors influencing the choice of wiring system, Types of wiring system, Conduit Wiring System,
Accessories, Advantages and Disadvantages of Conduit Wiring Systems, IE rules, 1956: rules 50, 56, 57, 58,
60,61 – Internal wiring systems – Looping-in system – Ring system – tree system - Position of switches, cutouts,
main switch board, sub-distribution boards
UNIT III
DESIGN OF SIMPLE ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT
9
System of Connection of Appliances and accessories-Schematic diagram and Wiring diagram of Light and Fan
circuits-Wiring diagram of a single tube light controlled by a switch-Alarm circuits without relays-Alarm circuits
with relays
UNIT IV
ELEMENTS OF ESTIMATION
9
Introduction -Purpose of Estimating and Costing-Qualities of a good Estimator-Essential Elements of Estimating
and Costing-Tender-Guidelines for Inviting Tenders-Quotation-Other Important Factors of Estimating and Costing
UNIT V
DOMESTIC ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION AND ESTIMATES
9
Estimation of load requirements-Estimation of connected load, Maximum demand, and type of supply required for
a domestic building and related problem- Determination of size of distribution boards – Different types of
commonly available distribution boards-Estimation of Accessories required, wiring materials and labour
requirement for a domestic building and related problem-Pre-commissioning tests for domestic wiring Installation:
Visual Inspection, Testing- Special features applicable for High-Rise apartment buildings
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
th
1.
Uppal S.L, “Electrical Wiring - Estimating and Costing”, Khanna Publishers, 6 Edition, 2011
2.
Giridharan M.K., “ Electrical Systems Design”, I.K. International Publishing House, New Delhi, 2011
3.
Raina K.B., Bhattacharya S.K., “Electrical Design Estimating and Costing”, New Age International Pvt.
Ltd., Publishers, 1991.
REFERENCE BOOK:
J.B. Gupta, “A Course in Electrical Installation Estimating and Costing”, S. K. Kataria & Sons, 9
Edition, 2012
th
Offered by ECE Department
15ECA01
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To introduce analog and digital communication techniques.

To impart knowledge on data and pulse communication techniques.

To introduce source and Error control coding.

To develop knowledge on multi–user radio communication
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course students will be able to
136

Apply analog and digital communication techniques.

Apply data and pulse communication techniques.

Analyze Source and Error control coding.

Utilize multi–user radio communication.
PREREQUISITES:
Basic knowledge of Bessels function, Time domain and frequency domain signals representation, Basicelectronic
circuits,
UNIT I
FUNDAMENTALS OF ANALOG COMMUNICATION
9
Principles of amplitude modulation – AM envelope, frequency spectrum and bandwidth – modulation index
and percent – modulation, AM Voltage distribution, AM powerdistribution – Angle modulation – FM and PM
waveforms – phase deviation and modulation index – frequency deviation and percent modulation – Frequency
analysis of angle modulated waves – Bandwidth requirements for Angle modulated waves.
UNIT II
DIGITAL MODULATION TECHNIQUES
9
Amplitude shift keying – frequency shift keying – FSK bit rate and baudrate – FSK transmitter – BW
consideration of FSK – FSK receiver – phase shift keying – binary phase shift keying – QPSK – Quadrature
Amplitude modulation – bandwidth efficiency – DPSK.
UNIT III
DATA AND PULSE COMMUNICATION
9
Data Communication:History of Data Communication – Standards Organizations for Data Communication –
Data Communication Circuits – Data Communication Codes – Error Detection and Correction Techniques –
Data communication Hardware – serial and parallel interfaces.
Pulse Communication: Pulse Amplitude Modulation (PAM) – Pulse Time Modulation (PTM) – Pulse code
Modulation (PCM) – Comparison of various Pulse Communication System (PAM – PTM – PCM).
UNIT IV
SOURCE AND ERROR CONTROL CODING
9
Entropy – Source encoding theorem – Shannon Fano coding – Huffman coding – mutual information – channel
capacity – channel coding theorem – Error Control Coding – linear block codes.
UNIT V
MULTI–USER RADIO COMMUNICATION
9
Advanced Mobile Phone System (AMPS) – Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) – Code division
multiple access (CDMA) – Cellular Concept and Frequency Reuse – Channel Assignment and Hand off –
Satellite Communication – Bluetooth.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
th
1.
Wayne Tomasi, “Advanced Electronic Communication Systems”, 6 Edition, Pearson Education, 2009.
2.
Simon Haykin, “Communication Systems”, 4 Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 2004.
th
REFERENCE BOOKS:
nd
1.
Rappaport T.S, "Wireless Communications: Principles and Practice", 2
2007.
Edition, Pearson
Education,
2.
Martin S.Roden, “Analog and Digital Communication System”, 3 Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2002.
3.
B.Sklar,”Digital
2007.
rd
Communication
Fundamentals
and
Applications” 2
nd
Edition PearsonEducation,
WEB REFERENCES:
1.
http://www.wirelesscommunication.nl/reference/chaptr01/telephon/amps.html
2.
http://ecee.colorado.edu/~liue/teaching/comm_standards/gsm/index.html
3.
http://edu.eap.gr/pli/pli23/documents/Parallila_Keimena/GSM.pdf
4.
https://www.eff.org/files/filenode/global_system_for_mobile_communication_technology.pdf
5.
http://users.ece.utexas.edu/~jandrews/publications/cdma_talk.pdf
6.
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106105080/pdf/M5L8.pdf
137
7.
www.intel.com/education/.../lectures/lecture_06_80211bandBT.ppt
15ECA02
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
MICROPROCESSORS AND APPLICATIONS
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To apply knowledge of the architecture for programming of 8085 & 8086 microprocessor.

To develop skills in interfacing of peripheral devices with 8085 microprocessor.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Write assembly language program for 8085 & 8086 microprocessor.

Interface peripheral devices with 8085 & 8086 microprocessor.

Design 8085 and 8086 microprocessor based system.
PREREQUISITES:
Digital logic circuits, binary and other number systems, electronic circuits, memory and interfacing concepts,
UNIT I
8 BIT MICROPROCESSOR ARCHITECTURE AND PROGRAMMING
9
Microprocessor based system blocks – Number system – Address bus – data bus – control bus – Tristate bus –
Data Transfer Scheme – 8085 Microprocessor Architecture – Instruction set – Assembly Language Programming
– Interrupts
UNIT II
16 BIT MICROPROCESSOR ARCHITECTURE
9
Intel 8086 Internal Architecture – signals– Minimum mode and Maximum mode operation and bus cycles –
Interrupts – Interrupt Service Routines – Memory Interfacing
UNIT III
16 BIT MICROPROCESSOR INSTRUCTION SET AND ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE
PROGRAMMING
9
Programmer’s model of 8086 – operand types – operand addressing – assembler directives,instruction set –
Data transfer group – Arithmetic group – logical group – Flag manipulation group – control transfergroup –
Shift/rotate group – Machine or processor control group – 8086 Assembly Languageprogramming.
UNIT IV
MICROPROCESSOR PERIPHERAL CHIP INTERFACING
9
Introduction to I/O Ports – Architecture and interfacing of Programmable Peripheral Interface (8255) – Serial
Communication (8251) – Programmable Interval timers (Intel 8253/8254) – Keyboard and Display Controller
(8279)
UNIT V
SYSTEM DESIGN USING MICROPROCESSORS
9
Switches and LEDs – Seven–segment Displays – D to A converter – A to D converter – Relay, Motor Control –
DC & Stepper Motor – Case studies – Microprocessor based Digital Scale system – Temperature controller –
Traffic Light control
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
Ramesh S Gaonkar, “Microprocessor Architecture – Programming and application with 8085”, 4
Edition,Penram International Publishing, New Delhi, 2000.
2.
Douglas V Hall, “Microprocessors and Interfacing, Programming and Hardware” TMH, 2006.
th
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Barry B. Brey, “Intel Microprocessors Architecture Programming and Interfacing”, Pearson Prentice Hall,
2009.
2. M. Rafi Quazzaman, “Microprocessors Theory and Applications” Intel and Motorola prentice Hall of India,
Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2003.
3. A.K. Ray and K.M.Burchandi, “Advanced Microprocessors & Peripherals”, Tata McGraw–Hill Education,
2013.
138
4. Sunil Mathur, “Microprocessor 8086: Architecture, Programming and Interfacing”, PHI Learning Pvt Ltd.
2011.
WEB REFERENCES:
1.
http://www.zseries.in/embedded%20lab/
2.
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106108100/pdf/Teacher_Slides/mod1/M1L3.pdf
3.
http://nptel.ac.in/downloads/106108100/
15ECA03
MATLAB PROGRAMMING
L
T
P
C
2
0
2
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To gain knowledge of the MATLAB functions to manipulate complex values, arrays and matrices.

To develop skills in M File Programming and Elementary Solution Methods.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Analyze the MATLAB Concepts and Debugging methods.

Create M–files using IF, SWITCH, FOR, WHILE statements.

Evaluate the results of Elementary Solution Methods.
PREREQUISITES:
Familiarity with using Windows applications, calculus, Boolean laws, probability,arrays and vectors, use of a
scientific calculator,
UNIT I
MATLAB CONCEPTS
6+3
Directory and Defined Path – Menus and the toolbar – Saving & Loading Files – Using the command line to call
functions – Computing with MATLAB – Reading and Writing from a file: Reading and Writing data from/to a .mat
file, MATLAB Help System.
Lab Component: Get and Set values – Numerical computations
UNIT II
DATA STORAGE AND MANIPULATION
6+3
Rational Operators on Single Values – Boolean Operators on Single Values – MATLAB functions to manipulate
complex values – Arrays and Matrices – Declaring a vector – Dot product – Cross Product.
Lab Component:
UNIT III
Matrix generators – Data conversion & Data Normalization.
GRAPHICS
6+3
2D Graphics: XY– plotting functions, Subplots and Overlay plots – Special Plot types, Bar, Grid, Legend,
Lineseries properties, Semilogx, Regression – 3D Graphics – Mesh – Contour – Developing GUI.
Lab Component:
Multiple data sets in one plot – Setting x and y axis limits to match the actual range of the
data using xlim and ylim.
UNIT IV
m FILE PROGRAMMING
6+3
m-files– syntax guidelines – Nested functions – Placing comments – Control Flow: IF statement, SWITCH
statement, FOR statement, WHILE statement – Program Flow: Arithmetic errors – Indexing errors, Assignment
errors, Struct array errors.
Lab Component: Histogram – Interpolation – Break and Continue – Fibonacci series
UNIT V
MATHEMATICAL MANIPULATIONS
6+3
Operations – Linear Algebraic Equations : Elementary Solution Methods, Statistics and probability, Special
Matrices– Row reduced echelon form – Inverse, Cofactor, minor
Lab Component: Differential equation solver – factorial finding – Eigenvalues and eigenvectors.
L : 30 ; P : 15 ; TOTAL:45 PERIODS
139
TEXTBOOK:
Linda Coulson, “MATLAB Programming”, Global Media, Delhi,2009
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
William J. Palm III,” Introduction to Matlab 7 for Engineers”, McGraw Hill, 2005.
2.
G. H. Golub and C. F. Van Loan,” Matrix Computations”, 3 Editon, Johns Hopkins University
Press,1996.
3.
Stephen J. Chapman, “MATLAB Programming for Engineers”, 4 Edition ThomsonLearning,2007
rd
th
WEB REFERENCES:
1.
www.mathworks.com/academia/student_center/tutorials/launchpad.html
2.
http://ocw.mit.edu/resources/res–18–002–introduction–to–matlab–spring–2008/
15ECA04
ANTENNA FUNDAMENTALS
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To introduce the working principles of various types of antenna.

To study various antennas, arrays and radiation patterns of antennas.

To know various techniques involved in various antenna parameter measurements.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Analyze the properties and parameters of antenna

Analyze the operation of different antennas

Design antenna array systems
PREREQUISITES:
electromagnetic field theory, analog electronics, Maxwell's equations, electromagnetic wave propagation,
polarization
UNIT I
ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION AND ANTENNA FUNDAMENTALS
9
Review of electromagnetic theory: Vector potential – Solution of wave equation – retarded vector and scalar
potential –Hertzian dipole. Antenna characteristics: Radiation pattern, Beam solid angle, Directivity, Gain, Input
impedance, Polarization, Beam width, Bandwidth, Reciprocity – Equivalence of Radiation patterns – Equivalence
of Impedances – Effective aperture – Effective length – Antenna temperature.
UNIT II
WIRE ANTENNAS
9
EM radiation and working of Short dipole – Radiation resistance and Directivity – Half wave Dipole – Monopole –
Small loop antennas.
UNIT III
ANTENNA ARRAYS
9
Linear Array and Pattern Multiplication – Two–element Array – Uniform Array – Polynomial representation –
Array with non–uniform Excitation – Binomial Array.
UNIT IV
APERTURE ANTENNAS
9
Magnetic Current and its fields – Uniqueness theorem – Field equivalence principle – Duality principle –
Method of Images – Pattern properties – Slot antenna, Horn Antenna – Pyramidal Horn Antenna – Reflector
Antenna –Flat reflector – Corner Reflector
UNIT V
SPECIAL ANTENNAS AND ANTENNA MEASUREMENTS
9
Long wire – V and Rhombic Antenna –Yagi–Uda Antenna – Turnstile Antenna – Helical Antenna – Axial mode
helix, Normal mode helix –Biconical Antenna – Log periodic Dipole Array – Spiral Antenna –Microstrip Patch
Antennas.
Antenna Measurements: Radiation Pattern measurement – Gain and Directivity Measurements – Impedance
140
measurement and Anechoic Chamber measurement.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
rd
1.
John D.Kraus, Ronald J Marhefka and Ahmad S Khan, “Antennas for all Applications”, 3 Edition, Tata
McGraw–Hill Book Company, 2012.
2.
Constantine A. Balanis,”Antenna Theory Analysis and Design”, 2
nd
Edition, John Wiley, 2011.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
E.C.Jordan and Balmain, “Electromagnetic waves and Radiating Systems”, Pearson Education / PHI,
2006
2.
A.R.Harish, M.Sachidanada, “Antennas and Wave propagation”, Oxford University Press, 2007.
3.
G.S.N.Raju, “Antenna Wave Propagation”, Pearson Education, 2004.
4.
R.E.Collins, “Antenna and Radiowave propagation”,McGraw–Hill, 1985
5.
W.L Stutzman and G.A. Thiele, “Antenna analysis and design”, John Wiley, 2000.
WEB REFERENCES:
1.
http://www.authorstream.com/Presentation/Ani_Kate–508171–wave–propagation/
2.
http://classes.soe.ucsc.edu/cmpe123a/Fall07/doc/AntBrief123A12–6–07.ppt
3.
http://muse.widener.edu/~rpj0001/courses/ENGR647/ClassNotes/LECT04.ppt
4.
http://www.authorstream.com/Presentation/aSGuest125391–1319926–unit–antenna–engineering/
15ECA05
TELEVISION ENGINEERING
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To understand the construction details of TV Receiver Picture Tubes, Television Camera tubes and
Composite Video Signal details

To understand principles of operation of Monochrome Television Transmitter and Receiver systems.

To study PAL Color Television system operation.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Analyse the transmission of video signals and importance of television standards

Analyse the functioning of circuits related to broadcasting applications.

Apply the knowledge gained in digital video and television transmission.
PREREQUISITES:
Electromagnetic spectrum, electromagnetic wave propagation, basic modulation theory, transducers, electronic
circuits, signals representation.
UNIT I
TELEVISION SIGNALS
9
Audio and video transmission – scanning principle – TV broadcasting, system – Aspect ratio – Resolution –
Video bandwidth. Video signals – composite video signal – blanking signal – horizontal, vertical blanking and
sync pulses.
UNIT II
TELEVISION CAMERAS AND SIGNAL TRANSMISSION
9
Image orthicon –Vidicon–plumbicon– characteristics of camera tubes –video processing of camera pickup signal
–Picture signal transmission – positive and negative modulation – VSB transmission – Sound signal transmission
– Standard channel bandwidth
UNIT III
TV TRANSMITTER & RECEIVER
9
TV standards – TV transmitter – Block diagram of TV Reciever –
141
Receiver controls –
RF tuners – Video
COMPOS
channel and picture tube – AGC and synchronization circuits –
video detector – Sound section
UNIT IV
Deflection circuit (Horizontal and vertical ) –
COLOUR TV PRINCIPLES
9
Compatibility –colour fundamentals – chromaticity diagram –colour picture tubes (Delta – gun, P.I.L &trintron) –
purity and convergence. Colour Signal Transmission and Reception – modulation of colour difference signals –
formation of chrominance signal – NTSC, PAL and SECAM colour systems.
UNIT V
DIGITAL TV SYSTEMS
9
Cable TV – Cable Signal Sources – Cable Signal Processing, Distribution & Scrambling – DVB – Video
Recording – Video Disc recording and playback – Digital television –Transmission and reception –Projection
television – Flat panel display TV receivers – Digital TV – LCD and Plasma screen receivers – LEDTV – 3DTV
TOTAL: 45 Periods
TEXTBOOKS:
rd
1.
R.R.Gulati, “Monochrome Television Practice, Principles, Technology and servicing” , 3 Edition, New Age
International (P) Publishers, 2006
2.
R.R.Gulati,”Monochrome & Color Television,” New Age International Publisher, 2003.
3.
Bernard Grob, Charles Herndon, “Basic television and video systems” , McGraw–Hill, 1998
REFERENCE BOOKS:
nd
1.
A.M Dhake, “Television and Video Engineering”, 2 Edition, TMH, 2003.
2.
R.P.Bali, “Color Television, Theory and Practice,” 4 Edition, Tata McGraw–Hill, New York, 1997.
th
WEB REFERENCES:
1.
http://seminarprojects.net/q/principles–of–television–engineering–ppt‎\
2.
www.focalpress.com/
3.
www.hobbyprojects.com
15ECA06
REMOTE SENSING TECHNIQUES
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To familiarize the principles of Remote Sensing

To gain fundamental knowledge on the physics of remote sensing
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Apply the Electromagnetic Radiation principles for Remote Sensing Applications

Analyse various imaging systems

Interpret Multispectral and Hyperspectral data for Land cover/ Land use studies

Classify the data for application specific analysis
PREREQUISITES:
fundamental principles of electromagnetic wave propagation and scattering, Optics, satellite communication
fundamentals, basics of communication engineering
UNIT I
PHYSICS OF REMOTE SENSING
9
Electro Magnetic Spectrum – Physics of Remote Sensing – Effects of Atmosphere – Scattering – Different types
–Absorption – Atmospheric window – Energy interaction with surface features – Spectral reflectance of
vegetation, soil ,and water –atmospheric influence on spectral response patterns.
UNIT II
REMOTE SENSING SYSTEMS
9
Satellites and orbits – Polar orbiting satellites – Spectral – radiometric and spatial resolutions – Temporal
142
resolution of satellites – Multispectral – thermal and hyperspectral Sensing. Remote Sensing platforms –
airborne and space borne sensors. Some remote sensing satellites, Radars and their features.
UNIT III
IMAGE PROCESSING TECHNIQUES FOR REMOTE SENSING
9
Geometric corrections – Co–registration of Data – Ground Control Points (GCP) – Atmospheric corrections –
Solar illumination corrections. Image Enhancement: Concept of color – Color composites – Contrast stretching –
linear and non–linear stretching – Filtering techniques – Edge enhancement – Density slicing –Thresholding –
Intensity–Hue–Saturation (IHS) images – Time composite images – Synergetic images.
UNIT IV
INFORMATION EXTRACTION FROM REMOTE SENSED DATA
9
Multispectral classification – Ground truth collection – Supervised and unsupervised classification – Change
detection analysis – Principal component analysis – Ratio images – Vegetation indices. Introduction to Image
Processing Softwares: MATLAB – Introduction to Multispectral classification algorithms.
UNIT V
REMOTE SENSING APPLICATIONS
9
Watershed management – Rainfall–runoff modeling – Irrigation management – Flood mapping – Drought
assessment –Environmental monitoring.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
Lillesand T.M., and Kiefer R.W., “Remote Sensing and Image interpretation”, 6
&Sons, 2000.
2.
Jensen, J.R., “Remote sensing of the environment”, 2
nd
th
Edition, John Wiley
Edition,Prentice Hall, 2000.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
John A.Richards, “Remote Sensing Digital Image Analysis”, Springer,1999.
2.
John R.Jensen, “Introductory Digital Image Processing: A Remote Sensing Perspective”, 2
Prentice Hall, 1995.
3.
Paul Curran P.J., “Principles of Remote Sensing”, ELBS, 1995.
4.
Charles Elachi and Jakob J. van Zyl, “Introduction to the Physics and Techniques of Remote Sensing”,
Wiley Series in Remote Sensing and Image Processing, 2006.
5.
Sabins, F.F.Jr,” Remote Sensing Principles and Image interpretation”, W.H.Freeman& Co, 1978.
nd
Edition,
WEB REFERENCES:
1.
http://www.itc.nl/~bakker/rs.html
2.
rst.gsfc.nasa.gov
3.
www.isprs.org
4.
www.nrsa.gov.in
15ECA07
EMBEDDED SYSTEMS
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To introduce embedded systems, its hardware and software.

To introduce devices and buses used for embedded networking.

To explain programming concepts and embedded programming in C and C++.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Apply the knowledge applications

Develop an embedded product.

Validate the program for system development.
143
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
PREREQUISITES:
Basics of Assembly Language, C, C++, Python, basic knowledge of electronics, digital electronics, knowledge of
microcontrollers, I/O, analog and digital interfacing, and peripherals.
UNIT I
EMBEDDED COMPUTING
9
Embedded system examples – Parts of Embedded System – Processor – Power supply – clock – memory
interface – interrupt – I/O ports – Buffers, Programmable Devices – ASIC – interfacing with memory and I/O
devices – Memory Technologies – EPROM, Flash, OTP, SRAM,DRAM, SDRAM
UNIT II
EMBEDDED SYSTEM DESIGN
9
Embedded System product Development Life cycle (EDLC) – Hardware development cycles – Specifications –
Component selection – Schematic Design – PCB layout – fabrication and assembly. Product enclosure Design
and Development.
UNIT III
EMBEDDED SYSTEM DEVELOPMENT ENVIRONMENT
9
Reset Circuit – Brown–out Protection Circuit – Oscillator Unit – Real Time Clock – Watchdog Timer.
Development and Debugging – Program design – Model of programs– Assembly and Linking – Basic compilation
techniques– Program validation and testing.
UNIT IV
OPERATING SYSTEMS
9
Concept of firmware – Operating system basics – Real Time Operating systems – Tasks, Processes and
Threads – Multiprocessing and Multitasking – Task scheduling – Task communication and synchronization –
Device Drivers.
UNIT V
SYSTEM DESIGN EXAMPLES
9
Design Example: Alarm Clock – Elevator Controller – Ink jet printer– Hardware Design and Software Design –
Set–top Boxes.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
Shibu K.V, “Introduction to Embedded Systems “,Tata McGraw Hill, 2009.
2.
Marylin wolf, “Computer as Components” Elsevier, 2013,
3.
Raj Kamal, “Embedded Systems”, 2
nd
Edition, TMH, 2008.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Frank Vahid, Tony Givargis, “Embedded System Design”, John Wiley,2001
2.
Lyla, “Embedded System”, Pearson, 2013.
3.
C.M. Krishna, Kang G. Shin, “Real – Time Systems”, McGraw – Hill International Editions, 1997
4.
David E. Simon, “An Embedded Software Primer”, Pearson Education, 2007.
5.
Rajib Mall, ”Real–time systems: theory and practice”, Pearson Education, 2007
6.
Philip.A.Laplante, “Real Time System Design and Analysis”, 3 Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2004.
rd
WEB REFERENCES:
1.
2.
http://www.learnerstv.com/Free-Engineering-Video-lectures-ltv118-Page1.htm
15ECA08
OPTICAL COMMUNICATION
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To learn the basic elements of light sources, Wavelength and frequencies of light

To understand the different kind of fibers, losses, and fiber slicing and connectors

To learn different types of photo detectors and its operation
144
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3

To learn the fiber optical receivers and its measurements

To learn, Optical networks, operational principles of WDM
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Analyze the different kinds of light sources and Detectors used in any applications

Design any optical communication system

Analyze the performance measure of the optical parameters
PREREQUISITES:
Electromagnetic spectrum and its uses, Snells law, optical signal propagation methods and electromagnetic
theory
UNITI
OPTICAL SOURCES
9
Light sources : Sunlight, Torch light, LED and Laser light – Optical frequencies and Wavelength – LED internal –
quantum efficiency –Relationship between speed of light, wavelength and frequency – light as an
Electromagnetic waves – comparison of LED and Laser diode
UNITII
OPTICAL FIBER
9
Refractive Index –Ray theory of transmission – Total internal reflection – Acceptance angle – Numerical aperture
– Attenuation Fiber Bend losses and Dispersion – Structure of an optical fiber – Optical domain signal –
electrical domain signal Optical pulses for the digital data – Optical fiber connectors – Fiber alignment and Joint
Losses – Fiber Splices – Fiber connectors – Fiber couplers
UNIT III
OPTICAL DETECTORS
9
Optical Detectors: PIN Photo detectors, Avalanche photo diodes – construction, characteristics and properties –
Comparison of performance, Photo detector noise –Noise sources – Signal to Noise ratio – Detector response
time.
UNITIV
FIBER OPTIC RECEIVER AND MEASUREMENTS
9
Fundamental receiver operation – Pre amplifiers – Error sources – Receiver Configuration – Probability of Error –
Quantum limit.
Fiber Attenuation measurements– Dispersion measurements –Optical Spectrum Analyzer–OTDR
UNITV
OPTICAL NETWORKS
9
Basic Networks – Broadcast and select Networks – WDM Networks –Bus topology – Star topology –
Wavelength Routed Networks – Routing and wavelength Assignment – Different types of wavelength
Assignment
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
th
Gerd Keiser, "Optical Fiber Communication" 5 Edition, McGraw Hill International, 2014.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
J.Gower, “Optical Communication System”, Prentice Hall of India, 2001.
2.
Rajiv Ramaswami, “Optical Network”, 2
3.
Govind P. Agrawal, “Fiber–optic communication systems”, 3 edition, John Wiley & sons, 2004.
nd
Edition, Elsevier, 2004.
rd
WEB REFERENCES:
1. www.nptel.ac.in/courses/117101002/downloads/Lec19.pdf
2. www.ece466.groups.et.byu.net/notes/notes_source.ppt
145
15ECA09
MOBILE COMMUNICATION
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To impart the fundamentals concepts of mobile communication systems.

To provide the student with an understanding of advanced multiple access techniques.

To give the student an understanding digital cellular systems.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After the completion of this course, students will be able to

Analyze the cellular radio concepts such as frequency reuse, handoff and how interference between
mobiles and base stations affects the capacity of cellular systems.

Apply the concepts on basic diversity, equalization and spread spectrum techniques in mobile
communication.

Analyze the current and future cellular mobile communication systems (GSM, IS95, WCDMA, etc.)
PREREQUISITES:
Radio frequency propagation fundamentals,basics ofdigital communications, basic telephony
UNIT I
CELLULAR MOBILE SYSTEMS
9
Historic perspective and overview of Mobile Communication Systems – A basic cellular system – operation of
cellular systems – overview of generations of cellular systems – concept of frequency reuse – co–channel
interference reduction factor – desired C/I from a normal case in an omni directional antenna system – co–
channel interference and Non–co–channel interference – design of antenna system – antenna parameter and
their effects – diversity receiver –Traffic theory – Erlang B system
UNIT II
CELL COVERAGE,
HANDOFF
CELL
SITE,
FREQUENCY
MANAGEMENT
AND
9
Cell coverage for signal and traffic – cell site and mobile antennas – frequency management and channel
assignment – Handoff – dropped calls and cell splitting
UNIT III
MODULATION METHODS AND CODING FOR ERROR DETECTION AND
CORRECTION
9
Digital modulation methods in cellular wireless systems – OFDM – Block Coding – convolution coding and Turbo
coding.
UNIT IV
SPREAD SPECTRUM AND MULTIPLE ACCESS TECHNIQUES
9
Spread Spectrum Techniques – DSSS – FHSS – Frequency division multiple access (FDMA) – Time–division
multiple access (TDMA) – code division multiple access (CDMA) – CDMA capacity – probability of bit error
considerations – CDMA vs TDMA.
UNIT V
SECOND And THIRD GENERATION WIRELESS SYSTEMS
9
GSM, IS–136 (D–AMPS), IS–95 – Third generation wireless systems – GPRS – EDGE – WCDMA – LTE.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
nd
1.
William, C. Y. Lee, “Mobile Cellular Telecommunications”, 2
2.
Mischa Schwartz, “Mobile Wireless Communications”, Cambridge University Press, UK, 2005
Edition, McGraw Hill, 2006.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
rd
1.
Jerry D. Gibson, “Mobile Communication Hand Book”, 3 Edition, IEEE Press,2012.
2.
Theodore S Rappaport, “Wireless Communication Principles and Practice”, 2
Education, 2010.
3.
Lawrence Harte, “3G Wireless Demystified”, McGraw Hill Publications, 2001.
4.
KavehPahlavan and Prashant Krishnamurthy”, Principles of Wireless Networks”, Prentice Hall PTR,
2002
146
nd
Edition, Pearson
WEB REFERENCES:
1.
http://webmail.aast.edu/~khedr/Courses/Graduate/Wireless%20Communications_F08/Lecture%20four%
20channel%20II.pdf.
2.
http://staff.neu.edu.tr/~fahri/wireless_chp6.pdf.
15ECA10
VERY LARGE SCALE INTEGRATED CIRCUITS
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To understand the characteristics of CMOS systems

To discuss the delay models and interconnects in CMOS circuits

To study the HDL fundamentals
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Analyze the operation of various CMOS circuits

Apply the techniques for circuit characterization

Synthesize the combinational and sequential circuits using Verilog HDL
PREREQUISITES:
Basic electronic devices and circuits, CMOS circuits, integrated circuits
UNIT I
SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES
9
PN junction diode – forward and reverse bias characteristics – Bipolar Junction Transistors – Input and Output
characteristics of CE, CB& CC Configuration.
UNIT II
FIELD EFFECT TRANSISTOR
9
JFETs – Drain and Transfer characteristics – Pinch off voltage and its significance – MOSFETCharacteristics –
DMOSFET – E MOSFET.
UNIT III
IC FABRICATION
9
IC classification – fundamental of monolithic IC technology – epitaxial growth, masking and etching – diffusion of
impurities. Realisation of monolithic ICs and packaging – Fabrication of diodes – capacitance, resistance and
FETs.
UNIT IV
MOS DEVICE CHARACTERISTICS
9
Ideal I–V and C–V characteristics – non ideal I–V effects – DC transfer characteristics – Scaling of Devices.
UNIT V
HARDWARE DESCRIPTION LANGUAGE
9
Verilog HDL fundamentals – Types of Modeling – HDL for Logic Gates – Half Adder – Full Adder – Half / Full
Subtractor – Comparators.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
rd
1.
Donald A Neaman, “Semiconductor Physics and Devices”, 3 Edition, Tata McGrawHill Inc. 2007
2.
D.RoyChoudhary, SheilB.Jani, “Linear Integrated Circuits”, 2
nd
Edition, New Age, 2003.
rd
3.
N.H.E.Westeetal, “CMOS VLSI Design”,3 Edition, Pearson, 2005
4.
Samir Palnitkar, “Verilog HDL – A Guide to Digital Design and Synthesis”, Pearson, 2003.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Wayne Wolf, “FPGA– based System Design”, Pearson, 2004
2.
Mark Gordon Arnold, “Verilog Digital – Computer Design”, Prentice Hall (PTR), 1999.
3.
MichealD.Ciletti, “Modeling, Synthesis and Rapid Prototyping with the Verilog HDL”, Prentice Hall, 1999.
147
WEB REFERENCES:
1.
http://www.eolss.net/sample-chapters/c05/e6-195-04.pdf
2.
http://web.ewu.edu/groups/technology/Claudio/ee430/Lectures/L1-print.pdf
3.
http://www.circuitstoday.com/integrated-circuits
4.
http://www.tutorialspoint.com/vlsi_design/vlsi_design_digital_system.htm
Offered by Mechanical Department
SEMESTER V
15MEA01
AUTOMOTIVE MAINTENANCE AND POLLUTION CONTROL
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

The concepts of automobile maintenance

The methods of pollution control in automobiles
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Understand the basic concept of engine maintenance

Acquire knowledge about the Chassis Drive-line Maintenance

Understand the Maintenance and servicing of auxiliaries

Understand concept of Air Pollution due to Automobile Exhaust and its control methods

Understand about Exhaust Emission Control

Thermal Engineering

Automobile Engineering
UNIT I
ENGINE MAINTENANCE
9
Engine troubles, effects & remedies, different major & minor services for engine, inspection and checking of
components visually and dimensionally, reconditioning methods of engine components, engine tune-up, special
tools & advanced equipment.
UNIT II
CHASSIS DRIVE-LINE MAINTENANCE
9
Maintenance, repair and servicing of clutches, Fluid flywheel, gear boxes, Automatic transmission, Continuously
Variable Transmission (CVT) unit, propeller shaft, differential unit, front axle and rear axle, suspension systems,
servicing of brake systems- hydraulic, air systems, brake bleeding and brakes adjustments, maintenance and
servicing of steering system-Manual & Power Steering system, wheel balancing, wheel alignment, maintenance
of tyres, tyre rotation, frame defects, chassis frame alignment.
UNIT III
MAINTENANCE, SERVICING OF AUXILIARIES
9
Cooling system service, anti-corrosion additives, anti-freezing solutions, dry & wet liners, petrol fuel and diesel
fuel system maintenance, Multi-Point Fuel Injection (MPFI) maintenance, lubrication system services, chassis
lubrication, lubrication chart, maintenance and care of storage batteries, battery testing methods, maintenance of
ignition systems, tyre service & reconditioning.
UNIT IV
AIR POLLUTION DUE TO AUTOMOBILE EXHAUST
9
Sources of Emission, Exhaust gas constituents & analysis, Ingredients responsible for air pollution, Smoke,
odour, Smog formation, Sources of pollution, effects, Analysis of air pollutants, Air pollution control models and
equipment.
UNIT V
EXHAUST EMISSION CONTROL
9
Basic methods of emission control, catalytic converter, After burners, reactor manifold, air injection, crank case
148
emission control, evaporative loss control, Exhaust gas recirculation, Fuel additives. Pollution Norms: European
pollution norms, Indian pollution norms as per Central Motor Vehicle Rules (C.M.V.R.), Measurement Devices for
HC, CO,NOX,Smoke.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
John B. Heyhood, “Internal Combustion Engines Fundamentals”, McGraw Hill, 1989.
2.
Stone.R, “Introduction to Internal Combustion Engines”, CBS Publishers & Distributors, 2002.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Newton, Steeds and Garet, “Motor Vehicles”, Society of Automotive Engineers, U.S., 13th revised
Edition, 2002.
2.
Joseph Heitner, “Automotive Mechanics”, East-West Press, 2nd Edition, 2004.
3.
Martin W. Stockel and Martin T Stockel, “Automotive Mechanics Fundamentals,” Goodheart-Willcox Co;
Instructor's Manual Edition 2005.
4.
Heinz Heisler, “Advanced Engine Technology”, SAE International
15MEA02
Publications USA, 2003.
FUNDAMENTALS OF ENERGY RESOURCES
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVE:

To enable the students to understand the interaction between different parts of the energy system.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Understand the basics of energy systems.

Apply the fundamentals of energy conversion for practical applications.

Realize the importance of non-conventional energy systems.

Understand the concepts of Biomass energy.

Know about energy conservation techniques.

Power plant Technology.

Heat Transfer.
UNIT I
ENERGY
9
Introduction to energy – Global energy scene – Indian energy scene - Units of energy conversion factors, general
classification of energy, energy crisis, energy alternatives.
UNIT II
CONVENTIONAL ENERGY
9
Conventional energy resources, Thermal, hydel and nuclear reactors, Thermal, hydel and nuclear power plants,
Efficiency, merits and de-merits of the above power plants, combustion processes, fluidized bed combustion.
UNIT III
NON-CONVENTIONAL ENERGY
9
Solar energy, solar thermal systems, flat plate collectors, focusing collectors, solar water heating, solar cooling,
solar distillation, solar refrigeration, solar dryers, solar pond, solar thermal power generation, solar energy
application in India, energy plantations. Wind energy, types of windmills, ocean wave energy conversion, ocean
thermal energy conversion, tidal energy conversion, geothermal energy.
UNIT IV
BIOMASS ENERGY
9
Biomass origin - Resources – Biomass estimation. Thermochemical conversion – Biological conversion,
Chemical conversion – Hydrolysis & hydrogenation, bio-crude, biodiesel power generation, gasifier, biogas,
integrated gasification.
149
UNIT V
ENERGY CONSERVATION
9
Energy conservation - Act; Energy management importance, duties and responsibilities; Energy audit – Types
and methodology, reports, instruments. Material and energy balance, thermal energy management.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
Rao, S. and Parulekar, B.B., “Energy Technology”, Khanna Publishers, 2005.
2.
Rai, G.D., “Non-conventional Energy Sources”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2010.
3.
Nagpal, G.R., “Power Plant Engineering”, Khanna Publishers, 2008.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Godfrey Boyle, “Renewable Energy, Power for a Sustainable Future”, Oxford University Press, U.K., 3rd
Revised Edition 2012.
2.
Twidell, J.W. & Weir, A., “Renewable Energy Sources”, EFN Spon Ltd., UK, 1986.
3.
Tiwari G.N., “Solar Energy – Fundamentals Design, Modelling and applications”, Narosa Publishing
House, New Delhi, 2002.
4.
Freris L.L., “Wind Energy Conversion systems”, Prentice Hall, UK, 1990.
15MEA03
MANUFACTURING FOR INDUSTRIAL ELECTRONICS
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

Electronics manufacturing.

Surface Mount Technology and Packing Technology.

Defects, Inspection techniques employed in SMT assembly process.

Repair, rework and quality aspects of Electronics assemblies.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Understand the basics of Electronics manufacturing and fabrication steps.

Know the types of Mounting and Packaging Technologies.

Know various Defects, Inspection techniques employed in SMT assembly process.

Learn repair, rework and quality aspects of Electronics assemblies.

Crystal Structure, Semi-conducting materials.

Atomic Structure, Miller Indices, Periodic table, Crystal defects.

Various Joining processes, filing and assembly tools.

Silicon and its chemistry.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION OF SEMICONDUCTORS
9
Semiconductor materials, devices – Process technology – Basic fabrication steps – Oxidation,
Photolithography, Etching, Diffusion, Ion implantation, Metallization – Material characterization – Wafer
shaping – Crystal characterization.
UNIT II
ETCHING AND DIFFUSION
9
Etching – Definition – Types - Wet chemical etching – Silicon, Silicon Dioxide, Silicon Nitride and Polysilicon,
Aluminum, Gallium Arsenide – Dry etching – Reactive plasma etching – Techniques and equipment –
Applications – Diffusion – Definition – Basic diffusion process – Extrinsic diffusion – Lateral diffusion.
150
UNIT III
SURFACE MOUNT TECHNOLOGY AND PACKAGING
9
Introduction to packaging, types – Pin grid array package, Ball grid array package – Attachment
methodologies – Wire bonding, Tape automated bonding, Flip chip bonding – Surface mount technology –
Introduction – Through hole components.
UNIT IV
INSPECTION AND TESTING
9
Inspection techniques, equipment and principle - AOI, X-ray. Defects and Corrective action - Stencil printing
process, component placement process, reflow soldering process, under fill and encapsulation process Electrical testing of PCB assemblies- In circuit test, functional testing - Fixtures and jigs.
UNIT V
REPAIR, REWORK, QUALITY AND RELIABILITY OF ELECTRONICS
ASSEMBLIES
9
Repair tools – Methods - Rework criteria and process - Thermo-mechanical effects and thermal management Reliability fundamentals - Reliability testing - Failure analysis - Design for manufacturability - Assembly –
Reworkability – Testing - Reliability and environment.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
Gary S. May, Simon M. Sze, “Fundamentals of Semiconductor Fabrication”, Wiley Student Edition,
2004.
2.
Ray Prasad,” Surface Mount Technology – Principles and practice”, Second Edition, Chapman and
Hall, New York, 1997.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Puligandla Viswanadham and Pratap Singh, Chapman and Hall, “Failure Modes and Mechanisms in
Electronic Packages”, New York, N.Y, 1998.
2.
Ning - Cheng Lee, “Reflow Soldering Process and Trouble Shooting SMT, BGA, CSP and Flip Chip
Technologies”, Elsevier Science, 1995.
3.
Zarrow, Phil, “Surface Mount Technology Terms and Concepts”, Elsevier Science and Technology,
1997.
4.
C.A.Harper, “Electronic Packaging and Interconnection Handbook”, McGraw Hill Inc.,New York,
N.Y.,2004.
15MEA04
HUMAN FACTORS IN ENGINEERING
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To recognize the important issues concerned with the human factors aspects of tasks, products and
environments.

To study human behaviour during working.

To know the methods of quantifying and predicting human comfort, human performance and human
health.

To recognize the role of standards, recommendations and regulations applicable to tasks, products
and environments.

To recognize limitations to predict human responses, including inter-subject variability and intrasubject variability.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Able to explain the various aspects of human sensory and cognitive attributes that influence human
performance.

Able to design the working space, work station ergonomically by considering human body
dimensions.
151

Able to predict the human behaviour, human comfort and human performance during working.

Able to design man machine system effectively.

Able to assess human skill and capabilities.

Basics of ergonomics, various work postures and risk factors.

Interest to study the human behaviour such as motivation talk, personality and determination of
attitudes.

Ability to understand the concept behind man-machine system, theory behind Ergonomics system
and virtual environments.

Design of systems, tools and equipment, Knowledge of Man-Machine systems.

Work study, Method study, Motion study.
UNIT I
ERGONOMICS AND ANATOMY
9
Introduction to ergonomics: The focus of ergonomics, ergonomics and its areas of application in the work
system, a brief history of ergonomics, attempts to humanize work, modern ergonomics,
Posture stability and posture adaptation, low back pain, risk factors for musculoskeletal disorders in the
workplace, behavioral aspects of posture.
UNIT II
HUMAN BEHAVIOR
9
Individual differences, Factors contributing to personality, fitting the man to the job, Influence of difference on
safety, Method of measuring characteristics, Accident Proneness.
Motivation, Complexity of Motivation, Job satisfaction. Management theories of motivation, Job enrichment
theory. Frustration and Conflicts, -Determination of attitudes, changing attitudes. Motivational requirements.
UNIT III
ANTHROPOMETRY AND WORK DESIGN FOR STANDING AND SEATED
WORKS
9
Designing for a population of users, percentile, sources of human variability, anthropometry and its uses in
ergonomics, principles of applied anthropometry in ergonomics, application of anthropometry in design, design
for everyone, anthropometry and personal space, effectiveness and cost effectiveness
Fundamental aspects of standing and sitting, an ergonomics approach to work station design, design for
standing workers, design for seated workers, work surface design, visual display units, guidelines for design of
static work, effectiveness and cost effectiveness, research directions
UNIT IV
MAN- MACHINE SYSTEM AND REPETITIVE WORKS AND MANUAL
HANDLING TASK
9
Applications of human factors engineering, man as a sensor, man as information processor, man as controller
– Man Vs Machine.
Ergonomics interventions in Repetitive works, handle design, key board design- measures for preventing in
work related musculoskeletal disorders (WMSDs), reduction and controlling, training.
Anatomy and biomechanics of manual handling, prevention of manual handling injuries in the work place,
design of manual handling tasks, carrying, and postural stability.
UNIT V
HUMAN SKILL & PERFORMANCE AND DISPLAY, CONTROLS AND
9
VIRTUAL ENVIRONMENTS
Human strength capabilities - Features of the human body- measures of the physiological functions-strength
and endurance- speed of movements.
Principles for the design of visual displays- auditory displays- design of controls- combining displays and
controls- virtual (synthetic) environments, research issues.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOK:
1.
Bridger R.S., “Introduction to Ergonomics”, CRC Press; 3rd Edition, 2008.
152
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Michael O’Neill, “Ergonomic Design for Organizational Effectiveness”, CRC Press; 2ndEdition 1998.
2.
Mark S. Sanders, “Human Factors in Engineering & Design”, McGraw-Hill Higher Education; 7th
Edition, 1992.
3.
Philip Jacobs, Dan McLeod & Nancy Larson, “The Ergonomics Manual”, Saunders group, UK, 1990.
4.
Thomas A. Hunter, “Engineering Design for Safety”, McGraw-Hill, 1992.
15MEA05
DECISION SUPPORT SYSTEMS
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To review and clarify the fundamental terms, concepts associated with Decision Support Systems,
computerized decision aids, expert systems, group support systems and executive support systems.

To discuss the modelling and analysis of the Decision Support Systems.

To understand the enterprise DSS and knowledge management.

To understand the intelligent systems used in DSS.

To discuss organizational and social implications of Decision Support Systems.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Demonstrate an understanding of the theory of decisions and decision analysis including probability,
decisions under uncertainty, risk taking, and real-world problems.

Demonstrate the different models used in the DSS.

Analyze, design and build an information system using emerging tools and technologies for a given
business problem.

Recognize the relationship between enterprise information needs and decision making.

Explain the components and concepts of DSS, their characteristics and capabilities.

Analyze typical decision situations to determine whether it is practical to support them with computer
technology and, if so, how.

Gain an appreciation of working on systems development projects in a team environment and obtain
experience with project management.

Describe and understand the concept of decision support systems including collection of data,
database management, modeling, group and organizational decision support systems, executive
information systems, and expert systems.

Operation analysis.

Reasoning skills and critical thinking.

Deductive problem solving techniques.
UNIT I
DECISION MAKING AND COMPUTERIZED SUPPORT
9
Decision Making: Introduction and Definitions - Managers and Decision Making - Managerial decision making
and Information Systems - Managers and computerized support Need - framework for decision support –
concept of decision support systems (DSS) –executive support systems - preview of the modeling processphases of decision making process.
UNIT II
MODELING AND ANALYSIS
9
DSS components- DSS classifications - Data warehousing, access, analysis, mining and visualization -
153
modeling and analysis- Static and dynamic models – influence diagrams – Optimization via mathematical
programming – Heuristic programming – simulation – multidimensional modeling – model base management.
UNIT III
ENTERPRISE DECISION SUPPORT SYSTEMS AND KNOWLEDGE
MANAGEMENT
9
Group decision making – Group support systems- Technologies – Creativity and Idea generation - enterprise
information systems (EIS) – Comparing and Integrating EIS and DSS - supply and value chain and DSSsupply chain problems and solutions – Computerized systems - knowledge management methods,
technologies and tools.
UNIT IV
INTELLIGENT SYSTEMS
9
Artificial intelligence (AI) – Concepts and Definitions – AI versus natural intelligence - expert systemsconcepts, structure, types and benefits and problems – knowledge Engineering - knowledge acquisition and
validation - knowledge representation – Techniques – Inference techniques
UNIT V
IMPLEMENTATION, INTEGRATION, AND IMPACTS
9
Implementation – Major issues of implementation – implementation strategies – Models of integration –
Intelligent DSS – Intelligent modelling and model management – problems and issues in integration - impact of
management support systems - overview – personnel management issues – impact of Individuals – Impacts
on productivity, quality and competitiveness – Issues of legality, privacy and ethics – Other societal impacts.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
Efraim Turban and Jay E Aronson, “Decision Support and Intelligent Systems”, Prentice Hall,
6thEdition, 2010.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
George M. Marakas, “Decision Support Systems”, Prentice Hall, 2nd Edition, 2002.
2.
Daniel J. Power, “Decision Support Systems: Concepts and Resources for Managers”, Greenwood
Publishing Group, 1st Edition, 2002.
3.
Quazi Khabeer, “Business Process Management and Decision Support Systems”, Alpha Science
International Limited, 1stEdition, 2013.
4.
Elain Rich, Kevin Knight and Shivashankar B. Nair , “Artificial intelligence”, Tata McGraw-Hill
Publishing Company Limited, 3rd Edition, 2009.
15MEA06
ENGINEERING ECONOMICS AND COST ANALYSIS
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To learn about the basics of economics.

To make cost analysis related to engineering so as to take economically sound decisions.

To learn about different types of maintenance analysis.

To learn about depreciation and inflation.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the completion of the course the students will be able to

Understand the concept of Engineering Economics, types of costs and make economic analysis.

Remember, understand and apply various Interest formulae and their applications for different
investment situations.

Compare and analyze various investment alternatives and make appropriate decisions.

Make replacement and maintenance analysis to take optimal decisions.

Understand the concept of depreciation, and inflation.
154

Economics basics.

Profit and Loss.

Concept of money, loans.

Interest rate, maintenance
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO ECONOMICS
9
Introduction to economics-Flow in an economy-Law of supply and demand, Concept of engineering
economics-Engineering efficiency, economic efficiency, Scope of engineering economics – Elements of costs,
marginal cost, marginal revenue, sunk cost, opportunity cost, break-even analysis- V ratio, Elementary
economic analysis – Material selection for product design selection for a product, process planning.
UNIT II
VALUE ENGINEERING
9
Make or buy decision, Value engineering – Function, aims, Value engineering procedure. Interest formulae
and their applications –Time value of money, Single payment compound amount factor, Single payment
present worth factor, Equal payment series sinking fund factor, Equal payment series payment Present worth
factor- equal payment series capital recovery factor-Uniform gradient series annual equivalent factor, Effective
interest rate, Examples in all the methods.
UNIT III
CASH FLOW
9
Methods of comparison of alternatives – present worth method (Revenue dominated cash flow diagram),
Future worth method (Revenue dominated cash flow diagram, cost dominated cash flow diagram), Annual
equivalent method (Revenue dominated cash flow diagram, cost dominated cash flow diagram), rate of return
method, Examples in all the methods.
UNIT IV
REPLACEMENT AND MAINTENANCE ANALYSIS
9
Replacement and Maintenance analysis – Types of maintenance, types of replacement problem,
determination of economic life of an asset, Replacement of an asset with a new asset – capital recovery with
return and concept of challenger and defender, Simple probabilistic model for items which fail completely.
UNIT V
DEPRECIATION
9
Depreciation- Introduction, Straight line method of depreciation, declining balance method of depreciation-Sum
of the years digits method of depreciation, sinking fund method of depreciation/ Annuity method of
depreciation, service output method of depreciation-Evaluation of public alternatives- introduction, Examples,
Inflation adjusted decisions – procedure to adjust inflation, Examples on comparison of alternatives and
determination of economic life of asset.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
Panneer Selvam, R, “Engineering Economics”, Prentice Hall of India Ltd, New Delhi, 2nd Edition,
2014.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Chan S.Park, “Contemporary Engineering Economics”, Prentice Hall of India, 6th Edition2015.
2.
Donald.G. Newman, Jerome.P.Lavelle, “Engineering Economics and analysis”, Oxford University
Press, 12th Edition, 2013.
3.
Degarmo, E.P., Sullivan, W.G and Canada, J.R, “Engineering Economy”, Pearson, 6th Edition2014.
4.
Grant.E.L, Ireson.W.G, and Leavenworth, R.S, “Principles of Engineering Economy”, Wiley, 8th
Edition1990.
5.
Smith, G.W., “Engineering Economy”, Iowa State Press, 4th Edition1987.
155
15MEA07
NANO TECHNOLOGY
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To understand the basics behind the nanotechnology.

To impart knowledge on the synthesis of various nanomaterials.

To acquire knowledge on the characterization tools used in nanotechnology.

To have exposure on nanomaterials patterning technologies.

To gain knowledge on nanodevices and their purpose in the engineering applications.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the students will be able to:

Demonstrate the classification and properties of nanomaterials.

Able to synthesis various nanomaterials.

Identify the various characterization techniques using sophisticated techniques.

Understand the patterning and lithographic techniques.

Apply the perceptions of the nanotechnology for various technical applications.

Material Science.

Basic knowledge in Physics and Chemistry.

Fundamentals and technological importance of new materials.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Nanoscale architecture -Classification of nanostructures - Surface to volume ratio -Fraction of surface atoms –
Surface energy- changes to the system total energy - effect of nanoscale dimensions on various properties –
thermal, chemical, mechanical, magnetic, optical and electronic properties.
UNIT II
PREPARATION METHODOLOGIES
9
Fabrication methods – top down processes – milling, ECAP process – bottomup process – vapour phase
deposition methods – plasmaassisted deposition process - MBE and MOMBE - liquid phase methods colloidal and solgel methods – methods for templating the growth of nanomaterials – ordering of nanosystems
- self-assembly.
UNIT III
CHARACTERISATION
9
Analytical and imaging techniques - Electron Microscopy: Scanning Electron Microscopy, Transmission
Electron Microscopy - Scanning Tunnelling Microscopy - Atomic Force Microscopy – X-Ray diffraction
techniques – Spectroscopy techniques – Raman spectroscopy – surface analysis and depth profiling.
UNIT IV
PATTERNING AND LITHOGRAPHY TECHNIQUES
9
Optical lithography – Electron lithography - X-ray Lithography - Ion lithography. Plasma properties – Feature
size control and anisotropy etch mechanism – Lift off techniques – Plasma reactor – Fl2 & Cl2 based etching –
Relative plasma etching techniques and equipments.
UNIT V
NANODEVICES
9
Single Electron devices: Nano scale MOSFET – Resonant tunnelling transistor – Single electron transistors Single electron dynamics - Nano robotics and Nano manipulation DNA based nano devices – Gas based nano
devices - Quantum structures and devices - Quantum layers, wells, dots and wires - Carbon nanotube based
logic gates, optical devices - Connection with quantum devices- Single molecule electronic devices – photonic
band gap systems - applications.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Timp Gregory, “Nanotechnology”, Springer, 2012.
156
2.
Guozhong Cao, “Nanosrtuctures and nanomaterials: Synthesis, properties and applications”, Imperial
College Press, 2004.
3.
Robert Kelsall, Ian Hamley, Mark Geoghegan, “Nanoscale Science and Technology”, John Wiley &
sons, Inc., 2005.
4.
Michael Kohler, Wolfgang Fritzsche, “Nanotechnology: An Introduction to Nano structuring
Techniques”, Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH, 2009.
5.
Charles. P. Poole, Frank. J. Owens, “Introduction to Nanotechnology”, John Wiley, 2010.
6.
Stefan Landis, “Nano Lithography”, Wiley, 2011.
7.
Pradeep T., “A Text book of Nanoscience and Nanotechnology”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2012.
15MEA08
FUEL CELL & HYDROGEN ENERGY
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
•
To familiarize the need and production of Hydrogen.
•
To impart basic knowledge about Fuel cell.
•
To analyze the fuel cell from the thermodynamics perspective.
•
To understand the different components and types of fuel cell.
•
To know the heat and mass transfer analysis and current issues of fuel cell.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the students are able to
•
To acquire the basics involved in the production of Hydrogen and its storage.
•
To understand the working principle of fuel cell.
•
To gather knowledge about the thermodynamics, and electrochemical engineering perspectives of
fuel cell technology.
•
To acquire fundamental knowledge in the development of fuel cell technology.
•
Gathered the fundamental knowledge about the heat and mass transfer in fuel cell.
•
Basic chemistry.
•
Thermodynamics
UNIT I
HYDROGEN ENERGY
9
Hydrogen: Its merit as a fuel; Applications, Hydrogen production methods - Production of hydrogen from fossil
fuels, electrolysis, thermal decomposition, photochemical and photo-catalytic methods. Hydrogen storage
methods - Metal hydrides, metallic alloy hydrides, carbon nano-tubes, sea as source of deuterium.
UNIT II
FUEL CELL BASICS
7
Fuel cell definition, Difference between batteries and fuel cells, fuel cell history, components of fuel cells,
principle of working of fuel cells
UNIT III
FUEL CELL THERMODYNAMICS
10
Second law analysis of fuel cells, efficiency of fuel cells, fuel cell electrochemistry - Nernst equation,
Electrochemical kinetics, Butler-Volmer equation, Fuel cell types - Classification by operating
temperature/electrolyte type, Fuel Cell Performance, Activation, Ohmic and Concentration over potential
UNIT IV
FUEL CELL DESIGN AND COMPONENTS
9
Cell components, stack components, system components, Overview of intermediate/high temperature fuel
cells - Solid oxide fuel cells (SOFC), Molten carbonate fuel cells (MCFC), Phosphoric acid fuel cells (PAFC),
Polymer Electrolyte fuel cells (PEFC)
157
UNIT V
HEAT AND MASS TRANSFER IN FUEL CELLS
10
Heat and mass transfer in polymer electrolyte fuel cells, water management in PEFCs, Current issues in
PEFCs Direct methanol fuel cells (DMFC) - Electrochemical kinetics methanol oxidation, Current issues in
DMFCs, Fuel crossover in DMFCs, Water management in DMFCs, high methanol concentration operation,
limiting current density
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
J. Larminie and A. Dicks, “Fuel Cell Systems Explained”, SAE International and John Wiley &
Sons,2nd Edition, 2003.
2.
Xianguo Li, “Principles of Fuel Cells”, Taylor and Francis, New York, 2005.
3.
S. Srinivasan, “Fuel Cells: From Fundamentals to Applications”, Springer US, CBS Publishers: New
Delhi, 2006.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Ryan O'Hayre, Suk-Won Cha, Whitney Colella and Fritz B. Prinz, “Fuel Cell Fundamentals”, Wiley,
2nd Edition, 2008.
2.
Allen J. Bard and Larry R. Faulkner, “Electrochemical Methods: Fundamentals and Applications”,
John Wiley & Sons, 2nd Edition, 2001.
3.
Amir Faghriand Yuwen Zhang, “Transport Phenomena in Multiphase Systems”, Academic Press; 1st
Edition, 2006.
15MEA09
BIO-MECHANICS AND HUMAN BODY VIBRATION
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To know the functions of various muscular skeletal system and anthrometry.

To correlate the human body vibration and muscular skeletal system.

To know about various bio mechanical models and acquire knowledge on work capacity.

To know about the various types of vibration and its relevant criteria.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the students would

Analyse the various types of vibration and its relation to the bio mechanical models.

Acquire knowledge on Anthrometric data and Bio mechanical studies in the industries.

Acquire the knowledge on evaluation of work capacity vibration measurement.

Basic knowledge on biology.

Fundamentals of Engineering Mechanics.
UNIT I
VIBRATION
9
Introduction, vibration exciters, control systems, Performance specification, motion sensors and transducers
UNIT II
MUSCULARSKELETAL SYSTEM AND ANTHROPOMETRY IN
BIOMECHANICS
9
Introduction, structure and function of musculoskeletal system - Connective Tissue, Skeletal Muscle, Joints
Measurement of body segment, physical properties, Anthropometric data for biomechanical studies in
industry
UNIT III
MECHANICAL WORK CAPACITY EVALUATION AND
BIOINSTRUMENTATION
9
Joint motion, human motion analysis system, applied electromyography, intradiscal pressure measurement,
158
intrabdominal measurement, force platform system, whole body vibration measurement.
UNIT IV
BIOMECHANICAL MODELS
9
Planar static biomechanical models, static 3D modelling, dynamic biomechanical models, special purpose
biomechanical models.
UNIT V
WHOLE BODY AND SEGMENTAL VIBRATION
9
Vibration on human body, whole body vibration, Hand-Transmitted Vibration, segmental vibration, vibration
exposure criteria.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
Vibration and Shock Handbook, Clarence W. De Silva, Taylor and Francis Group, 2005.
REFERENCE BOOK:
Occupational Biomechanics, Don B. Chaffin and Gunnar B.J.Andersson, John Wiley and sons, Inc.
15MEA10
FUNDAMENTALS OF THERMAL SCIENCE
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

The interaction between different concepts of thermodynamics and heat transfer.

The application of thermodynamics and heat transfer to various industries.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Understand the basic concepts of thermodynamics.

Acquire knowledge about the power plants.

Know the applications of psychrometry.

Understand the basic concepts of Refrigeration.

Understand the basic concepts of Air conditioning.

Engineering Thermodynamics

Power plant technology

Thermal Engineering
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO THERMODYNAMICS
12
Basic Concepts: System, Control Volume, Surrounding, Boundaries, Universe, Types of Systems,
Thermodynamic Equilibrium, Property, Process, Cycle – Reversibility – Quasi-static Process, Irreversible
Process, Types, Work and Heat, Point and Path function, Concept of quality of Temperature, Principles of
Thermometry, Steady Flow Energy Equation, Limitations of First Law of Thermodynamics, Second law of
Thermodynamics, entropy (Elementary treatment only).
UNIT II
POWER PLANTS
7
Introduction to thermodynamic cycles, Steam, Hydel, Diesel, Tidal, Geothermal, Wind, Solar power plantsschematic and working.
UNIT III
PSYCHROMETRY
7
Properties of air-water vapour mixtures: Dry Bulb Temperature, Wet Bulb Temperature, Relative Humidity, dew
point temperature, degree of saturation, thermodynamic wet bulb temperature, enthalpy of moist air, sensible
heating and cooling, Adiabatic humidification and dehumidification, By-pass factor, Cooling load calculations
using psychrometric table and chart.
159
UNIT IV
REFRIGERATION
12
Vapour compression refrigeration cycle- super heat, sub cooling – Performance calculations - working principle
of vapour absorption system, Ammonia –Water, Lithium bromide –water systems (Description only) - Alternate
refrigerants – Comparison between vapour compression and absorption systems
UNIT V
AIR CONDITIONING
7
Air conditioning system: Types, Working Principles – Cooling Load calculations – Concept of Room Sensible
Heat Factor, Grand Sensible Heat Factor, Effective Sensible Heat Factor.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Note: Use of standard thermodynamic tables, Mollier diagram, Psychrometric chart and refrigerant
propertytables are permitted in the examination
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
Sarkar, B.K, “Thermal Engineering”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishers, 2007.
2.
Kothandaraman.C.P, Domkundwar.S, Domkundwar. A.V., “A course in thermal engineering“, Dhanpat
Rai & sons, 5th Edition, 2012.
3.
Nag.P.K, “Engineering Thermodynamics”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 4th Edition, New Delhi, 2008.
4.
Nag P. K, “Power Plant Engineering”, Tata McGraw- Hill, 3rdEdition, 2007.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Rajput. R. K., “Thermal Engineering” S.Chand Publishers , 2010
2.
Cengel, “Thermodynamics – An Engineering Approach” TataMcGraw Hill, New Delhi, 5th Edition,
2006.
3.
EI-Wakil M.M, “Power Plant Technology”, Tata McGraw-Hill 2001.
15MEA11
FUNDAMENTALS OF LITHOGRAPHY
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Lithography is a study of printing micron to nano scale features on silicon wafer. Complete understanding of
the course makes the student technically strong in nano fabrication.

To impart sound knowledge about the fundamentals of clean room and nano fabrication by optical
projection lithography.

To emphasize about the importance of mask and maskless lithography.

To motivate the pattern transfer technique with high energetic electron beam concepts.

This course provides information about printing the pattern with ion beam sources.

To enable the knowledge about printing with soft lithographic concepts and etching the
unwantedportions.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After studying this course students will be able to:

It emphasize about the fabrication of integrated circuits on microchip using optical principles.

Understand about the extreme UV light and zone plates as maskless techniques.

Applying scanning electron beam techniques in nano fabrication.

Imparts knowledge about the use of Ion beam/focused ion beam as tools for developing nano objects.

Provides impression about soft lithography techniques and various modes of etching.

Fundamentals of Nanoscience and Technology.

Microelectro mechanical systems and Nano electro mechanical systems.
160

Fundamentals of Micro fabrication.

Fundamental principles of optical lithography.
UNIT I
PHOTOLITHOGRAPHY AND PATTERNING OF THIN FILMS
10
Introduction to lithography – lithography processes; mask making, wafer pre-treatment, resist spinning – prebake, exposure, development and rinsing, post-bake, resist stripping, positive and negative photoresists – lift
off profile - introduction to semiconductor processing - necessity for a clean room - different types of clean
rooms - maintenance of a clean room – micro fabrication process flow diagram – chip cleaning, coating of
photoresists, patterning, etching, inspection – process integration - etching techniques - reactive Ion etching magnetically enhanced RIE- Ion beam etching - other etching techniques.
UNIT II
PHOTOLITHOGRAPHY AND PATTERNING OF THIN FILMS
9
Lithography - optical lithography - different modes - optical projection lithography - multistage scanners –
resolution and limits of photolithography – resolution enhancement techniques - photo mask- binary mask phase shifting mask - attenuated phase shift masks - alternating phase shift masks - off axis illumination optical proximity correction - sub resolution assist feature enhancement - optical immersion lithography.
UNIT III
DIRECT WRITING METHODS - MASKLESS OPTICAL LITHOGRAPHY
7
Maskless optical projection lithography – types, advantages and limitations – required components - zone
plate array lithography - extreme ultraviolet lithography – light sources - optics and materials issues.
UNIT IV
ELECTRON BEAM LITHOGRAPHY, ION BEAM & X-RAY
LITHOGRAPHY
10
Scanning electron - beam lithography - electron sources and electron optics system – maskless EBL- electron
beam projection lithography - scattering with angular limitation projection e-beam lithography - projection
reduction exposure with variable axis immersion lenses - Ion beam lithography - focusing ion beam lithography
- ion projection lithography – X-ray lithography – X-ray masks, resists, merits and demerits - atom lithography.
UNIT V
NANOIMPRINT LITHOGRAPHY AND SOFT LITHOGRAPHY
9
Nano imprint lithography - hot embossing - soft Lithography- moulding/replica moulding: PDMS stamps printing with soft stamps - edge lithography - dip-pen lithography - set up and working principle – selfassembly – LB films.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Chris Mack, “Fundamental principles of optical lithography: The science of micro fabrication”, Wiley,
2008.
2.
M. Madou, “Fundamentals of micro fabrication”, 2nd Edition, CRC Press, 2002.
3.
Stepanova, Maria, “Nano fabrication techniques and principles”, Dew, Steven (Eds.) Springer, 2012.
4.
John A. Rogers & Hong H. Lee, “Unconventional nano patterning techniques and applications”, A
John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2009.
5.
Sergey Edward Lyshevski, “MEMS and NEMS: Systems, devices and structures”, CRC Press LLC,
2002.
6.
Zheng Cui, “Nano fabrication – Principles, capabilities and limits”, Springer Science, 2008.
7.
Mark J. Jackson, “Micro fabrication and nano manufacturing”, CRC Press Taylor & Francis Group,
2006.
15MEA12
FUNDAMENTALS OF FIRE SAFETY ENGINEERING
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To provide an in depth knowledge about the fundamentals of fire and explosion.

To understand the causes and effects of fire and explosion.
161
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3

To know the various fire and explosion prevention systems and protective equipment.

To understand the protection of building from fire.

To understand the various fire prevention techniques to be followed in a building.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

To make familiar about basic concepts of fire and explosion science.

To k n o w t h e d i f f e r e n t causes and effects of fire and explosion.

To understand the operation of various types of fire fighting equipment.

To understand the prevention of explosion.

To equip the students to effectively employ fire protection techniques in building.

Fundamentals of Thermodynamics.

Various modes of heat transfer.

Fluid mechanics, Engineering Chemistry, Engineering Physics.

Building materials used for construction.
UNIT I
FUNDAMENTALS OF FIRE
9
Combustion process & concepts, combustion in solids, liquid, gases- smouldering fires- Spontaneous
combustion - rapid fire progress phenomena- Properties influencing fire hazard – properties of solid, liquid
and gaseous fuels - classification of fires.
UNIT II
FIRE CONTROL
9
Fire extinguishers – Location and operation of extinguishers - Extinguishing methods- extinguishing agents:
water, foam, chemical powder, CO2, sand, steam, saw dust – Fire detectors – Fire tender - Automatic fire
extinguishing system - Fixed fire fighting installations - Risk analysis: risk assessment, consequence analysis,
risk reduction – Fire drill – Emergency procedures.
UNIT III
PRODUCTS AND EFFECTS OF COMBUSTION
9
Heat: Conduction, convection, radiation- effects of heat- effects of flames – different fire gases and their
effects – effects of smoke on humans– Smoke movement control and venting - Effects of explosion – Negative
pressure wave – Fragmentation – case studies.
UNIT IV
BUILDING FIRE SAFETY
9
Objectives of fire safe building design, Fire load, fire resistant material and fire testing – concept of egress
design - exits – width calculations -– fire safety requirements for high rise buildings – Behavior of materials &
structures in fire – Concrete and steel. Flame spread in high rise building – Statutory requirements.
UNIT V
FUNDAMENTALS OF EXPLOSION
9
Introduction – Explosion fundamentals – Types – Physical, BLEVE, Chemical explosion – Vapour cloud
explosion – Dust explosion – Explosion prevention – Explosion mitigation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
Purandare D.D., Abhay D. Purandare, “Hand Book on Industrial Fire Safety”, 1st Edition, P & A
Publications.
2.
Derek, James, “Fire Prevention Hand Book”, Butter Worths and Company, London, 1986.
3.
Jain V.K., Fire Safety in Building, New Age International (P) Ltd. Publishers, 2001.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Gupta, R.S., “Hand Book of Fire Technology” Orient Longman, Bombay, 2010.
2.
“Accident Prevention manual for industrial operations” N.S.C., Chicago, 1982.
3.
Dinko Tuhtar, “Fire and explosion protection – A system approach”, Ellis Horwood Ltd, 1989.
162
4.
“Fire fighters hazardous materials Reference Book Fire Prevention in Factories”, Nostrand Rein Hold,
New York, 1991.
5.
Lees F.P., “Fire Prevention and firefighting”, Loss prevention Association, India.
15MEA13
HIGH ENERGETIC MATERIAL - PROPELLANTS
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To study about the process of conversion of the high energy released by materials due to
decomposition into useful work.

This course deals with the study of the application of the released energy into different categories like
explosives, propellant and pyrotechnics.

To understand the background aspects of the different products of explosives, pyro techniques and
propellant by any engineering student.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Understand the classification of high energy materials according to the process.

Apply the release of energy into useful work in different categories.

Understand the basic characteristics and ingredients of Propellant.

Know about the basic process of pyro techniques.

Understand the various processing techniques of explosives in an ethical manner.

Materials: Inorganic materials, Ferrous and Non-ferrous materials.

Organic materials, Polymers.

Fundamentals of Combustion.

Chemistry of burning.

Hazardous materials.
UNIT I
EXPLOSIVE MATTER
9
High energetic material – Definition – Classifications – Explosives – Reactive explosive materials – Primary
explosives – Secondary explosives – Military explosives – Industrial explosives – Nitro explosives – Liquid
oxidizers and explosives.
UNIT II
GUN PROPELLANT
9
Low explosives - Gun propellant – Features - Deflagration – Ballistic property – Homogeneous propellant Single base propellant – Nitrocellulose – Stabilizer – Characteristics - Double base propellant – Nitrocellulose
and nitroglycerin – Additives - Extruded Double-Base Propellants - Cast Double-Base Propellants – Liquid
propellant.
UNIT III
ROCKET PROPELLANT
9
Rocket Propellant - Composite propellant – Features - Ingredients - Fuels, oxidizers, binders – Additives –
Cross linking agents – Plasticizers – Stabilizers – Burn rate modifier – Characteristics - Inhibition – Neutral and
Progressive burning– Inhibition techniques.
UNIT IV
PYROTECHNICS
9
Pyrotechnics – General features - Ingredients of Pyrotechnic Formulations – Fuel, Oxidizers, Binders,
Coolants, Retardants, Dyes, Color Intensifiers, Moderators – Characteristics- Pyrotechnic formulations Illuminating formulations - Delay formulations - Smoke formulations - Incendiary formulations.
UNIT V
PROCESSING TECHNIQUES FOR EXPLOSIVES
9
Extrusion - Casting types– Normal, Melt, Vibration, Squeeze casting, Pressing – Unidirectional, Double Action,
163
Incremental, Hydrostatic, Iso-static pressing – Stability of explosives – Vacuum stability test – Heat test –
Impact sensitivity test.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
“High Energy Materials – Propellants, Explosives and Pyrotechnics” Jai Prakash Agarwal, WILEYVCH Verlag GmbH & Co. KGaA, Weinheim, 2010.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
"High Energy Oxidisers for Advanced Solid Propellants and Explosives - Advances in Solid Propellant
Technology”, First International HEMSI Workshop, Ranchi, India, 2002, 87-106.
2.
“The Chemistry of Powder and Explosives”, Davis, Tenney L. – Open source downloadable.
15MEA14
DIRECT DIGITAL MANUFACTURING
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

Direct Digital Manufacturing technology and the associated Aerospace, Architecture, Art, Medical and
industrial applications.

Different types of Image capturing and Image processing techniques and its applications in various
fields.

Study of production of x-rays and its application to different medical Imaging techniques and different
types of Radio diagnostic techniques.

Study of digitization and special imaging techniques used for visualizing the cross sections of the body.

Understanding of various geometric modeling and meshing techniques.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Learn about the principle of Direct Digital Manufacturing (DDM) techniques, and along with their
potential applications to customized manufacturing.

Understand the basic concepts of reverse engineering and various image processing techniques.

Effectively employ the free form fabrication technique in launching a new product in market within a
short span of time.

Trained to find innovative solutions to fabricate highly intricate complex shapes by suitable digital
manufacturing technique.

Get exposure to various diagnostic applications of the medical imaging integrated with 3D Printing and
SDM technique.

Digitization Techniques.

Geometric modeling techniques.

Processing CAD Data (Selection of Orientation, Supports generation, Slicing, Toolpath generation).

Data Exchange Formats.

Reverse Engineering Techniques.

Medical Image sources, Medical Image Representation.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION AND CAD MODELING
11
Introduction of DDM - Need - Development of DDM systems – DDM process chain - Impact of DDM on Product
Development in various fields –Digital & Virtual prototyping -Benefits- Applications. Digitization techniques –
geometric modeling techniques: Wire frame, surface and solid modeling – Part orientation and support
164
generation, direct and adaptive slicing, Tool path generation.
UNIT II
REVERSE ENGINEERING AND MEDICAL IMAGING SYSTEM
9
Basics of Medical Image Sources: Radiology - Computed Tomography- Magnetic Resonance Tomography –
Medical Image Representation: Pixels and voxels - Image file formats- DICOM- Other formats- Medical image
analysis: Image segmentation - Image representation and analysis - Feature extraction and representation.
UNIT III
POWDER BASED DDM SYSTEMS
9
Selective Laser Sintering(SLS): Principle, process, Indirect and direct SLS- Powder structures, modeling of SLS,
materials, post processing, post curing, surface deviation and accuracy, Applications. Laser Engineered Net
Shaping (LENS): Processes, materials, products, advantages, limitations and applications– Case Studies.
UNIT IV
LIQUID BASED AND SOLID BASED DDM SYSTEMS
9
Stereo Lithography (SLA): Apparatus: Principle, per-build process, part-building, post-build processes, photo
polymerization of SL resins, part quality and process planning, recoating issues, materials, advantages,
limitations and applications. Solid Ground Curing (SGC): working principle, process, strengths, weaknesses and
applications. Fused Deposition Modeling (FDM): Principle, details of processes, process variables, types,
products, materials and applications. Laminated Object Manufacturing (LOM): Working Principles, details of
processes, products, materials, advantages, limitations and applications - Case studies.
UNIT V
3D PRINTING AND SHAPE DEPOSITION MANUFACTURING
TECHNIQUES
7
Three dimensional Printing (3DP): Principle, basic process, Physics of 3DP, types of printing, process
capabilities, material system. Solid based, Liquid based and powder based 3DP systems, strength and
weakness, Applications and case studies. Shape Deposition Manufacturing (SDM): Introduction, basic process,
shape decomposition, Mould SDM and applications.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
Chua C.K., Leong K.F., and Lim C.S., “Rapid prototyping: Principles and applications”, World Scientific
Publishers, 3rd Edition, 2010.
2.
Andreas Gebhardt, “Rapid prototyping”, Hanser Gardener Publications, 1st Edition, 2003.
3.
Steve Webb, “The Physics of Medical Imaging”, Medical Science Series, Institute of Physics Publishing,
Bristol, 1992.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
LiouW.Liou, Frank W.Liou,”Rapid Prototyping and Engineering applications: A tool box for prototype
development”, CRC Press, 2007.
2.
Ali K. Kamrani, EmadAbouel Nasr, “Rapid Prototyping: Theory and practice”, Springer, 2006.
3.
Peter D.Hilton Hilton/Jacobs, Paul F.Jacobs, “Rapid Tooling: Technologies and Industrial Applications”,
CRC press, 2000.
4.
Wolfgang Birkfellner, “Applied Medical Image Processing – A Basic course‟, CRC Press, 2nd Edition,
2014.
5.
R.C.Gonzalez and R.E.Woods, “Digital Image Processing‟, Pearson-Prentice-Hall, 2nd Edition, 2009.
15MEA15
INSTRUMENTAL ANALYSIS OF MATERIALS
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To know about the basic principles of spectroscopy.

To understand about the molecular spectroscopy.

To acquire knowledge about NMR and mass spectroscopy.

To inculcate about the separation techniques.
165
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3

To measure and evaluate about the surface properties.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Obtaining fundamental knowledge about optical spectroscopy.

Gaining knowledge about molecular and atomic spectroscopy.

Gathering enough knowledge in the field of nuclear magnetic resonance spectroscopy.

Studying about the separation of various constituents present in a mixture by chromatographic
techniques.

Acquiring knowledge about electrochemical analysis.

Material science, physics and chemistry.

Basic information on scattering processes involving X-rays,visible light, electrons.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION OF SPECTROMETRY
9
Properties of electromagnetic radiation- wave properties – components of optical instruments – Sources of
radiation – wavelength selectors – sample containers – radiation transducers – Signal process and read outs –
signal to noise ratio - sources of noise – Enhancement of signal to noise - types of optical instruments – Principle
of Fourier Transform optical Measurements.
UNIT II
MOLECULAR SPECTROSCOPY
9
Molecular absorption spectrometry – Measurement of Transmittance and Absorbance – Beer’s law –
Instrumentation - Applications -Theory of fluorescence and Phosphorescence Instrumentation – Applications –
Theory of Infrared absorption spectrometry – IR instrumentation - Applications – Theory of Raman spectroscopy
– Instrumentation – applications.
UNIT III
MAGNETIC RESONANCE SPECTROSCOPY AND
MASSSPECTROMETRY
9
Theory of NMR – environmental effects on NMR spectra –chemical shift-NMR spectrometers – applications of 1H
NMR- Molecular mass spectra – ion sources – Mass spectrometer. Applications of molecular mass – Electron
paramagnetic resonance- g values – instrumentation.
UNIT IV
SEPARATION METHODS
9
General description of chromatography – Band broadening and optimization of column performance- Liquid
chromatography – Partition chromatography - Adsorption chromatography – Ion exchange chromatography principles of GC and applications – HPLC- Capillary electrophoresis – Applications.
UNIT V
ELECTRO ANALYSIS AND SURFACE MICROSCOPY
9
Electrochemical cells- Electrode potential - EMF – potentiometry-reference electrode – ion selective and
molecular selective electrodes– Voltammetry – Cyclic and pulse voltammetry- Applications of voltammetry Study of surfaces – Scanning probe microscopes – AFM and STM.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
D.A. Skoog, F. James Holler, Stanky, R.Crouch, “Instrumental Methods of Analysis”, Cengage Learning,
2007.
2.
G. Aruldhas, “Molecular Structure and Spectroscopy”. PHI Learning Pvt Ltd, 2007.
3.
Elsa Lundanes, Leon Reubsaet, TygeGreibrokk. “Chromatography: Basic Principles, Sample
Preparations and Related Methods”, John Wiley & Sons, 2013.
4.
Fritz Scholz, “Electroanalytical Methods: Guide to Experiments and Applications”, Springer Science &
Business Media, 2009.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
James Keeler, “Understanding NMR spectroscopy”, John Wiley & Sons, 2011.
2.
Jack Cazes, “Encyclopedia of Chromatography”, Volume 2, CRC Press, 2005.
166
3.
Challa S.S.R. Kumar,“Surface Science Tools for Nanomaterials Characterization”, Springer, 2015.
15MEA16
BASICS OF AIRCRAFT AND SPACE TECHNOLOGY
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To provide in depth knowledge in the evolution of aircrafts.

To give understanding of concept of aerospace engineering.

To get exposed to the various aircraft materials and aircraft structures.

To develop knowledge in satellites and satellite launching vehicles.

To analyse the current trends in the field of Manned Mission.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

This course would make familiar of basic concepts of aviation.

Course would be helpful to understand the basic principle behind the aircraft structures.

Students would be trained in the current engineering materials and structures of an aircraft.

One would be able to make use of knowledge for the design of rocket, satellites, and space shuttles in
the field of inter-discipline.

This Course would equip the students to effectively enhance the concepts of aircrafts and spacecrafts.

Basics of Earth science, solar science.

Keen interest in Aerospace.

Basics of Material science.

Polymers, Ceramics.

Fuels-Liquids, solids and gases.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO AVIATION
9
Astronomy: overview of astronomy – know the sky – coordinate system – telescopes – flux, magnitudes – stars,
formation – solar system.
Atmospheric Science: Earth’s atmosphere, structure, classification, constituents– standard atmosphereIntroduction to space environment-Historical perspective of aviation.
UNIT II
AEROSPACE ENGINEERING
9
Aerodynamic forces – lift generation – aerofoils and wings – drag – anatomy of an aircraft – mechanism of thrust
production – propeller – jet engines and their operation – helicopters – aircraft performance – aircraft
instruments-fatigue failure in aircrafts – Airplane Disasters.
UNIT III
AIRCRAFT MATERIALS & STRUCTURES
9
Light-weight materials- FRP: GFRP, CFRP- Applications of FRP in principal parts of aircrafts.
Radome-fuselage-wings-landing gears-black box-Research Issues: smart skins in aircraft-structural health
monitoring (SHM) of aircrafts.
UNIT IV
ROCKETS & SATELLITES
9
Introduction to rockets – rocket propulsion engines – types of rockets- nozzles – propellants –rocket engines–
elements of liquid propulsion systems – solid rocket motors – rocket testing – launch preparation.
Types of satellites- present-day satellites- satellite structures- satellite operations-application of shape memory
alloy (SMA) in satellites.
UNIT V
LAUNCH VEHICLES FOR MANNED MISSION
9
Overview of Re-entry vehicles and Manned missions-Shuttle components -Orbiter Vehicle (OV), a pair of
recoverable solid rocket boosters (SRBs)-expendable external tank (ET) –Space shuttle disasters: A case study.
167
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1.
Megson, T. H. G., “Aircraft Structures for Engineering Students”, 4th Edition, Butterworth-Hein-emann,
2007.
2.
Turner, M. J. L., “Rocket and Spacecraft Propulsion: Principles, Practice and New Developments”, 3
Edition, Springer, 2009.
3.
Anderson, D. F. and Eberhardt, S., “Understanding Flight”, 2nd Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2009.
rd
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Wiesel, W. E., “Spaceflight Dynamics”, 2nd Edition, McGraw Hill, 1997.
2.
Kaplan, M. H., “Modern Spacecraft Dynamics and Control”, John Wiley and Sons, London, 1976.
3.
Thompson, W. T., “Introduction to Space Dynamics”, Dover Publications, New York, 1986.
4.
Cornelisse, J. W., “Rocket Propulsion and Spaceflight Dynamics”, Pitman, London, 1979.
5.
Anderson, J. D., “Introduction to Flight”, 7th Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2011.
Szebehely, V. G. and Mark, H., “Adventures in Celestial Mechanics”, 2nd Edition, Wiley, 1998.
15MEA17
INTRODUCTION TO MATLAB WITH ENGINEERING APPLICATIONS
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

Basic concept of Matlab.

Matlab codes and programming.

Exploit of the plotting.

Writing program for solving linear system, curve fitting, numerical integration & one dimensional
equation, which are needed for engineering disciplines.

Concept of Simulink, for solving engineering problem.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Extrapolate the basic of Matlab commands.

Write codes for simple applications.

Programming for solving linear system, Gaussian elimination, finite difference method, finite element
method.

Plot the graphs using code.

Familiar with the concepts of Simulink for engineering applications.

Basic programming concepts.

Analytical skills.

Matrix manipulations.

Linear algebra.

Plots.

Basics of modelling and simulations.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO MATLAB
9
Basic of Matlab- Matlab window, Input-Output, File Types, Platform dependence – Matrices and Vectors: Input,
Indexing, Matrix Manipulation, creating vectors- Matrix and Array Operations: Arithmetic, Relational, Logical,
Elementary math function, Matric function, character string.
168
UNIT II
PROGRAMMING IN MATLAB (SCRIPTS AND FUNCTIONS)
9
Script Files- Function Files: Executing a function, More on functions Language, Sub-functions, Compiled
function (P code) – Language Specific Features: variables, Loops, branches, control-flow, Interactive input,
Recursion, Input/output - Advanced Data Objects: Multidimensional matrices, Structures, Cells– programming
for simple problem like conversion of temperature.
UNIT III
GRAPHICS-PLOTTING
9
Basic2-D Plots: Style options, Labels, title, legend, and other text objects, Axis control, zoom-in, and zoom-out,
Modifying plots with Plot Editor, Overlay plots-3-D Plots: View, Rotate view, Mesh and surface plots, Vector field
and volumetric plots, Interpolated surface plots - Saving and Printing Graphs.
UNIT IV
APPLICATIONS
9
Computer implementation - development of codes- Linear Algebra: Solving a linear system, Gaussian
elimination, Finding eigenvalues & eigenvectors - Curve Fitting and Interpolation: Polynomial curve fitting, Least
squares curve fitting - Interpolation - Numerical Integration (Quadrature): Double integration - Ordinary
Diff erential Equations (ODE): first-order linear ODE, second-order nonlinear ODE.
UNIT V
INTRODUCTION TO SIMULINK AND ITS APPLICATIONS
9
Simulink and its Relation to MATLAB- library: sink, source, maths operation, logic & bit operations, discrete Modeling the Solution of Three Equations with Three Unknowns - Modeling a Fourth−Order Differential Equation
- Modeling an Electric Circuit - Applications: Moving Ladder, Conical Water Reservoir, Heat Flow, Cantilever
Beam Deflection, Feedback Control Systems.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
Rudra Pratap "Getting Started with MATLAB", Oxford University Press, 2002.
2.
Steven T.Karris, "Introduction to Simulink with Engineering Applications", Orchard Publications, 2nd
Edition, 2006.
®
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Moore Holly, "Matlab for Engineers" Prentice Hall, 2009.
2.
William J. Palm, "Introduction to MATLAB for Engineers”, 3rd Edition, 2010.
3.
Amos Gilat, "MATLAB: An Introduction with Applications", 3rd edition, 2008.
4.
Ferreira Ajm, "Matlab Codes for Finite Element Analysis - Solids and Structures", Springer, 2014.
15MEA18
MICRO AND NANO FABRICATION
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

Able to define the concepts involved in IC chip manufacturing.

Gain knowledge on various Nano deposition technologies.

To learn the etching technologies used in semiconductor industry.

Emphasize on the importance of doping and surface modification.

To define the concept of self-assembled monolayers for Nano device fabrication.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Gain knowledge on the wafer preparation techniques in IC industry.

Able to fabricate thin films for the fabrication of micro and nanodevices.

Able to apply the etching techniques in any prepared substrates for nanofabrication.

Learn the wafer technology applications and surface modification techniques.

Can design the self-assembled monolayers for nanofabrication.
169
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3

Knowledge in electronics, physics, chemistry, materials science with mathematical background.
UNIT I
CRYSTAL GROWTH, WAFER PREPARATION AND EPITAXY
9
Basic steps in IC fabrication - Electronic grade silicon – crystal plane and orientation – Defects in the lattice –
Czochralski crystal growing – Silicon shaping – Processing consideration – Vapour phase epitaxy – Liquid phase
epitaxy - selective epitaxy - Molecular beam epitaxy - Epitaxial Evaluation.
UNIT II
DEPOSITION TECHNOLOGIES
9
Deposition processes- Thermal, Plasma and Arc physical vapour deposition, Chemical vapour deposition
process- Atomic layer deposition process-Liquid phase deposition by spin coating, Spray coating, Dip coating,
Sol-gel Technology, Electrochemical and Chemical reaction deposition.
UNIT III
ETCHING TECHNOLOGIES
9
Etching Technology basics, Wet chemical etching – process, etching of single crystal silicon, etching of
insulators, semiconductors and conductors – Dry etching – physical etching, Chemical dry etching, PhysicalChemical process, Chemical etching – powder blasting, gas cluster ion beam etching (GCIB) technology.
UNIT IV
DOPING AND SURFACE MODIFICATION
9
Importance of doping and surface modification-Introduction into doping-Doping by diffusion-Doping by
implantation-Doping applications-MEMS applications, Wafer Technology applications- Thermal oxidation of
silicon- oxidation mechanisms, oxidation equipments and process.
UNIT V
NANOFABRICATION BY SELF-ASSEMBLY
9
Self-Assembly process- Introduction to self-assembly, Chemical, Physical and Colloidal Self-Assembly, Static
and dynamic Self-assembly, Directed self-assembly-Basics, Mechanisms-Surface topography and surface
wetting, Role of defects in self-assembly. Self-assembled monolayers (SAMs).
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
Hans H. Gatzen, Volker Saile, JurgLeuthold, “Micro and Nano Fabrication: Tools and Processes”,
Springer, 2015.
2.
Sami Franssila, “Introduction to Microfabrication”, Wiley Publications, 2010.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Mark J. Jackson, “Microfabrication and Nano manufacturing”, Taylor andFrancis Group, 2006.
2.
Bo Cui, “Recent advances in Nanofabrication Techniques and Applications”,InTech Publisher, 2011.
3.
Milton Ohring, “Materials Science of Thin Films: Deposition and Structure”, Academic Press, 2002.
4.
Rointan F. Bunshah, “Handbook of Deposition Technologies for Films andcoatings, science, Technology
and applications”, Noyes Publications, 1994.
FUNDAMENTALS OF NATURE INSPIRED ALGORITHMS
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
15MEA19
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The intention of this course is to

Give an overview of the fundamentals of a special category of algorithms developed from the
inspiration of natural things.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Understand the fundamentals of heuristic search algorithms.
170

Apply the concept of the natural behavior of agents in the optimization.

Understand different types of search algorithms.

Apply the behavior of ant in solving large sized computational problems.

Understand the basics of population base algorithms.

Calculus, Functions.

Linear and Non-linear Function.

Discrete and Continuous variables.

Maximum and minimum values of continuous function.

Discrete function.
UNIT I
HEURISTIC SEARCH ALGORITHMS
9
Introduction to Heuristic Algorithm – Robustness of traditional optimization and search methods – Goal of
optimization – Combinatorial optimization – Problem complexity – Classification of Search algorithms – Nature
inspired algorithms – Single point search algorithms – Population based algorithms.
UNIT II
SINGLE POINT SEARCH ALGORITHMS
9
Memory less single point search – Local search – Neighborhood search – Variable neighborhood search –
Iterated local search Simulated Annealing – Memory based search algorithms –Tabu search – Hybrid
algorithms.
UNIT III
EVOLUTIONARY ALGORITHMS
9
Search algorithm – Genetic algorithm – Coding methods –Phenotype and phenotype representation of
solution and mathematical foundation of Genetic Algorithm. Mapping of objective function – Fitness function –
Computer implementation of Genetic Algorithm– Data structure – Roulette Wheel selection – Genetic
operators – Cross over operators – various types – Mutation operators.
UNIT IV
ANT COLONY OPTIMIZATION
9
Advanced Population based search algorithms – Introduction to Ant Colony Optimization – Ant System –
Pheromone trail – Desirability factor – Variants in ant colony optimization – Simple applications.
UNIT V
PARTICLE SWARM OPTIMIZATION
9
Swarm intelligence – Particles and swarm – Objective and fitness function – Velocity of particle – Cognition
component – Social component – gbest and pbest concept – Evolution of PSO – Simple applications.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
David Goldberg, "Genetic Algorithm in search, Optimization and Machine learning", Addison–
Weseley Publishers.
2.
David Corne, et al. "New Ideas in Optimization" McGraw Hill Publishers. 1999.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
James Kennedy, Russell C. Eberhart, with Yuhui Shi, “Swarm Intelligence”, Morgan Kaufmann, 2001.
2.
AndriesEngelbrecht, “Computational Intelligence – an Introduction”, John Wiley and sons Ltd., 2007.
3.
Eric Bonabeau, Marco Dorigo, and Guy Theraulaz, “Swarm Intelligence: FromNatural to Artificial
Systems”, Oxford University Press, 1999.
15MEA20
ENERGY EFFICIENT BUILDINGS
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
171
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3

Design, construction and operation of energy efficient buildings.

Utilization of energy efficient technologies.

Energy efficient building codes.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course students will be able to understand and apply

The concepts and techniques of energy efficient buildings.

The concepts and techniques of different energy efficient technologies and energy conservation
measures in different equipment's used in buildings.

The concepts and techniques of indoor environmental quality.

The energy transfer in different buildings.

The policies, rules and regulation for energy efficient building thereby facilitating towards sustainable
development.

Basic knowledge in Refrigeration and Air-conditioning.

Sun, Earth movement.

Climate change.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
The sun-earth relationship and the energy balance on the earth's surface, climate, wind, solar radiation, and
solar temperature, sun shading and solar radiation on surfaces, energy impact on the shape and orientation of
buildings, thermal properties of building materials. Technology Roadmap on Energy-efficient Buildings.
UNIT II
ENERGY EFFICIENT TECHNOLOGIES
9
Passive cooling and day lighting, active solar and photovoltaic, building energy analysis methods, building
energy efficiency standards, different lighting technologies. Refrigeration and air conditioning systems, energy
conservation in pumps, fans and blowers, refrigerating machines, heat rejection equipment, energy efficient
motors, and insulation. Energy Efficiency Trends in Residential and Commercial Buildings, Energy Efficiency
in traditional buildings.
UNIT III
INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY
9
Psychrometry, comfort conditions, thermal comfort, ventilation and air quality, air conditioning requirement,
visual perception, auditory requirement, illumination requirement, choice of lighting, lighting standards, control
of lighting, lighting economics and aesthetics, energy saving, impacts of lighting efficiency, electronic ballast.
Ventilation – Requirements – Minimum standards for ventilation – Ventilation Design – Energy conservation in
ventilating systems.
UNIT IV
ENERGY TRANSFER IN BUILDINGS
9
Concepts of energy efficient buildings and energy efficient HVAC systems. Calculation of heating and cooling
loads of the building. Heating and Cooling Equipment. Building’s energy balance accounting for solar energy
gain – Heat losses - Internal heat sources. Study of climate and its influence in building design for energy
requirement. Low energy and zero energy buildings.
UNIT V
GREEN BUILDINGS
9
Ecological sustainable design, working group sustainable construction methods & techniques. Barriers to
green buildings, green building rating tools, material selection, embodied energy, operating energy, façade
systems, transportation, water treatment systems, water efficiency, building economics, LEED and IGBC
codes. Energy efficiency requirements in building codes, energy efficiency policies for new buildings.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
John Littler and Randall Thomas, “Design with Energy: The Conservation and Use of Energy in
Buildings”, Cambridge University Press, 1984.
172
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Edward G Pita, “An Energy Approach- Air-conditioning Principles and Systems”, Pearson Education,
2003.
2.
Colin Porteous, “The New Eco-Architecture”, Spon Press, 2002.
3.
Lever More G J, “Building Energy Management Systems”, E and F.N Spon, London, 2000.
4.
Means R.S., “Green building: project planning and cost estimating”, Kingston, 2006.
5.
Kibert C.J. “Sustainable Construction: Green Building Design”, Wiley, 2nd Edition, 2007.
6.
Eicker U., “Low Energy Cooling for Sustainable Buildings”, Wiley, 2009.
7.
Attmann O., “Green Architecture”, McGraw-Hill, 2010.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.bee-india.nic.in
2. http://www.iea.org
3. http://www.unep.org
15MEA21
WATER TREATMENT TECHNOLOGY
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To understand the quality of water parameters.

To know about the purification of water by filtration process.

To impart the knowledge about usage of membranes in water purification system.

To know about biological membrane system used in water purification.

To study about the fouling and other problems associated with membranes.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Understanding the quality of water parameters will be achieved.

Acquiring knowledge about different kinds of filtration techniques.

Gathering idea about usage of membranes in water purification system.

Understanding the effect of biological membrane system used in water purification.

Studying about the fouling and other problems associated with membranes.

UNIT I
Knowledge in physics, chemistry, materials science, environmental engineering, and safety
engineering.
WATER QUALITY CHARACTERISTICS
9
Physical, Chemical and Biological Characteristics of Water. Standard methods of determination of important
physical and chemical parameters of water qualities- PH, turbidity, electrical conductivity, total Solids, alkalinity,
hardness, Dissolved oxygen, BOD and COD - Units of measurements and expression of results- Estimation of
hardness (EDTA method only)- Bacteriological Indicators.
UNIT II
WATER PURIFICATION BY FILTRATION
9
Solid Liquid separation systems-Filtration systems- Theory of Membrane separation – mass Transport
Characteristics Cross Flow filtration-Membrane Filtration- Types and choice of membranes, porous, nonporous, symmetric and asymmetric – Plate and Frame, spiral wound and hollow fibre membranes – Liquid
Membranes.
UNIT III
MEMBRANE PROCESSES AND SYSTEMS
9
Microfiltration – Ultrafiltration- Nano Filtration – Reverse Osmosis – Electro dialysis- Evaporation -Membrane
manufactures – Membrane Module/Element designs – Membrane System components – Design of Membrane
systems - pump types and Pump selection – Plant operations – Economics of Membrane systems
173
UNIT IV
MEMBRANE BIOREACTORS
9
Introduction and Historical Perspective of MBRs, Bio-treatment Fundamentals, Biomass Separation MBR
Principles, Fouling and Fouling Control, MBR Design Principles, Design Assignment, Alternative MBR
Configurations, Commercial Technologies, Case Studies.
UNIT V
MEMBRANE FOULING
9
Membrane Fouling – Pretreatment methods and strategies – monitoring of Pretreatment – Langlier Index, Silt
Density Index, Chemical cleaning, Biofoulant control – Types of foulants and scalants – Natural organic matter
fouling - Impact of membrane material on fouling - Reversible and irreversible fouling- Prevention of fouling and
Fouling control.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
Klaus-Viktor Peinemann, Suzana Pereira Nunes, " Membranes for Water Treatment”, Volume 4, Wiley
publishers, 2010.
2.
Peter Hillis “Membrane Technology in Water and Wastewater Treatment”, RSC (Special Publications)
1st Edition, 2006.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Angelo Basile, Alfredo Cassano, NavinRastogi, “Advances in membrane technologies for water
treatment: Materials, process and applications”, Woodhead Publishing, 2015.
2.
Water Environment Federation (WEF), “Membrane Systems for Wastewater Treatment”, McGraw-Hill,
USA, 2005.
3.
Symon Judd, “The MBR Book – Principles and application of Membrane Bioreactors in water and
wastewater treatment”,Elsevier, 2006.
4.
Jorgen Wagner,” Membrane Filtration handbook, Practical Tips and Hints”, Osmonics Inc.,2nd Edition,
Revision2, 2001.
5.
Mulder M, “Basic Principle of Membrane Technology”, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 1996.
6.
Noble, R.D. and Stern, S.A., “Membrane Separations Technology: Principles and Applications”,
Elsevier, 1995.
Offered by IT Department
15ITA01
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER GRAPHICS
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To learn the output primitives like line, circle and ellipse using algorithms.

To study the 2-D and 3-D viewing and transformations.

To understand various, color models modeling and animation techniques.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Apply the line, circle and ellipse drawing algorithms

Apply the two dimensional geometric transformations and clipping

Apply the three dimensional geometric transformations

Work with color and illumination models

Apply different methods for Modeling

UNIT I
C Programming
INTRODUCTION
9
Introduction-Applications-Graphics systems-Output Primitives-representing Image-Straight Line-Line drawing
174
Algorithms-DDA Algorithm-Bresenhams’ Line Algorithm-Circle Generating Algorithm- Bresenhams’ Circle
Algorithm-Midpoint Circle Algorithm-Ellipse Generating Algorithm-Midpoint Ellipse Algorithm.
UNIT II
TWO DIMENSIONAL TRANSFORMATIONS
9
Introduction-Representation of points-Matrix Algebra and Transformation-Transformation of points- StraightlinesMidpoint Transformation-Transformation of parallel lines-Intersecting lines- Rotation - Reflection and scaling of
straight lines-Combined Transformations-Translation and Homogeneous Coordinates-Rotation about Arbitrary
point-Reflection about Arbitrary line-Windowing and clipping
UNIT III
THREE DIMENSIONAL TRANSFORMATION
9
Introduction-3D Transformation-Rotation about an axis parallel to coordinate Axis-Reflection about an arbitrary
axis in space-Reflection through an arbitrary plane-3D Modeling schemes-Projection-Orthographic-Isometricoblique-perspective-3D clipping
UNIT IV
COLOR AND ILLUMINATION MODELS
9
Introduction –colors-Illumination model and light sources-specular Reflection-Intensity Attenuation-ShadowReflectivity and refractivity- Radiosity Model-Texturing-Surface-Bump mapping-Environment Mapping-Shading
Methods
UNIT V
MODELLING CONCEPTS AND TECHNIQUES
9
Introduction - structures and Hierarchical Modeling-Advanced Modeling Techniques-Procedural Models-FractalsGrammar based Models-Physical based Modeling-Animation-Devices-Computer assisted-video formats-Frame
by Frame animation-Real Time Animation Techniques
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
Amarendra N Sinha, Arun D Udai, ”Computer Graphics”,Tata Mc-Graw Hill ,2008
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Foley, van Dam, Feiner and Hughes ,”Computer Graphics Principles and Practice”, Addison
Wesley,2004
2.
D Hearn and P M Baker ,”Computer Graphics”, Prentice Hall of India Second Edition,2008
3.
F .S. Hill, “Computer Graphics using OPENGL”, Second edition, Pearson Education 2003
WEB REFERENCES:
1.
http://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical-engineering-and-computer-science/6-837-computer-graphicsfall-2003/
2.
http://www.moshplant.com/direct-or/bezier/
3.
http://www.cs.mtu.edu/~shene/COURSES/cs3621/NOTES/spline/B-spline/bspline-curve-prop.html
4.
http://nptel.ac.in/
15ITA02
RICH INTERNET APPLICATION
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To create websites combining HTML/CSS

To develop an understanding in the basics of html like forms, lists, frames etc

To develop a design with CSS

To increase the quality of website design by formatting with styles

To evaluate a web page design and consider the issues
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Design a website in HTML
175
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3

Apply concepts of element header in HTML

Design a webpage using frames, forms, images etc..

Create styles for the HTML document

Apply presentation techniques for webpage with CSS
NIL
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION : MARKUP WITH HTML
9
HTML & XHTML – markup instructions & Language – Rules of XHTML - HTML Values and Units – Tag
Attributes- Text and Comments – Uniform Resource Indicators - Document Structure – Head & Body – Styles
Definition – Block Elements – Inline Elements – Organisational Elements – Link – Images - Comments
UNIT II
ELEMENT HEADER
9
Head – Document Title – Script & Style sections – Document background color and image – Text Structuring –
Character Formatting – Lists – Ordered – Unordered – Definition Lists – Links to a web page – Tables – Borders
and Rules – Rows and Cells – Formatting with Tables
UNIT III
FRAMES, FORMS AND MULTIMEDIA
9
Framesets – frame – links to frames – nested framesets – Forms – GET and POST – Form attributes – Textbox –
checkbox – radiobutton – listbox – Buttons – Hidden fields – Images - Insert a Image – sizing – image maps –
multimedia – animated images & videos – embedding media
UNIT IV
PRESENTATION WITH CSS
9
Styles and HTML – defining styles – cascading styles – style definitions – understanding selectors –
understanding style inheritance – pseudo-class – pseudo-elements – CSS value and units – inheritance and
cascade
UNIT V
FORMATTING WITH CSS
9
CSS Inheritance and cascade – Font properties – Text Formatting – CSS lists – Padding, margin and borders –
CSS layouts – CSS positioning – Pseudo-elements and generated content – Dynamic HTML with CSS
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
Steven M.Schafer, “ HTML, XHTML and CSS”, Wiley Publishing, Inc., Fifth edition 2010.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Chuck Musciano Bill Kennedy, “HTML & XHTML: The Definitive Guide”, O’Reilly, 6th Edition, October
24, 2006
2.
Thomas A. Powell, “Web Design: The Complete Reference”, McGraw Hill, June 2000
3.
Jeffrey C.Jackson, "Web Technologies--A Computer Science Perspective", Pearson Education, 2006
4.
Thomas Powell,”HTML & CSS: The Complete Reference”, McGraw Hill, Fifth Edition, Mar 2010
5.
Jon Duckett ,”Beginning Web Programming with HTML, XHTML, and CSS”, Wrox Publications, 2008
WEB REFERENCES:
1.
www.codecademy.com
2.
http://www.w3schools.com/html/
3.
http://www.w3schools.com/css/
4.
https://www.khanacademy.org/computing/computer-programming/html-css
5.
http://tutorialehtml.com/en/
6.
http://www.alternetwebdesign.com/htmltutorial/lesson1.htm
7.
http://www.htmlhelp.com/reference/css/
176
15ITA03
INTRODUCTION TO JAVA
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

Understand fundamentals of programming such as variables, conditional and iterative execution,
methods, etc.

Understand fundamentals of object-oriented programming in Java, including defining classes, invoking
methods, using class libraries, etc

Have the ability to write a computer program to solve specified problems

Be able to use the Java SDK environment to create, debug and run simple Java programs
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Write basic programs using fundamental structures.

Create basic programs using object oriented concepts.

Create classes that can handle exception and various errors handling mechanism.

Create Simple applications with GUI

Develop applications using applet and graphics.
Object Oriented Programming using C++
UNIT I
JAVA FUNDAMENTALS
9
Overview of JDK framework – Identifiers – variables – Assignment statements and Expressions – Constants Numeric data types, operations and conversions – String Type – Scanner class – if switch statements – while – do
while – for loop – nested loop- Defining a method- Calling a method – Passing parameters by values –
Overloading methods.
UNIT II
OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING CONCEPTS
9
Class Fundamentals-Using predefined classes--Constructors-Access control-Modifiers -Methods-Dealing with
Static Members and Methods-Method Overloading-Interfaces-Importing Packages-Understanding Class PathImplementing Packages-Java Doc Comments-Inheritance-Polymorphism.
UNIT III
EXCEPTION / ERROR HANDLING
9
Garbage Collection-Finalize () Method-Exceptions & Errors-Types of Exception-Control Flow In Exceptions-Use of
try -catch-finally-throw-throws in Exception Handling -In-built and User Defined Exceptions-Checked and Un
Checked Exceptions
UNIT IV
APPLICATION PROGRAMMING WITH GUI
9
Event-Driven Programming- Event and Event Sources – Listeners, Registration and handling events – Mouse
events – Key events -Introduction to Swings-Frame-Components-Text Input-Choice Components-Menus-Dialog
Box-Layout Management
UNIT V
APPLETS AND GRAPHICS
9
Applet class – JApplet class – Enabling applets to run as application – Passing string to applets – Html file and
applet tag- Graphics class – paint component method – Drawing graphics on panels – Drawing strings , lines,
Rectangles, and Ovals, Polygons , Polylines, FontMetrics class.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
th
Y.Daniel Liang “ Introduction to Java Programming” 7 Edition, Pearson Education,2013
177
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
P.J.Deitel & H.M.Deitel, “Java: How to Program Java 2”, Prentice Hall, Seventh Edition, 2011.
2.
Herbert Schildt, “Java The Complete Reference“,Tata McgrawHill, Eight Edition, 2011.
3.
E.BalaGurusamy, “Programming with java A Primer”, Tata McGraw, Hill Education, Fourth Edition, 2009
WEB REFERENCES:
1.
http://mark.random-article.com/weber/java/schedule.html
2.
http://www.oracle.com/technetwork/java/index.html
3.
http://docs.oracle.com/javase/tutorial/ -
4.
http://horstmann.com/corejava
5.
www.deitel.com
6.
http://www.kodejava.org/
7.
http://www.tutorialspoint.com/java
15ITA04
PERL
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To teach how to do programs in Perl

To study the basics of Perl syntax and constructs

To introduce list, arrays and hashes implementation in Perl

To read and write subroutines and data files

To parse and manipulate text with Perl regular expressions
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Devise Perl programs using scalar data and control structures

Develop simple programs in Perl using lists, arrays and hashing

Implement Perl Input Output programming

Apply and match regular expressions using Perl

Validate data using regular expressions

UNIT I
C Programming
SCALAR DATA
9
Perl programming introduction– Simple Perl program – Scalar data: Numbers – Strings – Variables – Operators–
Output with print – Getting user input – - The undefined value – Defined functions control structure - if – elseif while – unless – until – for control – loop control – conditional operator – logical operator
UNIT II
LIST, ARRAYS AND HASHES
9
Array elements – indices – List literals – Assignment – Interpolating arrays into strings – For each control structure
– Scalar and list context – Hash – Hash Element Access – Hash Assignment – Hash Functions – Use of Hash %Env Hash
UNIT III
SUB ROUTINES AND IO
9
Sub routines definition– invoking sub routines – return variables – arguments – private variables – variable length
parameter list – lexical variables – non-scalar return values – persistent private variables – Standard input output –
formatted output – opening and using file handle
UNIT IV
REGULAR EXPRESSION
9
Regular expression definition – using simple patterns – character classes – matching with regular expression –
anchors – match variables - precedence
178
UNIT V
PROCESSING REGULAR EXPRESSION
9
Substitution – split operator – join operator - list context – powerful regular expression – Perl Modules – finding
modules – installing modules – using modules – strings and sorting
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
Tom Christiansen, Randal L. Schwartz, Larry Wall, “Learning Perl”, O'Reilly Media, Sixth Edition, 2011.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Tom Christiansen, brian d foy, Larry Wall, Jon Orwant “Learning Perl”, O'Reilly Media, Fourth Edition, 2012.
2.
Harvey M. Deitel, Paul J. Deitel, Tem R. Nieto, D. C. McPhie, “Perl How to Program”, Prentice Hall, First
edition, 2001.
WEB REFERENCES:
1.
http://www.tutorialspoint.com/perl/
2.
https://www.perl.org
3.
http://www.cs.cf.ac.uk/Dave/PERL/
15ITA05
FUZZY SYSTEMS
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To understand the role of fuzzy logic for decision making problems

To choose various fuzzy inference systems and approximate reasoning for decision making

To understand the impact of fuzzy system for group decision making

To understand how to evaluate the criteria in structured situations

To learn to hybrid fuzzy with decision making methods
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Identify the decision making problems in fuzzy environments

Identify the suitable FIS for decision making

Implement fuzzy concepts for multi-person decision making

Solve complex problems using multi-criteria decision making

Integrate fuzzy with decision making methods for ranking
NIL
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Introduction – The Logic of Decisions, Behavioral Decision Theory and Decision Technology – Optimization –
Outranking – Evaluation – Basics of Fuzzy Set Theory – Individual Decision Making in Fuzzy Environments
UNIT II
DECISION SUPPORT SYSTEMS
9
Knowledge Based Vs Data based Systems – Linguistic Variables – Fuzzy logic – Approximate Reasoning – An
Interactive Decision Support System – Fuzzy and Semi Fuzzy Multi Objective Problems – Expert Systems and
Fuzzy Sets
UNIT III
MULTI-PERSON DECISION MAKING IN FUZZY ENVIRONMENTS
9
Basic Models – Fuzzy Games – Fuzzy Team Theory – Fuzzy Group Decision Making – Fuzzy Mathematical
Programming - Fuzzy Linear and Non Linear Programming – Fuzzy Multi Stage Programming
UNIT IV
MULTI CRITERIA DECISION MAKING IN STRUCTURED SITUATIONS
9
Fuzzy Multi Criteria Programming – Multi Attribute Decision Making – Fuzzy Outranking – Operators and
179
Membership functions in Decision Models
UNIT V
DECISION MAKING WITH FUZZY INFORMATION
9
Fuzzy Synthetic Evaluation – Fuzzy Ordering – Non Transitive Ranking – Preference and Consensus –
Multiobjective Decision Making – Fuzzy Bayesian Decision Method – Decision Making under Fuzzy States and
Fuzzy Actions
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
Hans J.Zimmermann, “Fuzzy Sets, Decision Making and Expert Systems”, International Series in
Management Science/Operations Research, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 1987
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Timothy J.Ross , “Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications”, Third Edition , Wiley Publication, 2012
2.
S. N. Sivanandam & S. N. Deepa, Principles of Soft Computing, Wiley - India, 2007.
3.
S. Rajasekaran & G.A. Vijayalakshmi Pai, “Neural Networks, Fuzzy Logic and Genetic Algorithm: Synthesis
and Applications” Prentice Hall of India ,2003
WEB REFERENCES:
1.
https://www.uic.edu/classes/idsc/ids422/lect2.ppt
2.
www.clei.org/cleiej/papers/v13i3p4.pdf
3.
www.math.ucdenver.edu/~wlodwick/m4-5779/lecture3fuzzylogic.ppt
15ITA06
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
GRAPHICS PROGRAMMING
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To explore the basic Primitives and attributes in OpenGL

To study the geometric objects and transformations

To Understand the various lighting and shading effects

To gain a proficiency with OpenGL by applying Modeling techniques, curves and surfaces
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Apply basic Primitives and Attributes for 2D transformations

Work with 3D transformations using OpenGL

Implement Lighting and shading effects

Apply various Modeling Techniques

Apply various Curves and Surfaces for different objects

UNIT I
C Programming
GRAPHICS PROGRAMMING
9
Introduction-Sierpinski Gasket-Programming 2D Applications-OpenGL Application Programming InterfacePrimitives and Attributes-Color-Viewing-Control Functions-Gasket program-Polygons and Recursions-3D
Gasket-Adding Interaction-Menus
UNIT II
GEOMETRIC OBJECTS AND TRANSFORMATIONS
9
Scalars points and Vectors-3D primitives-Coordinate systems and Frames-Frames in open GL-Modeling a
colored cube-Affine Transformations-Translation - Rotation and scaling-Transformation in homogeneous
coordinates-Transformation matrices in OpenGL-spinning of the cube-Interface to 3D applications- quaternionclassical and computer viewing-parallel, Perspective Projections with OpenGL-Hidden surface Removal
180
UNIT III
LIGHTING AND SHADING
9
Light and Matter-Light sources-The Phong Reflection Model-computation of vectors-Polygonal Shadingspecifying Light Parameters-Implementing a Lighting Model-Shading of the sphere Model-Per Fragment
Lighting-Vertices to fragments-Clipping-Line Segment Clipping-Polygon Clipping-Clipping in 3D-RasterizationBresenhams Algorithm-Polygon Rasterization-Hidden Surface Removal
UNIT IV
MODELING AND HIERARCHY
9
Symbols and Instances-Hierarchical Models-A Robot Arm-Trees and Traversal-Animation –Graphical objectsScene Graphs-Open Scene Graphs-Graphics and Internet-Procedural Methods-Algorithmic Models-Newtonion
Particles-Constraints-A Simple Particle System-Language Based Models-Recursive Methods and fractalsProcedural Noise
UNIT V
CURVES AND SURFACES
9
Representation of curves and surfaces-Design Criteria-Parametric cubic Polynomial Curves-InterpolationHermite curves and surfaces-Bezier curves and surfaces-Cubic B Splines-General B Splines-Rendering curves
and surfaces-Utah teapot-Advanced Rendering-Parallel-volume-Direct Volume-Image Based Rendering
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
Edward Angel ,Dave Shreiner ,”Interactive Computer Graphics: A Top-Down Approach with ShaderBased OpenGL” ,Sixth Edition,2011
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Sumanta Guha Computer Graphics Through OpenGL: From Theory to Experiments, CRC Press,
Second Edition, 2014
2.
Tom McReynolds, David Blythe ,”Advanced Graphics Programming Using OpenGL”Morgan
Kauffmann,2005
3.
Clayton Walnum,” 3-D graphics programming with OpenGL,” Que, 1995
WEB REFERENCES:
1.
http://learnopengl.com/
2.
http://www.videotutorialsrock.com/
3.
http://www.cs.uccs.edu/~ssemwal/indexGLTutorial.html
4.
http://www.opengl-tutorial.org/
5.
http://courses.cs.vt.edu/~cs4204/lectures/opengl_basics.pdf
15ITA07
PHP PROGRAMMING
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To introduce web development with PHP

To work with various operations in PHP

To model the design in a web environment

To develop a webpage with database

To test and work with a PHP application
181
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Create simple basic PHP programs

Create programs using functions and strings

Explore the usage of arrays and objects

Implement graphics, security and web techniques in designing

Implement database connectivity with PHP
NIL
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO PHP
9
PHP – History and Evolution – Installation – Language Basics – Lexical Structure – Data types – Variables –
Expression & Operators – Flow Control statements – embedding PHP in web pages
UNIT II
FUNCTIONS & STRINGS
9
Calling a function – Defining a function – Variable scope – function parameters – return values – variable
functions – Strings – Quoting string constants – Printing string – cleaning strings – encoding and escaping –
comparing strings – manipulating and searching strings UNIT III
ARRAYS & OBJECTS
9
Indexed versus Associative Arrays – Identifying elements of an array – Storing data in arrays – Multidimensional
arrays –Extracting multiple values – Conversion between arrays and variables – Traversing arrays – Sorting –
Working with arrays – Objects – Creation – Accessing Properties and methods – Declaration of class –
Introspection
UNIT IV
WEB TECHNIQUES, GRAPHICS & SECURITY
9
HTTP basics – Server Information – Processing Forms –Setting Response Headers – Maintaining State – SSL –
Graphics – Embed an image – Create and draw images – Images with text – Dynamic buttons – Color handling
– Security – Cross site scripting – File uploads and Access
UNIT V
DATABASE ACCESS & APPLICATION
9
PHP to access a database – Relational databases and SQL – MySQL object interface – Connectivity – Direct file
level manipulation – Application techniques – code libraries – handing output - error reporting and suppression –
performance tuning
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
Kevin Tatroe, Peter MacIntyre & Rasmus Lerdorf, “Programming PHP”, Creating Dynamic Web Pages,
O'Reilly Media, 3rd Edition, 2013
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Steven Holzner ,”PHP: The Complete Reference”, McGraw Hill Education,2008
2.
Timothy Boronczyk , Martin E. Psinas,”PHP and MYSQL: Create - Modify – Reuse”, Wiley India Private
Limited ,2008
3.
Matt Doyle,”Beginning PHP 5.3”, Wiley Publishing Inc., 2009
WEB REFERENCES:
1.
http://php.net/
2.
http://www.tutorialspoint.com/php/
3.
http://www.toves.org/books/php/ch03-first/index.html
4.
http://www.codecademy.com/en/tracks/php
5.
http://www.w3schools.com/php/
182
15ITA08
ANDROID APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT
L
3
T
0
P
C
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To build your own android application for you mobile devices

To understand how android application works.

To utilize the power of background services, thread and notifications

Secure, tune, package and deploy android applications.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Use Android SDK for simple applications

Create Graphical user interfaces for Android application.

Create Android application for data processing and management

Create location based services using android

Test the Android application

UNIT I
Java Programming
INTRODUCTION TO ANDROID
9
Introduction to Android Architecture: Introduction, History, Features and Android Architecture. Android
Application Environment, SDK, Tools: Application Environment and Tools, Android SDK. Programming
paradigms and Application Components Intents, Content providers, Broadcast receivers, Services
UNIT II
USER INTERFACE DESIGN
9
User Interface Design Views &View Groups, Views : Button, Text Field, Radio Button, Toggle Button, Checkbox,
Spinner, Image View, Image switcher, Event Handling, Listeners, Layouts : Linear, Relative, List View, Grid
View, Table View, Web View, Adapters. Menus, Action Bars, Notifications : Status, Toasts and Dialogs, Styles
and Themes, Creating Custom Widgets, Focus, Touch Mode, Screen Orientation. Designing for Tablets –
Working with tablets: Developing for the Honeycomb and Ice Cream Sandwich platforms, Manipulating objects
with drag and drop, Optimizing applications for high screen resolution, combining fragments into a multilane UI.
Resources, Assets, Localization: Resources and Assets, Creating Resources, Managing application resources
and assets, Resource-Switching in Android. Localization, Localization Strategies, Testing Localized Applications,
Publishing Localized Applications
UNIT III
DATA STORAGE
9
Content Providers: Contents provider, Uri, CRUD access, Browser, CallLog, Contacts, Media Store, and Setting.
Data Access and Storage: Shared Preferences, Storage External, Network Connection. SQLite - SQLite
Databases
UNIT IV
NATIVE CAPABILITIES
9
Camera, Audio, Sensors and Bluetooth: Android Media API: Playing audio/video, Media recording. Sensors how sensors work, listening to sensor readings. Bluetooth. Maps & Location: Android Communications: GPS,
Working with Location Manager, Working with Google Maps extensions, Maps via intent and Map Activity,
Location based Services. Location Updates, location-based services (LBS), Location Providers, Selecting a
Location Provider, Finding Your Location, Map - Based Activities, Load maps, Map API key.
UNIT V
TESTING
9
Testing: Testing and Commercializing Applications - Basics of Testing, Testing from an IDE (Eclipse), Activity
testing, Service testing, Content provider testing, Test Classes, Debugging using DDMS.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
183
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
Reto Meier, “Professional Android 4 Development”, John Wiley and Sons, 2012
2.
W. Frank Ableson, RobiSen, Chris King and C. Enrique Ortiz, “Android in Action”, Third Edition, 2012
REFERENCE BOOKS
1.
Wei-Meng Lee, “Android Application Development Cookbook”, John Wiley and Sons, 2013.
2.
Grant Allen, “Beginning Android 4, Apress, 2011.
WEB REFERENCES:
1.
W1. https://developer.android.com
2.
W2. http://www.androidcentral.com/apps
3.
W3. https://www.opensesame.com/c/android-app-development-beginners-training-course
15ITA09
PYTHON PROGRAMMING
L
3
T
0
P
0
C
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

Understand fundamentals of programming such as variables, conditional and iterative execution,
methods, etc.

Understand fundamentals of object-oriented programming in python, including defining
invoking methods, using class libraries, etc

Have the ability to write a program to solve specified problems
classes,
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Develop basic programs using fundamental structures.

Create programs using various collection data types.

Apply appropriate Python control flow structure.

Implement user defined python functions.

Design classes and use them
NIL
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Python object types – Numeric Type Basics – Numeric Literals –Built in Numeric Tools – Python Expression
operators – Numbers in action – Other numeric types – String Literals – Strings in action – String methods –
String formatting expressions – String formatting method calls – General type categories
UNIT II
LISTS AND DICTIONARIES
9
Lists in action – Basic list operations – List Iteration and comprehensions – Indexing, Slicing and Matrixes –
Changing list in place – Dictionaries – Dictionaries in action – Basic dictionary operations – Changing
Dictionaries In place – Dictionary methods – A language table – Dictionary usage notes – Other ways to make
dictionary – Tuples – Files – Python Type Hierarchies
UNIT III
STATEMENT AND SYNTAX
9
Introducing Python statements- A Tale of Two ifs – Assignment statements – Expression statements – Print
operations – if statements – Python syntax rules – while loops – for loops – Loop coding techniques – Iterators –
List comprehension –
184
UNIT IV
FUNCTIONS
9
Coding functions- Scope basics – scope rules – global statement – Scopes and nested functions – Nonlocal
statement – Argument Passing Basics – Special Argument Matching modes – function design conceptsRecursive functions – function objects – Anonymous functions – mapping functions
UNIT V
CLASSES AND OOP
9
Class coding basics – Class Statement – Methods – Inheritance – Attribute tree construction – specializing
Inherited methods – Class Interface Techniques – Abstract super classes -Namespaces –simple names –
Attribute names – Namespace dictionaries – Operator overloading – Designing with classes
TOTAL: 45 Periods
TEXT BOOK:
Mark Lutz , “Learning Python” , Fifth Edition, O,Reilly, 2013
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Jason Cannon, “Python Programming for Beginners” O,Reilly, 2010
2.
David Beazley , Brain K Jones “Python CookBook” Third edition,2013
3.
CHUN, WESLEY J ”Core Python Programming”, Pearson Education 2012
4.
GUTTAG, JOHN V ”Introduction to Computation and Programming Using Python”, PHI Learning Private
Limited, New Delhi, 2014
WEB REFERENCES:
1.
http://www.tutorialspoint.com/python/
2.
http://www.learnpython.org/
3.
http://www.codecademy.com/en/tracks/python
4.
http://www.pyschools.com/
5.
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=cpPG0bKHYKc&noredirect=1
6.
http://www.python-course.eu/python3_course.php
15ITA10
DECISION MAKING METHODS
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To understand the logic of MCDM Methods

To learn how to do pairwise comparison

To learn to do normalization of attributes

To understand the role of fuzzy logic for decision making problems

To understand various MCDM methods to choose the best alternative
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Explore various MCDM methods for decision making

Apply quantification methods for decision making problems

Evaluate using relative weights for the attributes in order of relative importance

Apply fuzzy with MCDM methods for decision making

Evaluate the results of fuzzy with MCDM to choose the best alternative
NIL
185
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Multi- Criteria Decision Making – A General Overview – Classification of MCDM Methods – WSM – WPM – AHP
– Revised AHP – TOPSIS
UNIT II
QUANTIFICATION
9
Qualitative data for MCDM problems – Scales for Quantifying Pair wise Comparisons – Evaluating different
scales – Simulation – Analysis of the Computational Results
UNIT III
EVALUATION OF WEIGHTS
9
Deriving Relative Weights – Sensitivity Analysis – Evaluation of methods – Process a decision matrix – Ranking
abnormalities
UNIT IV
FUZZY MULTI- CRITERIA DECISION MAKING
9
Fuzzy Operations – Ranking of Fuzzy Numbers - Fuzzy WSM method – Fuzzy WPM method – Fuzzy AHP
method – Fuzzy Revised AHP method – Fuzzy TOPSIS method
UNIT V
FUZZY EVALUATION CRITERIA
9
Testing the methods – First Evaluative Criterion – Second Evaluative Criterion - Computational Experiments Analysis
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
1.
Evangelos Triantaphyllou, “Multi-criteria Decision Making Methods: A Comparative Study”,
Academic Publishers, Springer 2000.
Kluwer
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Witold Pedrycz, Petr Ekel, Roberta Parreiras, “Fuzzy Multicriteria Decision-Making: Models, Methods and
Applications” , Wiley 2010
2.
Hans J.Zimmermann, “Fuzzy Sets, Decision Making and Expert Systems”, International Series in
Management Science/Operations Research, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 1987
3.
Timothy J.Ross , “Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications”, Third Edition , Wiley Publication, 2012
WEB REFERENCES:
1.
www.ccse.kfupm.edu.sa/.../Multi-Criteria%20Decision%20Making.ppt
2.
www.ccse.kfupm.edu.sa/~duffuaa/download/Courses/.../TOPSIS.ppt
3.
https://www.uic.edu/classes/idsc/ids422/ahp.ppt
Offered by Bio-Tech Department
15BTA01
BASIC CELL AND MOLECULAR BIOLOGY
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

Understand the basics of cellular structure and function.

Gain knowledge about the genetic basis of life.

Understand the regulation of gene expression at transcript and protein level.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of the course students will be able to

Know the basic structure and function of cell and its organelles and its significance for proper functioning
of the cell.

Be aware of the nature of the genetic materials, mechanism of replication and expression.

Be able to appreciate and analyse the basic differences between the cellular organization and
regulation of genes between eukaryotes and prokaryotes.
186
Basic understanding of Biological Sciences.
UNIT I
CELL STRUCTURE
9
Structural Organization: Prokaryotic and Eukaryotic cell - Cell wall: Primary and Secondary structure model and
function - Plasma membrane: Channels, pumps and receptors - Plasmodesmata - Cell organelles: structure and
functions - Ultra structure and semi autonomous nature of chloroplast and mitochondria.
UNIT II
CELLULAR ORGANELLES
9
Structure and function of Organelles: Nucleus, ER, golgi complex, ribosome, lysosome, chromosomeLampbrush, polytene - Microscopy – light microscope, compound microscope, electron microscope, dark field
microscope, phase contrast microscope - Cell cycle and cell division.
UNIT III
GENETIC MATERIAL
9
Identification of DNA as genetic material – Watson and Crick model of DNA - Structure of DNA and RNA - DNA
replication: Semi conservative Nature of replication - DNA polymerases in prokaryotes- the processes of DNA
replication- Replication in eukaryotes - Mitochondrial DNA replication.
UNIT IV
GENE EXPRESSION
9
Transcription – RNA polymerase, sigma factors - Difference between prokaryotic and eukaryotic transcription Regulation of gene expression - Operon concept.
UNIT V
THE GENETIC CODE AND PROTEIN SYNTHESIS
9
Genetic code - Codons - Anticodons - Wobble hypothesis - Protein synthesis- the stages of protein synthesis the process of translation in prokaryotes, factors involved in translation - the triplet nature of genetic code - an
overview of comparisons with eukaryotic translation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
De Robertis, E.D.P. and Robertis, E.M.C., “Cell and Molecular Biology”. Lippincott William & Wilkins, NY, 8th
Edition, 2010.
2.
Freifelder, D. “Molecular Biology”. Narosa Publishing House, 2nd Edition, 2008.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Benjamin L., “Gene VII” Oxford University Press: 2000.
2.
Watson J. D., Hopkins N. H., Roberts J. W., Steitz J. A., Weiner A. M., “Molecular biology of the Gene”, The
Benjamin/Cumming Publishing Company Inc., 4th Edition 1992.
3.
Snyder L & Wendy W., “Molecular Genetics of Bacteria”, ASM press, Washington DC, 2nd Edition, 2003.
15BTA02
BASIC MICROBIOLOGY
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

History of microbiology and techniques used in microbiology.

Characteristic features of prokaryotes, eukaryotes and viruses.

Impact of microbes on environment, health and disease.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Understand the diversity of microbes.

Have knowledge of culturing and controlling the microbes.

Become familiarized with the significance of microbes in daily life.
187
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
Basic understanding of Biological sciences
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO MICROBIOLOGY
9
History & Development of microbiology - Microscopy: Simple, Compound Microscopy - Staining: Principle and
technique of simple & differential staining, (Gram, Acid-fast & Endospore staining).
UNIT II
STRUCTURE OF MICROORGANISMS
9
Prokaryotes and Eukaryotes - Virus; Bacteria: Bacterial morphology & subcellular structures (General
morphology of bacteria, shapes & sizes) - Slime layer & capsule, Cell wall structure of gram positive and gram
negative cells General account of Ribosome, Flagella & Fimbriae - Chromatin materials, plasmids and
episomes - Endospore: Detailed study of endospore structure & its formation - Basis of resistance.
UNIT III
BACTERIAL GROWTH AND NUTRITION
9
Cultivation of microbes: Growth rate and generation time - Nutritional types of microbes - Culturing bacteria
Media, Sterilization – Physical and chemical sterilizing agents – Principle, Mode of action and application culturing techniques.
UNIT IV
ENVIRONMENTAL MICROBIOLOGY
9
Role of microorganisms in biogeochemical cycles (N, P and C cycles) – Biodegradation of xenobiotics
(pesticides) – Microbes in waste treatment: solid and liquid wastes – sewage treatment (Primary, secondary &
tertiary treatments) – COD & BOD – pollution indicating microbes – Biofertilizers.
UNIT V
MICROBES IN HEALTH AND DISEASE
9
Human Normal Microflora: Skin, stomach, Small Intestine, Large Intestine, Genitourinary tract - Relationship
between normal microbiota and the host - Principles of Infectious Diseases: Epidemiology, Infectious Disease
cycle - Pathogen transmission - control of epidemics – Case study, disease caused by viruses, bacteria, fungi
and protists, food borne and water borne diseases - an overview.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
Pelczar M.J., Chan E.C.S., Krein N.R., “Microbiology”, Tata McGraw Hill Edition, 5th Edition, 2008.
2.
Prescott L.M., Harley J.P., Klein D.A., “Microbiology”, Wm. C. Brown Publishers, 9th Edition, 2013.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Black, J.G., Black, L.J. “Microbiology-Principles and Explorations”, Wiley 9th Edition, 2014.
2.
Murray R., “Manual of Clinical Microbiology: Illustrations”, American Society for Microbiology, 9
2007.
15BTA03
BASIC BIOCHEMISTRY
Edition,
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To impart basic knowledge of chemistry of biomolecules.

To understand the structure, function and metabolism of carbohydrates, proteins and lipids.

To learn the biochemistry of the genetic material.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Understand the chemical nature of biologically significant molecules.

Correlate the function and significance of the biomolecules with their chemical structure.

Appreciate the chemical nature of biological processes.
188
th
Basic understanding of Biological sciences.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO BIOMOLECULES
9
Water and Life – pH and Buffers - Law of Thermodynamics: Entropy and enthalpy - Chemical bonds in
biochemistry-molecular structures, Biomolecules and their functional groups - Biochemical evolution.
UNIT II
CARBOHYDRATES
9
Structure of monosaccharides, sterioisomerism and optical isomerism of sugars - Reactions of aldehydes and
ketone groups - Ring structure and anomeric forms – mutarotation - Structure, occurrence and biological
importance oligosaccharides and polysaccharides - Carbohydrate metabolism: glycolysis, gluconeogenesis TCA cycle.
UNIT III
PROTEINS
9
Structure and Function - Primary, Secondary, Tertiary and Quaternary structures - Enzymes and their
classifications - General properties of enzymes (pH, Temperature, Substrate concentrations) - 3-D structure of
proteins - amino acid sequencing - Metabolism of amino acids - Metabolism of aromatic amino acids – Inborn
errors of metabolism.
UNIT IV
LIPIDS
9
Definition and classification - Fatty acids: Introduction, classification, nomenclature, structure and properties of
saturated and unsaturated fatty acids - Essential fatty acids - Triacylglycerols: nomenclature, physical properties,
chemical properties and characterization of fats - hydrolysis, saponification - rancidity of fats - Biological
significance of fats.
UNIT V
NUCLEIC ACIDS
9
Chemical nature of nucleic acids - Double helical structure - Nucleic acid denaturation - Classes of nucleic acidsMetabolism of nucleic acids - Synthesis of purines and pyrimidines.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
Nelson, D.L., M.M. Cox, “Lehninger’s Principles of Biochemistry”, W.H.Freeman & Co., 6th Edition, 2012.
2.
Stryer L., “Biochemistry”, W.H.Freeman & Co., 7th Edition, 2011.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Voet D., Prat W.C., Voet J., “Principles of Biochemistry”, John Wiley and Sons, 4th Edition 2012.
2.
Wilson K., Walker J., “Principles and Techniques of Biochemistry and Molecular Biology”, Cambridge
University Press, 7th Edition, 2010.
15BTA04
BASIC IMMUNOLOGY
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To impart knowledge about the organization of immune system.

To familiarize students with basic components in innate immunity.

To introduce students to the critical role of adaptive immune system and vaccination concepts.

To familiarize students with immune system disorders.

To make students understand the importance of transplantation and immunotherapy.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Able to understand the various types of cells and organs involved in immune system.

Able to illustrate the various barriers of innate immunity and importance of complement system.

Able to understand the various concepts and molecules of adaptive immunity and methods involved in
189
vaccine designing.

Able to analyze the reason behind the various autoimmune disorders.

Able to apply the concepts of immunology immunotherapy of infectious diseases and transplantation.
Basic knowledge in microbiology, genetics, and cell biology.
UNIT I
ORGANIZATION OF IMMUNE SYSTEM
9
History - Hematopoiesis - Primary & Secondary lymphoid organs - Myeloid cells, Lymphoid cells, Dendritic cells
and Natural killer cells.
UNIT II
INNATE IMMUNITY
9
Innate immunity: Anatomical, Physiological, Phagocytic and Inflammatory barriers - The complement system:
Overview - Induced innate responses to infections.
UNIT III
THE ADAPTIVE IMMUNE AND INFECTION
9
Cell-Mediated Immune response: T cell mediated response, Humoral Immune Response - Antibodies: Structure
of Immunoglobulins, Immunoglobulin subtype - T cell receptor - Cytokines: functions, Infectious agents and how
they cause disease: Bacterial (Tuberculosis), viral (Influenza) and parasitic infection (helminthes) - vaccines:
history, principle of vaccination - Conventional and recombinant vaccines.
UNIT IV
IMMUNE DISORDERS
9
Inherited immunodeficiency diseases: SCID, DiGeorge’s syndrome, X-linked agammaglobulinemia - Acquired
Immune Deficiency Syndrome: AIDS - Hypersensitivities: Type I, II, III and IV - Autoimmune responses: Graves
disease, Rheumatoid Arthritis, Diabetes Mellitus Type I, II - Myesthenia gravis.
UNIT V
TRANSPLANTATION AND IMMUNOTHERAPY
9
Tissue typing and matching transplantation: Heart, Liver, Kidney – Immunosuppression - Transplant rejection Immunotherapy: Infections, Cancer.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
Kuby J., “Immunology”, WH Freeman & Co., 6th Edition, 2000.
2.
Roitt I., Brostoff M., “Immunology”, Mosby Publication, 8th Edition, 2012.
3.
Immunobiology by Janeway , Travers, Walport, Sclomchik, Garland Science; 7th edition, 2007.
4.
Abbas, K.A., Litchman, A.H., Pober, J.S., “Cellular and Molecular Immunology”, W.B. Saunders Co.,
th
Pennsylvania, 7 Edition, 2011.
5.
William E.P., “Fundamental Immunology”, Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 7th Edition, 2012.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Ashim K.C., “Immunology and Immunotechnology”, Oxford University Press, 1st Edition, 2006.
2.
Christine D., “Clinical Immunology and Serology: A laboratory Perspective”; F.A. Davis Co., 3rd revised
Edition, 2009.
15BTA05
CHEMICALS IN ENVIRONMENT AND PUBLIC HEALTH
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

Define the major sources and types of environmental agents and discuss the transport and fate of these
agents in the environment.

Identify the carriers or vectors that promote the transfer of these agents from the environment to the
human.

To understand the procedures and requirement for hazardous waste management and
knowledge on the policies, legislations.
190
gain the
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Understand the relationship between environment and human health.

Able to understand the impact of hazardous waste on environment and human health.

Acquire the knowledge about the Environmental Management Policies and Practices.
Environmental Science, Physics, Chemistry.
UNIT I
ENVIRONMENT AND HEALTH
9
Human impact on the environment - Environment-human interaction - Environmental impact on humans - Indoor
and outdoor air - Water & Soil pollution - Exposure, dose and Response - Food and water-borne disease.
UNIT II
IMPACT OF INDUSTRIAL PRODUCTS AND HAZARDOUS WASTE
9
Non Hazardous wastes - Hazardous wastes: Metals, chemical, drugs, leather, pulp, electroplating, dye, rubber Hazardous wastes on environment and human heath: case studies (chemical accumulation in plants - Cadmium
in rice, Hexachlorobenzene in seed grains : Cancer, neurological disorder, acute lung diseases, behavioural and
mental effects - Carbamate pesticide in watermelons: Gastrointestinal, skeletal, muscle, autonomic and central
nervous system effects, , Lead in paint) - Food adulterants and their impact on human health.
UNIT III
IMPACT OF BIOMEDICAL WASTES
9
Characteristics & sources – BMW: Segregation, collection, transportation, disposal - Liquid BMW - Radioactive
waste - Metals / Chemicals / Drug waste - Modern technology for handling BMW Monitoring & controlling of cross
infection - Health and Environmental effect: case studies.
UNIT IV
IMPACT OF NUCLEAR WASTES
9
Sources - Types of Nuclear waste - Nuclear power plants and fuel production Waste generation from nuclear
power plants - Disposal options, Defining risk and environmental risk - Methods of risk assessment - Measures
and health effects: case studies.
UNIT V
ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT POLICIES AND PRACTICES
9
Environment and pollution - definition as per Environmental law - General powers of Central and state
Government under EPA - Important Notification in EPA 1986 - Constitution of Pollution Control Boards - Powers,
functions, Accounts, Audit etc. - Equitable remedies for pollution control - Solid waste management – Hazardous
Wastes (Handling and Management) Rules 1998, Biomedical Wastes (Handling and Management) Rules 1998.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
Rodricks J.V., “Calculated Risks- The Toxicity and Human Health Risks of Chemicals in Our Environment”,
Cambridge University press, 2nd Edition, 2007.
2.
Lippmann M., “Environmental toxicants: Human exposures and their health effects”, New York: Van
Nostrand Reinhold, 1992.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Philp, R. B., “Environmental hazards and human health”, Boca Raton: Lewis Publishers, 1995
2.
Eckenfelder Jr. W .W., “Industrial Water Pollution Control”, McGraw-Hill Book Company, New Delhi, 2000.
3.
Michel, Mckinney, Robert,
Publishers, Canada, 2007.
Logan, “Environmental Science – Systems & Solutions”, Jones & Barlett
191
15BTA06
BIOLOGICAL WASTE MANAGEMENT
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

Hazardous wastes and its effects.

Disposal of biological wastes.

Safe handling and management of biological wastes.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

To understand about hazardous wastes, its origin and effects on public health.

To impart knowledge about sources of biohazardous wastes, risks associated and regulatory aspects of
health care wastes.

To understand the methods of treatment, disposal and management of biological wastes.
Environmental Science, Physics, Chemistry.
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO HAZARDOUS WASTE
9
Hazardous waste - Classifications of hazardous waste and its sources - Effects on public health and
environment.
UNIT II
BIO HAZARDOUS WASTE
9
Biological, Biomedical and Healthcare wastes – Sources - Bio hazardous wastes classification - Risks associated
with bio hazardous waste - Need for control.
UNIT III
LEGISLATIVE, REGULATORY AND POLICY ASPECTS OF HEALTHCARE WASTE
9
National policies and its five guiding principles - Available guidance – World health organization (WHO), The
International Solid Waste Association (ISWA) and its policy document.
UNIT IV
BIOLOGICAL WASTE TREATMENT AND DISPOSAL
9
Segregation, storage and transport of healthcare and biological wastes - Treatment and disposal method
healthcare waste - Disposal of biological and sharp wastes - Health and safety practices for health-care
personnel and waste workers.
UNIT V
MANAGEMENT OF BIO HAZARDOUS WASTES
9
Healthcare waste - Management planning - Infectious waste management plans - Healthcare waste minimization,
reuse and recycling.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
Blackman W. C., “Basic Hazardous Waste Management”, CRC Press, 3rd Edition, 2001.
2.
Henry J. G., Heinke G. W., “Environmental Science and Engineering”, Pretice Hall of India, 2nd Edition,
2004.
3.
Cheremisinoff, N. P., Cheremisinoff P. N., “Hazardous Materials and Waste Management: A Guide For The
Professional Hazards Manager”, Noyes Publications, 1995.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Panda H., “The Complete Book on Biological Waste Treatment and their Utilization”, NIIR Project
Consultancy Services, 2013.
EXTENSIVE READING:
1.
Safe Management of Wastes from Health-Care Activities, 2nd Edition, WHO, 2014.
192
2.
Biomedical waste (Management and Handling) Rules, Ministry of Environment & Forests, 1998.
15BTA07
NANOBIOTECHNOLOGY
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To provide the knowledge in basics of Nanobiotechnology.

Understand the application of nanomaterials in biotechnology and acquire the knowledge about the
DNA, proteins, amino acids, drug delivery, biomedicine etc.,

To make the students understand about the functional principles of bionanotechnology.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Able to understand physicochemical properties of nanomaterials and the unique changes that happen at
nanoscale.

Able to understand nanoscale view of the natural biomolecular processes, synthesis, modification, and
characterization of nanomaterials.

Able to understand the application of nanomaterials to biological problems including nanomedicine.
UNIT I
NANOSCALE AND NANOBIOTECHNOLOGY
9
Introduction to Nanoscience and Nanotechnology - Milestones in Nanotechnology - Overview of
Nanobiotechnology and Nanoscale processes - Physicochemical properties of materials in Nanoscales - Lessons
from Nature on making nanodevices.
UNIT II
NANOMATERIALS
9
Types and synthesis of Nanomaterials: Quantum dots, Nanoparticles, Nanocrystals, Dendrimers, Buckyballs,
Nanotubes - Gas, liquid, and solid phase synthesis of Nanomaterials - Lithography techniques (Photolithography,
Dip-pen and Electron beam lithography) - Thin film deposition – Electrospinning - Bio-synthesis of nanomaterials.
UNIT III
PROPERTIES AND MEASUREMENT OF NANOMATERIALS
9
Optical Properties: Absorption, Fluorescence, and Resonance - Methods for the measurement of Nanomaterials Microscopy measurements: SEM, TEM, AFM and STM - Confocal and TIRF imaging.
UNIT IV
PROTEIN AND DNA BASED NANOSTRUCTURES
9
Protein based nanostructures: building blocks and templates – Proteins as transducers and amplifiers of
biomolecular recognition events – Nanobioelectronic devices and polymer nanocontainers – Microbial production
of inorganic nanoparticles –Magnetosomes .DNA based nanostructures – Topographic and Electrostatic
properties of DNA and proteins – Hybrid conjugates of gold nanoparticles – DNA oligomers – Use of DNA
molecules in nanomechanics and Computing.
UNIT V
APPLICATIONS
9
Nanoparticles as carrier for genetic material – Nanotechnology in agriculture – Nanomedicine - Drug delivery DNA computing - Molecular design using biological selection - Harnessing molecular motors - Artificial life Hybrid materials – Biosensors - Future of Bionanotechnology - Health and environmental impacts of
nanotechnology.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1.
Christof M. Niemeyer and Chad A. Mirkin, “Nanobiotechnology: Concepts, Applications and Perspectives”,
Wiley VCH, 1st Edition, 2004.
2.
Oded Shoseyov and Ilan Levy “NanoBiotechnology: BioInspired Devices and Materials of the Future”,
Humana Press; 1st Edition 2007.
193
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Sandra J Rosenthal and David W. Wright, “NanoBiotechnology Protocols (Methods in Molecular Biology)”,
Humana Press; 1st Edition, 2005.
2.
Clarke. A.R. and Eberhardt C. N. (Editors), “Microscopy Techniques for Material Science”, CRC Press. 1
Edition, 2002.
15BTA08
HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY
st
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

The basic architecture of human body.

Organization of human organ systems.

Physiological significance of the human organ system.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Understand basic human anatomy.

Know the functions of different organs and their significance.

Implement the knowledge for up-keeping good health.
UNIT I
GENERAL ANATOMY OF THE BODY
9
Introduction to basic concepts of: Body planes, Tissues (Types, origin & function) organs.
UNIT II
BLOOD
9
Composition of blood – Haemopoesis - Structure and function of hemoglobin - Haemostasis (all types of clotting
mechanisms) - Blood groups and introduction to basic concepts of transfusion.
UNIT III
NERVE PHYSIOLOGY
9
Origin of resting membrane potential and action potential - Electrophysiology of ion channels - Structure and
function of neuron - Conduction of nerve impulse in a neuron - Synapse, its types and synaptic transmission Neurotransmitters, types and functions.
UNIT IV
MUSCULAR SYSTEM AND ENDOCRINOLOGY
9
Types of muscles - Functional anatomy of muscular system - Concepts of degeneration and regeneration of
muscle - Neuromuscular transmission - Muscle excitation and contraction - Types of contraction and its
properties - General mechanism of hormone action - Glands and their hormone, structure, function, regulation.
UNIT V
CARDIOVASCULAR SYSTEM
9
Structure and function of heart - Cardiac cycle - Basic concepts of electrocardiogram (ECG) - Circulatory system
and hemodynamic - Lymph and lymphatic circulation - Blood pressure (causes and factors affecting it).
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
th
1.
Stuart I. F H., “Human Physiology” McGraw- Hill, 13 Edition, 2012.
2.
Guyton and Hall, “Text book of Medical Physiology”, W B Saunders and Company, 13th Edition, 2015.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Gerad J. T., Sandra R. G., “Principles of Anatomy and Physiology - Control systems of human body, Vol-3”,
Wiley and Sons, 10th Edition, 2006.
2.
Barett K.E., Barman S.M., Boitans S., Brook H., “Ganong’s Review of Medical physiology”, Tata McGraw
Hill, 23rd Edition (Lange basic science), 2009.
194
Offered by MBA Department
15BAA01
ESSENTIALS OF FINANCE
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To develop an understanding of business related finance.

To have an understanding of finance in order to contribute to the organization’s success.

To improve the financial skills in order to make critical business decisions involving budgets, cost
savings and growth strategies.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course the student will be able to:

understand financial terms

interpret financial statements

make decision on budgeting and investment

communicate with financial experts
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION TO FINANCE
9
Role for Finance for Individual and Organization – Goals and Functions of Finance - Time Value of Money –
Significance
UNIT II
FINANCIAL PLANNING AND DECISIONS
9
Financial Planning – Decisions – Investment Decision – Financing Decision - Dividend Decision - Evaluation of
Investment Projects and Financing – Working Capital
UNIT III
FUNDS MANAGEMENT
9
Funds Mobilization – Sources – Internal and external
UNIT IV
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
9
Financial Statements - Balance Sheet – PL account - Cash/Fund Flow - Analysis
UNIT V
OVERVIEW OF INDIAN FINANCIAL MARKETS
9
Financial System – Bank and Financial Institutions – Capital Market - Money Market
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
th
I. M. Pandey, “Financial Management”, (10 ed.), Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., 2013.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
th
1.
Prasanna Chandra, “Financial Management”, (7 ed.), Tata McGraw Hill, 2008.
2.
Khan M Y and Jain P K, “Financial Management”, (6 ed.), McGraw Hill, 2013.
th
15BAA02
ESSENTIALS OF MARKETING
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To understand the basics of Marketing Management as a functional area of an organisation.

To understand the basic elements that makes up the marketing function.

To understanding the functions of a marketing department.

To understand the importance of marketing to an organisation.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course students will be able to:
195

Describe a Marketing Department and the functions of a marketing department.

Choose and understand the needs of the customers.

Combine the four Ps of marketing to design a marketing model

Have a basic ideas on how a market segmented and customers are targeted.

Have a basic understanding on the elements of the marketing mix
UNDERSTANDING MARKETING MANAGEMENT – AN OVERVIEW
UNIT I
9
Introduction, Marketing department functions, Selling vs Marketing, Marketing concepts (Marketers and
Prospects, Needs, Wants, and Demands, Value and Satisfaction), Basics of Market segmentation, Target
markets and Positioning.
THE MARKETING MIX ELEMENT – PRODUCT
UNIT II
9
Introduction, Characteristics of the product life cycle and their marketing implications, Facets of the PLC, New
product development, The market diffusion process, Organizing for new product development
THE MARKETING MIX ELEMENT – PRICE
UNIT III
9
Introduction, Price and the marketing mix, Pricing objectives, Factors affecting pricing decisions, Setting a price,
Pricing industrial goods, Pricing and information technology
THE MARKETING MIX ELEMENT – PROMOTION
UNIT IV
9
Communications contact techniques (Promotion mix) - Advertising, Direct marketing, Sales promotion, Personal
selling, Sponsorship, Publicity
THE MARKETING MIX ELEMENT – PLACE: CHANNELS OF DISTRIBUTION
UNIT V
9
Introduction, Intermediaries in channels of distribution - Sales agents, Distributors, Wholesalers, Retailers, Franchising,
Internet marketing.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOK:
Marilyn A. Stone, John Desmond, “Fundamentals of Marketing” (Special Indian Edition), Routledge, Taylor
& Francis Group, 2014.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
th
1. William J. Stanton, Michael J. Etzel, Bruce J. Walter, “Fundamentals of Marketing”, (10 ed.), TMH, 1994.
th
2. Philip Kotler, “Marketing Management: A South Asian Perspective”, (14 ed.), Pearson India, 2012.
15BAA03
ESSENTIALS OF HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT
L
T
P
C
3
0
0
3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:

To make the participant understand the role of HR Department in an organization

To know the various functional areas of HRM

To understand the recent developments in HR
COURSE OUTCOMES:

Students will understand the basic concepts in HRM

Students will be aware of human resource requirement for an organization

Students will be aware of the ways for developing the skills and knowledge of the employees

Students will be able to understand the motivation model in an organization

Students will be aware of present development in HR
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION
9
Introduction to HRM – Meaning, Importance and Objectives, History of Managing Human Resources,
196
Environment of HR. Functions and Roles of HR Manager
UNIT II
PROCUREMENT OF HUMAN RESOURCES
9
Job Analysis – Meaning, Process and Methods, Human Resource Planning – Importance, Process, HR Demand
and Supply Forecasting Techniques. Recruitment – Importance, Recruitment Sources, Selection – Process
Socialization / Induction – Importance and Types
UNIT III
DEVELOPMENT / TRAINING
9
Training – Purpose, Process – Need Identification, On-the-Job Methods and Off-the-Job Methods. Executive
Development Programmes – Difference from training. Performance Appraisal – Process, Techniques – MBO and
360 Degree Feedback. Job Changes - Promotion, Demotion and Transfer
UNIT IV
COMPENSATION AND MOTIVATION
9
Job Evaluation – Meaning, Process, Compensation Plan – Deciding factors & Framing Process. Human Needs –
Motivation Theories – Maslow’s Need theory and Herzberg’s two factor theory, Applications – Rewards and
Reinforcement. Grievances – Causes and Redressal methods. Disciplinary Action – Nature and Types
UNIT V
MAINTENANCE AND SEPARATION
9
The Factories Act, 1948 – Health, Safety and Welfare Provisions. The Industrial Employment (Standing Orders)
Act, 1946 – Framing Standing Order. Separation – Retirement, Layoff, Out-placement & Discharge. Latest trends
in HRM - HRIS – Meaning and Implementation Process. E-HRM.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
st
1.
Arun Monappa, “Managing Human Resources”, (1 ed.), Trinity Press Publications, 2014.
2.
Dessler, “Human Resource Management”, (12 ed.), Pearson Education Limited, 2011.
th
REFERENCE BOOKS:
th
1.
Aswathappa K., “Human Resource Management”, (7 ed.), 2013, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.
2.
Decenzo and Robbins, “Human Resource Management”, (10 ed.), Wiley, 2010.
3.
Mamoria C.B & Mamoria S., “Personnel Management”, Himalaya Publishing Co., 2010.
4.
Eugence Mckenna & Nic Beach, “Human Resource Mgmt”, (2
th
nd
ed.), Pearson Education Ltd, 2008.
th
5.
Wayne Cascio, “Managing Human Resource”, (9 ed.), Tata McGraw Hill, 2012.
6.
Ivancevich, “Human Resource Management”, (12 ed.), Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2012.
th
197

r2015 (full time) - Mepco Schlenk Engineering College, Sivakasi

Transcription

Similar documents

DIGITAL SYSTEMS

Fifth Grade Textbooks - Duneland School Corporation

14. Państwo

My Brother, My Sister: Shannon Boodram Rob Hill, Sr.

Stone Hill Flowering Pear L.E. COOKE CO

Summer Work for Students Entering AP Calculus AB

Using Pearson SuccessNet

10/3 Dragon0Do-Right Assembly 6:00 Homecoming Parade 10/8

BackPack Level 1 Little Books

fantastic fabric prices! quilting cottons